Quarterlytics / Clipper Logistics plc / FY2019 Annual Report

Clipper Logistics plc
Annual Report 2019

CLG · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker CLG
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2019 Annual Report · Clipper Logistics plc
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 
and Accounts 2019

C

l

i

p

p

e

r

L

o

g

i

s

t

i

c

s

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

9

Continued evolution  
in a dynamic world

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Who we are. 
What we do.

About us

Logistics is crucial to your business. 
Nobody understands that better  
than us. But logistics is changing.  
Over the past decade the retail 
environment has transformed beyond 
recognition, and in this market place, 
the traditional approach to logistics  
is fast becoming extinct.

Consumer expectations have grown, financial pressures 
have slowed demand and competition has increased to 
give consumers more choice. And these factors combine  
to make the retail sector more competitive and  
complicated than ever before.

We understand just how business-critical logistics is, and 
that’s why we’re constantly challenging conventions to 
improve your business performance and help you meet  
the changing dynamics of retail with cutting edge  
logistics management solutions.

What makes us different

Thought leader  
Clipper has a strong brand, long-standing 
customer relationships and an experienced team, 
which combine to deliver thought leadership and 
innovation within the logistics sector.

Diverse customer portfolio  
Our customer portfolio comprises both large omni-
channel operations as well as shared-user sites 
with smaller retailers. We pride ourselves on being 
able to operate across the entire retail sector.

Agile and able 
We have a flexible, flat organisational structure that 
gives customers direct access to our senior team. 
We have experts in warehouse design, system 
design and testing, project management and 
implementation, and the operational management 
to ensure rapid delivery of effective solutions. 

Talented people  
We’re experts in retail and high value logistics. 
We have the facilities, the processes, the experience, 
the fleet and, most importantly, the people to deliver 
on contracts of all sizes. We see the bigger picture 
without neglecting the day-to-day detail.

Highlights

Group revenue

Group EBIT

£460.2m

£20.2m

(2018: £400.1m)
+15.0%

(2018: £20.9m)
-3.1%

4
6
0
.
2

4
0
0
.
1

3
4
0
.
1

2
9
0
.
3

2
3
4
.
8

2
0
.
9

2
0
.
2

1
7
.
9

1
4
.
7

1
0
.
9

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Group profit after tax

£13.4m

(2018: £14.3m)
-6.1%

1
2
.
5

1
0
.
3

7
.
3

1
4
.
3

1
3
.
4

Earnings per share

13.2p

(2018: 14.2p)
-7.0%

1
0
.
3

7
.
3

1
4
.
2

1
3
.
2

1
2
.
5

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Cash generated from operations

Dividend per share

£28.3m

(2018: £24.5m)
+15.5%

2
5
7

.

2
4
5

.

2
8
3

.

2
0
.
5

1
2
.
6

9.7p

(2018: 8.4p)
+15.5%

6
0

.

4
.
8

8
4

.

7
2

.

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Contents

Strategic Report
1 
Highlights
8  At a Glance
10  Chairman’s Statement
12  Our Markets
16  Our Business Model
18  Our Strategy
20  Risk Management
20  Principal Risks and Uncertainties
23  Viability Statement
24  Our People
28  Sustainability
30  Operating and Financial Review

Governance
36  Board of Directors
38  Corporate Governance Report
42  Nomination Committee Report
43  Audit Committee Report
46  Directors’ Remuneration Report
 –  Implementation Report  
47 

on Remuneration

52 

 –  Appendix: Directors’  
Remuneration Policy

58  Directors’ Report
62 

 Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities in respect of  
the Annual Report and the 
Financial Statements

Independent Auditor’s Report

Group Financial Statements
63 
70  Group Income Statement
 Group Statement of  
70 
Comprehensive Income
 Group Statement of  
Financial Position
 Group Statement of Changes  
in Equity

72 

71 

9
7

.

73  Group Statement of Cash Flows
74 

 Notes to the Group  
Financial Statements

Company Financial Statements
103  Company Statement of  

Financial Position

104  Company Statement of  
Changes in Equity
105  Notes to the Company  
Financial Statements

121   Directors, Secretary, Registered  
& Head Office and Advisors

1

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019Evolving our supply 
chain model in a 
dynamic world

Clicklink
Consumers’ evolving demand for convenient 
methods of shopping has led to an increasing 
trend towards the use of Click and Collect 
services. Our launch of Clicklink offers a 
cost-effective sortation and delivery service 
guaranteeing next day, in store, time-banded 
delivery for collection by customers. 

Combined with our streamlined returns 
management process, Boomerang, we are 
able to offer a closed loop solution with choices 
both retailers and customers want.

Clicklink revenue1

(2018: £19.7m) +14.7%

£ 22.6m

1.   These numbers are provided in order to give an indication of Clicklink’s size and 
growth. However, please note that this amount is not actually consolidated into 
Group revenue since it arises in a joint venture company.

2

Clipper Logistics plc £9.8bn

The demand for Click and Collect 
services within the UK is expected 
to rise by 55.6% over the next five 
years to £9.8bn (source: GlobalData).

Next day delivery, seven 
days a week to satisfy 
customer expectations  
in an evolving marketplace.

Up and running in a matter of days, 
Clicklink is able to grow a business 
and adapt to customers’ evolving 
retail needs.

Case study
Working with  
John Lewis

Clipper has been working in 
partnership with John Lewis 
since January 2010, providing 
an e-fulfilment fashion solution 
from our ‘Centre of E-fulfilment 
Excellence’ facility at Ollerton. 
Since 2015, John Lewis and 
Clipper have worked together 
to create a specialist click and 
collect service to take advantage 
of the ever-evolving demand 
from the modern online shopper 
and growth in alternative delivery 
methods for online sales; Clicklink.

Evolving supply chain
Recent years have seen 
consumers increasingly demand 
speed and convenience in 
their order, delivery and returns 
options. Clicklink was developed 
with this in mind; to provide 
a seven day a week retailer-
focused solution. The technology 
and the retail logistics backbone 
of Clipper provided the 
infrastructure required, with John 
Lewis providing the extensive 
retail knowledge and expertise.

The Clicklink solution provides 
a daily store delivery service to 
all retail locations, principally of 
orders placed online, although 
store replenishment can be 
provided too. The collaboration 
also set about implementing 
and integrating the Clipper 
Boomerang returns management 
solution to provide a rapid, end-
to-end, process. By streamlining 
and simplifying both the Click 
and Collect and returns process, 
Clipper has helped John Lewis 
drastically reduce processing 
times for deliveries, returns 
and customer refunds, whilst 
having a positive impact on 
customer service.

Clicklink now provides a multi-user 
platform for Click and Collect and 
returns services, with 13 customers 
now using the service.

3

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019Strong and 
strategically  
placed in Europe

Market growth
European B2C e-commerce turnover is forecast 
to hit €621 billion in 2019, growth of 13.6% year-
on-year. Germany has the second highest 
penetration rate of online retail in Europe after 
the UK.

Our European credentials
In Germany, we operate from five locations 
from where we conduct a range of e-fulfilment 
and non e-fulfilment operations. Together 
with our newest distribution centres in Poznan´, 
Poland, our central European network of 
transport hubs and warehouses give us a sound 
strategic base from which to service the growing 
European e-fulfilment markets. 

Forecast European B2C  
e-commerce turnover

(2018: €547bn) +13.6%

€621bn

4

Clipper Logistics plc 

Clipper’s pan-European approach 
is particularly important to our 
customers, given the continued 
uncertainties around Brexit. Indeed, 
we now conduct operations for ASOS 
and Mountain Warehouse out of both 
the UK and mainland Europe from 
different subsidiaries, meaning that 
our customers’ UK-mainland Europe 
cross-border trading concerns can be 
allayed, or at least reduced.

We also operate out of a facility in 
Dublin giving us a base from which 
we can serve the Irish market.

Revenue generated by Clipper’s  
Polish subsidiary
(2018: £5.4m) +131.0% 

£12.6m

Polish turnover was £12.6 million in the year 
ended 30 April 2019 and, at the time of 
writing, we now have 164 employees.

Case study
New Poland 
operation

Our German subsidiary 
was invited to tender for 
an e-fulfilment operation for 
Westwing, an online home 
furnishings retailer based 
in Germany. Our response 
contemplated a cost-effective 
logistics solution which would 
allow the customer to benefit 
from lower labour and property 
rental costs in Poland than 
in Germany.

We identified a greenfield site, 
in Robakowo, Poznan´, Poland, 
which was designed and built by 
a developer. On commencement 
of the three year contract with 
Westwing, we initially committed 
to a five year lease for 107,000 
square feet, commencing 
April 2017. 

We subsequently won a contract 
to perform returns work for 
ASOS in Poland, commencing 
October 2017 taking an additional 
73,000 square feet in the 
same warehouse.

The contractual scope and  
term of the services performed for 
Westwing were extended in July 
2018. In order to accommodate 
this growth, we leased a further 
375,000 square feet of new 
build space in an adjacent 
site. In March 2019, we began 
a new e-fulfilment operation for 
Mountain Warehouse, taking on 
a further 40,000 square feet of 
space in an adjacent building.

Annual Report and Accounts 2019

55

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportPowerful returns 
management 
process and 
partnerships

Technical Services 
Our Technical Services operation, within the 
Logistics segment, adds to the comprehensive 
range of returns management services across the 
whole spectrum of apparel, general merchandise 
and electronic & electrical equipment.

We’ve delivered unique, omni-channel 
and tailored solutions for some of the UK’s 
biggest retailers.

What helps set us apart from the competition 
is our ability to do it your way, and the strong 
relationships we form with our customers.

Technical Services EBIT

(2018: £0.7m) +52.0%

£1.0m

6

Clipper Logistics plc 

Case study
Technical 
Services,
Northampton 

The Clipper Technical Services 
operation is the UK’s leading 
consumer electrical repair 
and refurbishment organisation. 
It maximises yields on returns 
for customers and has a host 
of accredited warranty repair 
services through to specialist 
e-commerce solutions.

Specialising in B2B returns and 
B2C services, the complete service 
offering, backed by extensive 
manufacturer accreditations, 
is unrivalled in the UK consumer 
electronics service sector.

Our specialist electrical 
returns capability perfectly 
complements Clipper’s market-
leading returns management 
service, Boomerang. 

We have commenced an 
electrical returns service for John 
Lewis at our Northampton facility. 

This is a box-in-box solution where 
Technical Services is located 
in one of Clipper’s depots in 
Northampton, where we perform 
the rest of our ancillary returns 
and pre-retail activities for John 
Lewis. This includes RFID (Radio 
frequency identification) tagging 
and ensuring that John Lewis’s 
inbound shipments are compliant 
with the requirements of their 
automated distribution centre. 

We don’t only manage product 
returns. We identify new opportunities, 
reduce unwanted returns, refurbish 
and control reusable assets to recover 
maximum economic value for 
our customers.

Annual Report and Accounts 2019

7
7

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report/ Strategic Report
At a Glance

Clipper is managed through two 
distinct operating segments: value-
added logistics services (comprising 
e-fulfilment & returns management 
services and non e-fulfilment logistics); 
and commercial vehicles.

Segment and business activity details

/  E-fulfilment & returns management
This business activity includes the 
receipt, warehousing, value-added 
processing, stock management, 
picking, packing and despatch of 
products on behalf of customers to 
support their online trading activities, 
as well as a range of ancillary support 
services, including the management 
of the returns process for customers. 
At no time does Clipper take 
ownership of customers’ products.

/  Non e-fulfilment

This business activity includes 
receipt, warehousing, value-added 
processing, stock management, 
picking, packing and distribution 
of products on behalf of customers. 
Clipper does not take ownership 
of customers’ products at any stage. 
Clipper also undertakes traditional 
retail support services including 
processing, storage and distribution 
of products.

/  Commercial vehicles

The commercial vehicles business, 
Northern Commercials, operates  
Iveco and Fiat commercial vehicle 
dealerships from five locations, 
together with three sub-dealerships. 
It sells new and used vehicles, 
provides servicing and repair 
facilities, and sells parts.

E-fulfilment & returns management revenue

(2018: £159m) +46.8%

£234m

Non e-fulfilment logistics revenue

(2018: £139m) +4.4%

£145m

Commercial vehicles revenue

(2018: £104m) -20.3%

£83m

51%

31%

18%

Note: The amounts and percentages shown indicate the contribution to Group revenue by each 
business area disregarding inter-segment sales.

8

Clipper Logistics plc  Logistics depots

 Commercial vehicle sites

46

Locations

36

 10.4m

Square feet covered

6,698

Distribution centres

Employees

Ireland

UK

Poland

Germany

Our investment case

1. Sector focus
/  Clipper is focused on  
the provision of value-
added logistics services  
to retailers.

/  By being thought leaders 
in the sector, we identify 
trends and opportunities 
ahead of the curve and 
develop products and 
services to address them.

2. Highly attractive 

3. Attractive business 

presence in online retail

model

4. Clear growth strategy
/  Organic growth in 

/  The UK e-commerce 

market is forecast to grow 
by 9% in 2019 (source: 
IMRG).

/  Our Clicklink Click and 
Collect joint venture 
provides a service 
dedicated to the needs  
of retailers.

/  Value-added consultancy 
model with strategic level 
relationships.

e-commerce related 
activities in UK and Europe.

/  Growth of Click and 

/  High level of long-term,  
open book/minimum 
volume guarantee 
contracts in UK logistics.
/  Highly visible profit and 

cash flows.

Collect through Clicklink. 
Rapidly growing presence 
in mainland Europe.

5. Strong financial profile
/  Attractive working 
capital profile.

/  Operating profit growth 

coupled with high 
cash conversion.

9

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Chairman’s Statement

As Chairman of Clipper Logistics plc,  
I am pleased to present our 2019 
financial results.

Steve Parkin
Executive Chairman

10

The financial year ended 30 April 2019 
has seen a continuation of our historic 
track record of achieving significant 
organic revenue growth, complemented 
by the benefit of strategic, value-
enhancing acquisitions made in 
previous years. 

The Group continues to focus on 
developing innovative, cost-effective 
solutions that address the needs of our 
blue-chip client base, predominantly in 
the retail sector. We continue to invest 
in quality people to implement sector-
leading projects, and this, together with 
our ability to identify key trends and 
developments in the sectors we serve, 
means that we are confident in our 
ability to continue this momentum.

Despite the challenging market 
conditions facing the retail sector,  
the Group has achieved another 
strong financial performance, growing 
revenue by 15.0%. We have commenced 
significant new contracts with high profile 
retailers including boohoo.com subsidiary 
PrettyLittleThing and Sports Direct in the 
UK, and Mountain Warehouse for whom 
we have introduced e-fulfilment activities 
in Europe. In addition, we have seen 
significant growth in activity with many 
of our customers including Asda, Browns, 
Morrisons, Halfords, New Look, Wilko  
and ASOS in the UK, and Westwing  
and s.Oliver in Europe.

We will continue to identify key trends 
in the sectors we serve, and develop 
new services, processes and solutions 
that address the needs and challenges 
of our customers. Clipper’s unique 
understanding of the dynamics of 
the retail sector, and in particular the 
e-commerce sector including returns 
management and Click and Collect, 
provides the Group with exceptionally 
strong strategic positioning for 
the future.

We are particularly pleased with the 
evolution of our European business, 
which has won significant contracts 
with customers including ASOS, 

Clipper Logistics plc The Group is well 
positioned to continue  
to deliver strong returns  
to our shareholders.

Group revenue
(2018: £400.1m) +15.0% 

£460.2m 

Westwing and Mountain Warehouse,  
as well as organic growth.

In addition, RepairTech, which was 
acquired in the previous financial year, 
is performing well and together with 
Servicecare has seen new contract wins 
with Vestel and Tech Data. They have 
established a presence in Europe 
where we now handle electrical returns 
for Amazon. 

The commercial vehicles business had 
a disappointing year, with reduced 
dealer support being provided by the 
manufacturer. We believe however that 
this business will continue to contribute 
to Group profitability and cashflow.

The Group is well positioned to 
continue to deliver strong returns to our 
shareholders, despite the challenges 
that some parts of the retail sector 
are experiencing. 

We are mindful of the wider economic 
climate, and in particular of the 
headwinds facing our customers in 
the retail sector. We continue to monitor 
the situation closely and engage with 
our customers to find new ways to pro-
actively assist them.

Group results
Group revenue increased by 15.0% 
to £460.2 million for the year ended  
30 April 2019 (2018: £400.1 million), 
and Group EBIT was £20.2 million 
(2018: £20.9 million). Group EBIT before 
Property-related income1 increased by 
18.0% to £17.1 million (2018: £14.5 million). 
Property-related income reduced 
by £3.3 million to £3.1 million. 
Diluted earnings per share after the 
amortisation of intangible assets were 
13.1 pence for the year ended 30 April 
2019 (2018: 14.1 pence), a decrease 

of 7.0%. Basic earnings per share 
were 13.2 pence (2018: 14.2 pence), 
a decrease of 7.0%.

7 November 2018. I would personally 
like to thank Ron for his commitment 
and valuable contribution.

Net debt was £45.9 million at the year 
end (2018: £31.7 million). We continue to 
invest in capital projects to support both 
new contracts and growth of existing 
contracts, much of which involves 
a commitment from customers to 
reimburse this capital over the duration 
of the contract. Net debt is defined as 
borrowings, less cash, cash equivalents 
and non-current financial assets 
(see note 20 to the Group Financial 
Statements). At 30 April 2019, of the 
headline net debt of £45.9 million, 
we have £34.9 million of capital 
to be recovered in full from open 
book customers over the term of the 
customer contracts.

People and Board
Clipper Logistics plc is led by an 
excellent management team that  
has been at the core of the business  
for many years.

The team has a proven track record of 
identifying key trends within the sectors 
we serve, and developing relevant 
cost-effective solutions that address 
those needs. Further, we have a proven 
ability to identify strategic acquisitions 
that enhance Group performance and 
shareholder value.

I would like to take this opportunity to 
thank all the employees of the Group 
for their continued commitment and 
contribution to the Group’s performance.

Governance
The executive management team 
comprises Tony Mannix (Chief Executive 
Officer), David Hodkin (Chief Financial 
Officer) and myself, and the Group 
benefits from the combined experience 
of Stephen Robertson (Senior 
Independent Director), Mike Russell 
and Stuart Watson, our Non-Executive 
Independent Directors.

Ron Series stood down from the role 
of Senior Independent Director on 

Dividends
The Board is recommending a final 
dividend of 6.5 pence per share, 
making a total dividend in respect 
of the year ended 30 April 2019 of 
9.7 pence (2018: 8.4 pence), an 
increase of 15.5%.

The proposed final dividend, if 
approved by shareholders, will 
be paid on 23 October 2019 to 
shareholders on the register at the 
close of business on 20 September 2019.

Outlook
The Group continues to be one 
of the leading providers of value-added 
logistics and e-fulfilment solutions to 
the retail sector in the UK, and is rapidly 
growing its operations in Europe, a 
significant growth area for the Group. 
Recent contract wins, together with a 
strong pipeline of new business activity 
and the further evolution of our Click and 
Collect proposition, place the Group in 
an excellent position to achieve further 
growth both in the UK and internationally. 
Indeed, Clipper’s approach of adopting 
a hands-on, long-term and pro-active 
relationship with its retail clients allows  
it to continue to support its clients during 
these changing retail market conditions, 
and the uncertain political and 
economic landscape. 

I look forward to working with all of the 
Group’s stakeholders as we continue  
to drive the Group forward.

Steve Parkin
Executive Chairman

1.   “Property-related income” comprises 

profit from property-related advisory services 
of £3,100,000 (2018: £4.200,000) and £nil 
(2018: £2,151,000) of profit on disposal of a 
freehold property. 

11

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report
Our Markets

The Group serves markets in the 
UK – where 93% of Group revenue is 
generated – and in mainland Europe.

Where we generate our revenue

1  Logistics 
A  UK retail 
B  Other EU Logistics 

82%
92%
8%

Logistics

B

Total

82%

A

1

Commercial Vehicles

2

D

Total

18%

C

2  Commercial vehicles 
C  UK vehicle sales 
D  UK aftersales 

18%
64%
36%

12

UK retail
76% of Group revenue is derived 
from activities in the UK retail market. 
Within this market, we operate across 
e-commerce and non e-commerce, in 
warehousing and transport and primarily 
in fashion and general merchandise.

Size and growth of market
The UK retail market (excluding food 
and automotive fuel) was worth 
£217.5 billion in 2018, having grown 
from £208.0 billion in 2017, growth of 
4.6% (source: ONS). Within this, whilst 
traditional bricks and mortar retail stores 
still account for most retail sales in the 
UK, internet sales are growing at a 
much faster rate.

YoY growth in UK retail sales (%)

t

r

h
w
o
g
Y
o
Y

22.1

16.4

15.4

15.3

6.8

10.7

-0.6

0.5

2.8

1.0

25

20

15

10

5

0

-5

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

Source: ONS

Internet

Store

According to IMRG, the UK’s total 
e-commerce market (which includes 
food and travel) has grown from 
£0.8 billion in 2000 to £149 billion in 2017 
and £167 billion in 2018 (12.9% annual 
growth), with a further 9% growth forecast 
in 2019. Q1 2019 saw online retail sales 
growth of 7.5%. The Group’s strength in 
e-commerce sees us well positioned to 
take advantage of this market growth.

Clipper Logistics plc  
UK retail market – size (£bn)

220

210

200

190

180

170

160

171

196

188

185

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

Source: ONS

UK retail market – size (% share of retail)

100

80

60

40

20

10

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

Source: ONS

Internet

Store

UK e-commerce market (£bn)

200

160

120

80

40

0

9 %   g r o w t h
f o r e c a s

t

  1 2 . 9 %

C A G R   o f

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019F

Source: IMRG

Trend

Market size

Recent market trends
In the last year, we have seen various 
changes affect the UK retail market, 
bringing a variety of opportunities and 
challenges to Clipper.

217

208

Challenges on the high street
UK retail continues to experience 
those challenges faced in 2018, with 
numerous high-profile administrations 
and CVA restructurings impacting 
the high street (e.g. House of Fraser, 
Maplin, HMV, Arcadia, Monsoon and 
Debenhams). 26 large retailers went 
into administration in 2018, compared 
to 17 in 2017. Also, the number of large 
multi-site UK retailers (those with more 
than 10 stores) entering a CVA in 2018 
increased significantly to 13, from just 
two in 2017 (source: Deloitte). The most 
commonly cited financial pressures 
are uncompetitive business rents and 
rates, lower consumer spending, higher 
regulatory compliance costs, Brexit-
related pressures and uncertainties and 
‘the worst festive trading performance 
in a decade’.

Indeed, some of Clipper’s own 
customers (New Look, American Golf, 
LK Bennett, Pretty Green and Bench) 
have suffered well-publicised financial 
difficulties, but none has resulted in 
significant financial loss to Clipper, 
largely because of strong protections 
written into our contracts. Indeed, four 
of these five brands have survived 
through their financial pressures, and 
we are now experiencing improved 
activity levels and profitability with 
those customers.

A thriving high street is in everybody’s 
interest, and the UK government is 
pushing the issue through various 
initiatives, including the Future 
High Streets Fund, the Future Cities 
Catapult and Smart Cities UK events. 
The collaboration of retailers is also 
seen as key to reinvigorating the 
high street.

Online retail
Whilst the high street has had its 
challenges, online continues to grow 
apace, with 15.4% growth achieved 
in 2018 (source: ONS). With Clipper’s 
market-leading credentials in UK 
e-commerce fashion logistics, this 
leaves Clipper in an extremely strong 
position to capitalise on the predicted 
9% market growth in 2019 (source: IMRG).

Click and Collect has a key part to play 
in online retail. 18% of online purchases 
(2018) were delivered via Click and 
Collect rather than those other delivery 
alternatives which typically prove more 
expensive for the retailer (source: KPMG). 
According to analytics firm GlobalData, 
UK Click and Collect is set to rise 55.6% 
(CAGR 9.1%) over the next five years to 
reach £9.8 billion, compared to overall 
growth in online of 34.7% (CAGR of 
6.1%). Clicklink, our joint venture with 

John Lewis, offers a seven days a week 
B2B Click and Collect service, thereby 
creating the opportunity for retailers to 
capitalise on this anticipated market 
growth. In addition to John Lewis as 
anchor customer, Clicklink also has a 
number of third party retailers using its 
platform, a platform unique in that it 
was designed with the retailer front of 
mind at every stage of the process (e.g. 
timed delivery slots,‘retail ready’ cages, 
full track-and-traceability).

The way people are buying online 
has also continued to evolve. In Q4 
2018/19 (Nov 2018–Jan 2019), a major 
milestone was passed in UK online 
retail as, for the first time, shoppers 
spent more money through their 
smartphones when accessing UK retail 
sites than either of the other two major 
device types – desktop or tablet – 
according to quarterly data from the 
IMRG Capgemini e-Retail Sales Index. 
It is vital that retailers ensure that the 
online customer experience remains 
consistent across all platforms – mobile 
web browsers, tablet browsers and 
desktop browsers – in order not to miss 
out on valuable sales.

Between 2011 and 2017, overall 
satisfaction with online delivery 
was steady, but this year’s annual 
IMRG survey revealed that it fell from 
85% to 78% between 2017 and 2018 
(source: IMRG). Whilst retailers have 
undoubtedly put more focus on online 
service over recent years, there is 
more investment needed to keep 
up with consumers’ ever-increasing 
expectations. Our Clicklink proposition 
addresses this need.

Returns management
The KPMG Annual Retail Survey 2019 
found that 34% of consumers surveyed 
often bought multiple variants of the 
same item, with the intention of later 
returning some of them; compared to 
the previous year of 31.4%. The same 
survey found that 76% of respondents 
admitted to intentionally spending 
over the minimum purchase value 
threshold to qualify for free delivery 
and that free returns are still a major 
consideration for more than half (54%) 
of the respondents. When a retailer 
requires a minimum purchase value 
threshold to qualify for free delivery 
and offers a free returns service, this 
inadvertently encourages consumers 
to order more than they need, safe in 
the knowledge that they can return 
unwanted goods free of charge.

When the products are returned, 
retailers must have the processes 
in place to be able to deal with this 
quickly and efficiently, including having 
the ability to be able to rapidly process 
refunds. Over half of the respondents 
surveyed (53%) said they received 
their money back within a week, 30% 
between 8 and 14 days, and some 8% 

13

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Our Markets continued

between three and four weeks after 
their items were returned (source: 
KPMG). In the year ended 30 April 
2019, on average Clipper authorised its 
customers to release 75.5% of refunds 
to consumers within 24 hours of receipt 
of the returned product arriving in 
the warehouse.

Returns present a significant cost to 
retailers but, still, most UK retailers offer  
a free returns policy. We are seeing 
some online retailers implementing 
changes to their returns policies. 
Next was the first to break ranks by 
introducing a £1 charge for certain 
returns. ASOS has recently extended its 
returns window from 28 days to 45 days, 
presumably to stay ahead of rivals’ 
offerings. However, at the same time, 
they announced their intention to crack 
down on ‘unusual’ shopping habits ‘to 
make sure returns remain sustainable 
for ASOS and for the environment’. 
This appears to be aimed at those 
‘wear and return’ consumers, rather 
than those consumers who simply order 
different styles and sizes of the same 
product before settling on the most 
suitable. ASOS’s policy change will 
either result in competitors following 
suit or it will result in consumers finding 
another retailer willing to honour their 
‘unusual’ shopping habits.

Royal Mail intends to capitalise on the 
growing returns market by introducing a 
parcels collection service from people’s 
homes, including items returned after 
being bought online. This will make it 
even more convenient for customers 
to be able to return unwanted items. 
And if consumers know that there 
are ever-more convenient ways to 
be able to return parcels should they 
need to, they will be more inclined to 
make the online purchase in the first 
place. This additional convenience will 
only add to the level of online returns 
retailers are seeing in the market.

We have seen an introduction of try 
before you buy schemes from some 
online retailers. Such schemes allow 
consumers to order multiple items for 
delivery to their home. They then try 
them on and simply return the ones 
they don’t want, with the payment only 
leaving consumers’ accounts for the 
retained items after the items returned 
have been processed. Whilst this will 
of course appeal to consumers and 
will be a key differentiator for retailers, 
it will increase the number of returns 
those retailers are experiencing and 
will mean stock is tied up in working 
capital for longer. It is vital, therefore, 
that retailers be able to quickly process 
the return so that:

14

/  they can recognise the sale for the 

items retained by the consumer; and
/  they can get the returned stock back 
into saleable condition. This will allow 
them to:
–  minimise the amount of cash tied 

up in working capital, and

–  avoid having to put out-of-season 

stock into mark-down.

For electrical retailers too, returns are 
increasingly important. The General 
Data Protection Regulation (“GDPR”) 
legislation came into law in May 2018, 
putting electrical returns into even 
sharper focus. With intelligent electrical 
devices like smart TVs and smart 
fridges now being the norm, as well 
as the retailer effecting any necessary 
electrical and cosmetic repairs, it is 
vital that all returned items be properly 
cleared of any consumer data before 
they are offered for resale.

Clipper runs customer-specific returns 
operations – comprising fashion returns 
and electrical returns – for certain 
of its larger customers and is in the 
process of implementing a new non-
customer-specific facility to make such 
a service accessible to smaller retailers. 
Dedicated returns centres are usually 
cost-prohibitive for smaller retailers to 
implement, so we are confident this 
will address a retail market need.

Customer experience
To address the above challenges 
and to capitalise on the opportunities 
available, omni-channel retailers 
need to be able to ensure a seamless 
customer experience for the consumer 
across the high street estate and online.

However, recent research from Adyen 
claims that flawed customer experience 
is costing UK retail £102 billion each 
year. The key reasons cited (in order of 
consumers’ perceived importance) are: 
running out of stock in store, queues in 
store, failing to create a link between 
online and offline stores, not offering a 
variety of payment options, a lack of 
contextual commerce experiences, 
not personalizing offers and outdated 
payment systems.

Conscious consumerism
Consumers’ growing appreciation of 
sustainability is having more of an effect 
on their ultimate purchasing decisions. 
Ethical sourcing of packaging, 
sustainable fashion and eco brands are 
phrases now embedded in the psyche, 
particularly among younger cohorts; 
avoiding single-use plastics, sustainable 
clothing and employee well-being are 
all matters considered more important 
to the younger generations than they 
were to the generations before them.

£102bn

flawed customer experience 
is costing UK retail £102 billion 
each year.

 73%

of consumers say they would 
change their consumption 
habits to reduce their 
environmental impact. 

In a recent global online survey, 
81% of respondents felt strongly that 
companies should help improve the 
environment and 73% of consumers say 
they would change their consumption 
habits to reduce their environmental 
impact (source: Nielsen). Within UK 
retail, the perception that online is 
more environmentally friendly than 
the high street, a perception that has 
prevailed historically, has now almost 
disappeared. 52% of customers still 
perceive online to be the greener 
alternative in 2018, but this proportion 
has steadily decreased from 73% 
perceiving the same in 2011 (source: 
IMRG). This perception is likely being 
influenced by the focus being put on 
this area by media and government, 
with excess packaging and unwanted 
goods going into landfill being prime 
targets for negative headlines. 
Indeed, with the advent of fast fashion, 
garment production has doubled in 
the past 15 years and £140m worth 
of clothes a year now end up in 
landfill (source: Guardian). Clipper is 
working with certain of its clothing and 
electrical products customers to try to 
identify innovative ways of improving 
sustainability in their reverse logistics 
cycle, by returning existing products  
to a saleable condition, enabling reuse 
and minimising the impact  
on the environment.

Employee well-being, whether at 
home or abroad, is also becoming 
more important to the modern-day 
consumer. For example:

/  UK legislation has been tightened 
to try to further reduce the risk of 
modern slavery in the supply chain;

/  national living wage increases in 

the UK continue to outstrip inflation;

/  consumers are demanding full 

transparency of ethical credentials 
in the supply chain;

Clipper Logistics plc 66%

of global consumers have 
expressed a willingness to pay 
more for sustainable goods.

 18%

of Group revenue is derived 
from the UK commercial 
vehicles market.

/  guaranteeing workers a minimum 
number of paid hours each week; 
and

/  political and social lobbying is 

meaning increased pressure on 
retailers to recognise union rights 
for workers.

Complying with new and strengthened 
legislation – and thereby protecting 
reputations – comes with an increased 
cost to retailers. However, changing 
consumer attitudes mean that not all 
of these costs need to be absorbed in 
retailers’ margins but can be passed 
back to the consumer through increased 
sales prices. Indeed, a recent Nielsen 
study found that 66% of global consumers 
expressed a willingness to pay more for 
sustainable goods.

Brexit
Brexit uncertainties (and the related 
exchange rate impact) has adversely 
affected some of our customers, as 
mentioned above. However, Clipper 
is largely insulated from this impact 
due to the open book nature of 
a high proportion of its contracts 
with customers.

The logistics industry relies heavily on 
Eastern European labour. Brexit-related 
uncertainties around employment 
have caused shrinkage of this labour 
pool, causing some pressures on 
labour availability, particularly in 
those UK geographies with higher 
concentrations of logistics facilities. 
Clipper has mitigated this through 
various innovative HR strategies and 
capital projects, referred to elsewhere 
in this report.

Brexit uncertainties have also 
presented some opportunities to 
Clipper. Hard Brexit fears have meant 
that some of our customers have 
built stocks in our warehouses in order 
to mitigate the impacts of such a 
potential outcome.

Commercial vehicles
18% of Group revenue is derived from 
the UK commercial vehicles market.

Clipper’s commercial vehicles 
business sells and maintains Iveco 
and Fiat vehicles, principally in certain 
geographical territories in the UK under 
the terms of its dealership licences.

Clipper derives the majority of its 
commercial vehicles revenues from 
new and used vehicle sales.

Whilst market size figures are not 
readily available for the specific 
geographical markets in which we 
operate, UK-wide new registration 
figures are readily available, and 
these provide a useful indicator of 
market growth and contraction for 
new vehicles. The market sectors in 
which the commercial vehicles division 
operates experienced registrations 
contraction of 1.7% in the calendar 
year 2018 compared with the prior  
year, as shown in Table 1 below.

Since all tractor units sold by Northern 
Commercials come with a two year 
repair and maintenance contract as 
standard, new vehicle registrations 
also provide a degree of certainty 
over future aftersales revenue.

In terms of other aftersales activity, 
again market data is not readily 
available. However, Table 2, below, 
shows that the number of commercial 
vehicles on UK roads has changed over 
the most recent two calendar years. 
The 2.3% growth in commercial vehicle 
numbers on the road coupled with 
the 1.7% contraction in the number of 
new vehicle registrations year-on-year 
implies that those vehicles that are on 
the road are, on average, older than 
in the previous year.

Since most commercial vehicles on UK 
roads are required to be inspected every 
six weeks under UK law, commercial 
vehicle activity on the roads provides 
a useful proxy for the relative size of the 
aftersales market in the UK. Moreover, 
older vehicles typically require more 
maintenance, presenting revenue 
opportunities to Clipper.

Table 1

Other markets
Other EU logistics
Omni-channel retail solutions are 
important in mainland Europe as they 
are in the UK, as retailers look to ensure 
global consistency across their brand. 
Clipper’s logistics facility for ASOS in 
Poland performs the same services and 
to the same standard prescribed by the 
customer as its logistics facility in the UK, 
just as Clipper’s logistics facility for Zara 
in the UK performs exactly the same 
services and to the same standard as 
Zara’s other logistics facilities around 
the globe.

That said, there are significant 
differences in consumer preferences 
and behaviours between geographical 
markets, and we must remain alert to 
these differences:

/  Whilst there have been one or two 
casualties (e.g. Gerry Weber), 
Germany hasn’t seen the same level 
of retail store closures as the United 
Kingdom. High rates of employment, 
immigration and rising wages have 
all contributed to strong consumer 
spending. However, the economy is 
now slowing, prompting several retail 
analysts to predict a surge in store 
closures. Among traditional retailers, 
more than a third expect sales to fall 
this year, while another third believe 
sales will stagnate (source: HDE).
/  In Germany, only 43% of retailers offer 
Click and Collect compared with 64% 
in the UK (source: OrderDynamics), 
possibly owing to the more dispersed 
geographical spread of consumers in 
Germany than in the UK, and therefore 
greater average distances between 
retail outlets and the consumer, 
making Click and Collect less 
convenient to consumers.

Differences such as these present 
logistical challenges to retailers 
and highlight that it is important that 
solutions providers such as Clipper do 
not adopt a ‘one size fits all’ mentality, 
but instead design solutions which 
address the specific needs of the 
retailer, the consumer and the market.

New commercial vehicle registrations

2017

2018

% change

Light commercial vehicles up to 3.5t
Rigid
Articulated

362,149
25,535
19,510

357,325
23,812
19,287

407,194

400,424

-1.3%
-6.7%
-1.1%

-1.7%

Source: SMMT

Table 2

Commercial vehicles on UK roads

2017

2018

% change

Vans
Trucks

Source: SMMT

4,299,828
602,799

4,407,561
605,393

4,902,627

5,012,954

+2.5%
+0.4%

+2.3%

15

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Our Business Model

Clipper delivers a broad range of value-added 
logistics services tailored to the emerging and 
future needs of our customers.

Key inputs

How we create value

Thought leadership & innovation  
Clipper has a strong brand, long- 
standing customer relationships 
and an experienced team, which 
combine to deliver thought 
leadership and innovation in the 
logistics sector.

Enduring relationships  
Clipper’s focus on the provision of 
value-added services to retailers 
at a competitive cost has resulted 
in a number of long-standing 
contractual arrangements with 
major retailers such as Asda, 
ASOS, John Lewis, Morrisons 
and Superdry.

Technologically advanced  
We work in trusted partnership 
with our customers to develop 
and rapidly deploy solutions to the 
challenges they face. Our team is 
focused on addressing tomorrow’s 
challenges today and embraces 
new technology.

Effective financial management  
We seek to efficiently use funds 
obtained through financing or 
generated from operations or 
investments. A high degree of 
contractual certainty underpins 
financial predictability and stability.

High-level contractual certainty 
Clipper provides customers with 
services. We operate open book 
or minimum volume guarantee 
contract terms for 67% of our UK 
Logistics customers, giving us a 
high level of contractual certainty.

Mutually beneficial  
long-term relationships  
We also operate closed book 
contracts for customers, many 
of whom we have worked with 
for several years.

Talent and expertise  
In order to ensure long-term customer 
relationships, we continually draw on 
our team’s expertise to drive innovation 
in our operations. This enables us 
to retain our market-leading cost 
competitive position and continue 
to strengthen our brand.

Innovative solutions  
Clipper has developed specialist 
services (e.g. pre-retailing services 
and reprocessing of garments) 
to support our customers in their 
ever-complex supply chains and 
to ensure that product is ready for 
sale in the most efficient and cost-
effective manner.

The Clipper Way…

…is how we approach all customer briefs. It translates instinct into action 
and brings clarity and consistency to the way we work. It’s a straightforward, 
insightful and effective approach, and our people are recognised and 
rewarded for their ability to apply and demonstrate ‘The Clipper Way’ 
in every area of our operation.

1 2 3 4

Opportunity
How can  
we help?

Exploration
We analyse  
and identify  
the customer’s 
business challenges

Solution  
planning
We design a  
high quality,  
cost-effective 
solution

Implementation
We create and 
implement  
a bespoke  
logistics solution

16

Clipper Logistics plc How we create value

The Clipper Way…

As the retail landscape changes 
to become more omni-channel 
focused, developing innovative 
solutions such as Clicklink and 
Boomerang to support our customers 
has led to Clipper retaining customers 
on a long-term basis as well as 
winning new business every year.

Fleet procurement benefits  
Whilst Northern Commercials is 
not heavily dependent on the 
logistics division of the Group, it 
provides Clipper with flexibility over 
fleet procurement, and margins on 
servicing activity are retained within 
the Group.

Commercial vehicle dealerships  
In addition, our commercial 
vehicles division is profitable and 
cash generative – its profitability 
driven by higher margin aftersales 
activity, which is underpinned by 
legal requirements governing the 
inspection of commercial vehicles.

Improve

–  Business performance 

improvement and 
implementation
– Win/win analysis

Revise

– Identify actions
– Process improvements
– Reporting and analysis

Review

– Daily/monthly/annually

Underpinned  
by our values

Agility

Ability

Credibility

How the value  
is shared
Shareholders
High growth market sectors, an 
attractive business model and a 
clear growth strategy combine  
to give operating profit growth 
and good cash conversion, 
resulting in dividend distributions 
of circa 74% in 2019.

Employees
Over 6,600 employees have 
access to attractive career 
progression in a market-leading 
logistics business. The Sharesave 
Plan enables employees to  
share in the financial success  
of the business.

Customers
Blue-chip customers in logistics 
and commercial vehicles can 
rely on Clipper’s established 
reputation and high levels of 
service, particularly when they 
need it most through peak 
trading periods.

Suppliers
Clipper benefits from its 
relationships, built over many 
years, with large and small 
trusted partners and suppliers. 
Clipper’s diverse supply 
base de-risks Clipper and its 
customers from fluctuations 
in market conditions.

Communities
Clipper’s Corporate Social 
Responsibility agenda 
benefits local communities 
by providing employment 
opportunities, reinvesting in 
the local communities through 
sponsorship and developing 
green initiatives. 

17

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report
Our Strategy

Build on market-leading 
customer proposition to 
expand the customer base

How will this be achieved?

Through a continued focus on the provision of bespoke, retail-specific 
logistics solutions, including retail store support and high value 
product logistics, but with particular focus on the e-fulfilment & returns 
management services segment of the retail market.

By utilising Clipper’s best-in-class offering and extensive 
implementation expertise to capitalise on the long-term structural 
growth within the online retail market and the increasing logistical 
complexities therein.

By taking advantage of growth opportunities in the retail logistics 
sector, where there is the opportunity to provide innovative solutions  
to customers that are also profitable for the Group.

Performance

The full-year benefit was realised from contracts that went live during 
the previous year with M&S returns operations, River Island, Edinburgh 
Woollen Mill and Crosswater in the UK; ASOS returns in Poland; and 
Urban Outfitters and Superdry in the Clicklink joint venture.

New contracts went live in the year with boohoo.com subsidiary 
PrettyLittleThing, Ginger Ray, Levi Strauss, Vestel, the Mountain 
Warehouse brand Neon Sheep, Tech Data and Sports Direct in  
the UK, and with Mountain Warehouse itself in Poland.

Further details of the above contract wins can be found in the 
Operating and Financial Review on pages 30 to 35.

Develop new, complementary  
products and services

Continue European  

expansion

Explore acquisition  

opportunities

By continuing to invest in new product and service offerings which will 
be value-enhancing to Clipper’s existing and future customer base.

Through development of Clipper’s operations in Germany and Poland, 

By considering further acquisitions which are considered value-

which consist of retail logistics and transport solutions with a significant 

enhancing to the Group’s shareholders through market penetration 

and growing element of e-fulfilment and returns management.

and/or service lines and where the Group can use its existing expertise, 

By utilising its existing expertise in e-fulfilment in the more developed 

UK online retail market, to assist both mainland European retailers to 

implementation and delivery platform, scale and reach to generate 

synergies and increase profitability.

move online, and UK retailers to expand into Europe – the latter further 

By considering bolt-on acquisitions which provide a platform for it to 

underpinned by Clipper’s strong customer relationships and reputation 

take its core technical expertise into new, adjacent markets.

with UK retailers (both pure-play e-tailers and multi-channel high 

street retailers).

We have commenced an electrical returns service for John Lewis. This is 
a box-in-box solution where our Technical Services operation is located 
in Clipper’s ADC depot in Northampton, where we perform the rest of 
our returns and pre-retail activities for John Lewis. These services now 
include RFID tagging and ensuring JL’s inbound shipments from suppliers 
are compliant with the requirements of their automated DC.

We have implemented an automated and intelligent autoboxing 
solution for Wilko to improve productivity and reduce reliance 
on labour.

We are trialling a goods-to-person robotic solution for Superdry in 
our Burton warehouse, also with the intention of reducing reliance 
on labour.

Multiple supplier deliveries into stores is inefficient for retailers. We have 
introduced a John Lewis supplier consolidation programme which 
leverages on the existing Clicklink service, thereby reducing cost to the 
retailer whilst also reducing inefficiency at a store level.

In the last week of the financial year, we commenced a new NDC 
outlets operation for M&S, adding another service to the growing 
M&S relationship.

Brexit has presented additional warehousing and labelling challenges 
to certain of our customers, particularly those engaged in tobacco-
related activities. We have extended our service offerings in this area to 
several customers.

Further details of the above projects can be found in the Operating 
and Financial Review on pages 30 to 35.

Full year-effect and improved activity levels from the Technical Services 

Whilst we have evaluated several potential acquisition targets in the 

activities in Germany, leveraging existing customers with additional 

year, we decided that none were sufficiently in line with Clipper’s 

service lines.

strategic requirements at this time.

The contractual scope of our Polish operation for Westwing was 

extended in the year, significantly increasing the amount of work 

we are performing for them.

We commenced a new stores operation for Mountain Warehouse 

in newly-committed warehouse space in a building adjacent to 

our existing Poznan´ operations. Mountain Warehouse also owns the 

Neon Sheep brand, for whom we commenced a UK operation in the 

year, demonstrating further our cross-border credentials for multi-

national customers.

Further details of the above contract wins can be found in the 

Operating and Financial Review on pages 30 to 35.

What’s next?

New contracts have been secured which will commence in the year to 
30 April 2020, including with Shop Direct and Amara Living.

For Shop Direct, we shall be performing returns services across fashion, 
non-fashion and electrical goods, and pre-retail services which will 
facilitate the product flow into Shop Direct’s new automated DC.

For Amara Living, we will be preforming e-commerce activities, storage 
and returns processing services out of Northampton, UK.

Clipper has an extensive potential customer pipeline and will continue 
to work with these prospects to secure further new contract wins.

We are developing collaborative trilateral solutions between various of 
our Clicklink customers. These collaborations will allow the customers 
to mutually benefit from opportunities in the Click and Collect 
market space.

Clipper is working on other mechanisation/semi-automation projects 
for various existing customers and is developing a customer-agnostic 
returns operation for both existing and new customers.

Clipper will continue to innovate and develop solutions for the 
problems that retailers face in the ever-changing retail environment.

The Mountain Warehouse operation in Poland is set to further expand 

Clipper will continue to explore acquisition opportunities that enhance 

in the year ending 30 April 2020 with the introduction of a new 

shareholder value.

e-com operation.

In the medium term, Clipper will continue to seek opportunities with 

new and existing customers to provide services in Germany, Poland 

and Ireland, and will consider other strategic mainland European 

locations for potential expansion.

18

Clipper Logistics plc Through a continued focus on the provision of bespoke, retail-specific 

By continuing to invest in new product and service offerings which will 

logistics solutions, including retail store support and high value 

be value-enhancing to Clipper’s existing and future customer base.

Build on market-leading 

customer proposition to 

expand the customer base

How will this be achieved?

product logistics, but with particular focus on the e-fulfilment & returns 

management services segment of the retail market.

By utilising Clipper’s best-in-class offering and extensive 

implementation expertise to capitalise on the long-term structural 

growth within the online retail market and the increasing logistical 

complexities therein.

By taking advantage of growth opportunities in the retail logistics 

sector, where there is the opportunity to provide innovative solutions  

to customers that are also profitable for the Group.

Performance

The full-year benefit was realised from contracts that went live during 

We have commenced an electrical returns service for John Lewis. This is 

the previous year with M&S returns operations, River Island, Edinburgh 

a box-in-box solution where our Technical Services operation is located 

Woollen Mill and Crosswater in the UK; ASOS returns in Poland; and 

in Clipper’s ADC depot in Northampton, where we perform the rest of 

Urban Outfitters and Superdry in the Clicklink joint venture.

our returns and pre-retail activities for John Lewis. These services now 

New contracts went live in the year with boohoo.com subsidiary 

PrettyLittleThing, Ginger Ray, Levi Strauss, Vestel, the Mountain 

include RFID tagging and ensuring JL’s inbound shipments from suppliers 

are compliant with the requirements of their automated DC.

Warehouse brand Neon Sheep, Tech Data and Sports Direct in  

We have implemented an automated and intelligent autoboxing 

the UK, and with Mountain Warehouse itself in Poland.

solution for Wilko to improve productivity and reduce reliance 

Further details of the above contract wins can be found in the 

Operating and Financial Review on pages 30 to 35.

on labour.

on labour.

We are trialling a goods-to-person robotic solution for Superdry in 

our Burton warehouse, also with the intention of reducing reliance 

Multiple supplier deliveries into stores is inefficient for retailers. We have 

introduced a John Lewis supplier consolidation programme which 

leverages on the existing Clicklink service, thereby reducing cost to the 

retailer whilst also reducing inefficiency at a store level.

In the last week of the financial year, we commenced a new NDC 

outlets operation for M&S, adding another service to the growing 

M&S relationship.

Brexit has presented additional warehousing and labelling challenges 

to certain of our customers, particularly those engaged in tobacco-

related activities. We have extended our service offerings in this area to 

several customers.

Further details of the above projects can be found in the Operating 

and Financial Review on pages 30 to 35.

What’s next?

New contracts have been secured which will commence in the year to 

We are developing collaborative trilateral solutions between various of 

30 April 2020, including with Shop Direct and Amara Living.

our Clicklink customers. These collaborations will allow the customers 

For Shop Direct, we shall be performing returns services across fashion, 

non-fashion and electrical goods, and pre-retail services which will 

market space.

to mutually benefit from opportunities in the Click and Collect 

facilitate the product flow into Shop Direct’s new automated DC.

Clipper is working on other mechanisation/semi-automation projects 

For Amara Living, we will be preforming e-commerce activities, storage 

and returns processing services out of Northampton, UK.

Clipper has an extensive potential customer pipeline and will continue 

to work with these prospects to secure further new contract wins.

for various existing customers and is developing a customer-agnostic 

returns operation for both existing and new customers.

Clipper will continue to innovate and develop solutions for the 

problems that retailers face in the ever-changing retail environment.

Develop new, complementary  

products and services

Continue European  
expansion

Explore acquisition  
opportunities

Through development of Clipper’s operations in Germany and Poland, 
which consist of retail logistics and transport solutions with a significant 
and growing element of e-fulfilment and returns management.

By utilising its existing expertise in e-fulfilment in the more developed 
UK online retail market, to assist both mainland European retailers to 
move online, and UK retailers to expand into Europe – the latter further 
underpinned by Clipper’s strong customer relationships and reputation 
with UK retailers (both pure-play e-tailers and multi-channel high 
street retailers).

By considering further acquisitions which are considered value-
enhancing to the Group’s shareholders through market penetration 
and/or service lines and where the Group can use its existing expertise, 
implementation and delivery platform, scale and reach to generate 
synergies and increase profitability.

By considering bolt-on acquisitions which provide a platform for it to 
take its core technical expertise into new, adjacent markets.

Full year-effect and improved activity levels from the Technical Services 
activities in Germany, leveraging existing customers with additional 
service lines.

Whilst we have evaluated several potential acquisition targets in the 
year, we decided that none were sufficiently in line with Clipper’s 
strategic requirements at this time.

The contractual scope of our Polish operation for Westwing was 
extended in the year, significantly increasing the amount of work 
we are performing for them.

We commenced a new stores operation for Mountain Warehouse 
in newly-committed warehouse space in a building adjacent to 
our existing Poznan´ operations. Mountain Warehouse also owns the 
Neon Sheep brand, for whom we commenced a UK operation in the 
year, demonstrating further our cross-border credentials for multi-
national customers.

Further details of the above contract wins can be found in the 
Operating and Financial Review on pages 30 to 35.

The Mountain Warehouse operation in Poland is set to further expand 
in the year ending 30 April 2020 with the introduction of a new 
e-com operation.

In the medium term, Clipper will continue to seek opportunities with 
new and existing customers to provide services in Germany, Poland 
and Ireland, and will consider other strategic mainland European 
locations for potential expansion.

Clipper will continue to explore acquisition opportunities that enhance 
shareholder value.

19

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Risk Management

The Group has a formal risk identification and  
management process. This ensures that risks are  
properly identified, prioritised, evaluated and  
mitigated, in order that the Group can achieve  
its strategic objectives and enjoy long-term success.

Risk management process
The Board is ultimately responsible for managing risk across the Group. The Board delegates responsibility for the regular 
review of the Group’s risk management system to the Audit Committee and Senior Management Team (“SMT”). Risks are 
formally reviewed regularly and risk registers are updated throughout the year. The SMT has carried out a robust and detailed 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group.

Principal risks are identified through an evaluation of likelihood of occurrence and potential impact. The SMT reviews specific 
strategic, operational, financial and compliance risks in regular SMT meetings, contract and project reviews and other key 
executive management meetings to enable the SMT and the Board to ensure that the Group’s systems are properly aligned 
with strategic objectives.

The Group adopts the following process:

Identify risk
Identify key risks by 
category (including 
changes since the 
last review)

Rate risk
Rate each risk (by 
evaluating and 
assigning a score to 
each risk)

Identify risk 
mitigation
Identify mitigating 
actions required for 
each risk

Execute risk 
mitigation
Execute agreed 
risk mitigation  
and process  
improvements

Review, monitor 
and report risk 
management 
process
Review and monitor 
risk management 
process, and report 
to Board and 
Audit Committee

Principal Risks and Uncertainties

The Group has identified the following key risks through its risk management process:

Risk

Mitigation

Reputation
Clipper’s potential to win new business is 
influenced by its reputation for successfully 
implementing major customer projects. 
Reputational damage from failed or delayed 
project implementations may have an adverse 
impact on Clipper’s ability to win new business, 
and thus limit the Group’s long-term growth 
and success.

Clipper has developed effective project management and 
governance techniques and works closely with customers, using highly 
trained and experienced staff, to ensure successful project delivery.

All projects are reviewed and evaluated on a weekly basis by the 
relevant SMT members.

Independent brand health reviews are undertaken regularly to monitor 
customer perception of, and satisfaction with, Clipper.

People
Failure to recruit, develop and retain key 
staff may prevent the Group from delivering 
its objectives.

The Group offers comprehensive training and experiential learning 
which includes development, customer relationship and leadership 
training. The Group keeps in close contact with employees and has 
a flat management structure.

i

c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

The Group ensures that it has competitive terms and conditions 
with reward schemes which drive and reward performance and 
can respond flexibly to the needs of employees. Exit interviews are 
conducted to ensure that learnings from key staff departures can 
be incorporated into the future retention strategy.

20

Clipper Logistics plc  
l

a
n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

Risk

Mitigation

Loss of operational delivery
The Group may not operate/be able to operate 
efficiently, thereby harming the Group’s 
relationships with customers. Such a situation 
could result, for example, from reduced 
management focus on day-to-day operations 
during periods of major project activity or due to 
the loss of operator licences which are required 
to run our transport operations.

Health and safety
Our activities are conducted in a variety of 
operating environments. A failure to monitor or 
manage health and safety risks appropriately can 
not only lead to an unsafe working environment 
for our people and others who interact with us, 
but may result in significant penalties, reputational 
damage and/or legal liabilities.

Employees
We rely heavily on agency labour, particularly 
in peak activity periods. Continued uncertainty 
around the free movement of labour ahead 
of Britain’s exit from the European Union 
could severely compromise the provision of 
resource available to UK logistics. Additionally, 
competition for labour in the vicinity of our 
depots can increase the demands on the local 
labour pool, reducing the availability of labour 
and pushing up the cost.

Failure to maintain and enhance 
customer relationships
Failure to maintain and enhance customer 
relationships through substandard operational 
delivery or more attractive propositions from our 
competitors may lead to contracts not being 
renewed, and/or may prevent the Group from 
winning new work with existing customers.

Dedicated start-up and project teams are used to minimise disruption 
to the operation during periods of major project activity. Contractual 
Key Performance Indicators (“KPIs”) are reviewed regularly to ensure 
operational effectiveness at all times. We ensure compliance with 
operator licence requirements through our standard operating 
procedures and driver policies. These include: periodic driver CPC 
(certificate of professional competence) training, tachometer audits, 
random drug testing and regular internal transport audits.

The Group has a dedicated team of health and safety professionals 
who maintain, audit and review detailed health and safety procedures 
and processes. The team reports to the Board and SMT. It also provides 
leadership and training to encourage a culture which values the early 
identification of situations that could lead to accidents.

Clipper and its customers are investing in automation to reduce 
reliance on manual labour. In order to maximise the labour pool, 
Clipper encourages local links with schools, colleges, universities and 
communities, including through its Fresh Start initiative, has family 
friendly policies and is supporting industry-led initiatives to encourage 
wider interest in logistics.

Clipper has consciously reduced its reliance on agency labour in the 
year by increasing its permanent headcount. This added job security 
reduces the temptation for workers to move from Clipper to another 
role for a slightly higher hourly rate.

Clipper constantly benchmarks wages and benefits against other 
employers in the local area to ensure remuneration packages remain 
competitive. Wherever practical, we try to open new sites in areas of 
lower employment.

Any exposure to increased costs is largely mitigated by open book 
contract mechanisms.

The Group holds formal monthly reviews with key customers as well 
as maintaining frequent close informal contact with customers and 
potential customers. This enables corrective action to be taken quickly 
in response to customer feedback and ensures that we remain in 
touch with what our competitors are doing. We strive to continually 
improve through sharing learnings across the business, particularly 
in the aftermath of new project implementations.

In addition, regular brand health reviews are carried out. These give 
customers the opportunity to comment anonymously on any aspect 
of the customer/company relationship and service delivery, and how 
we compare to our competitors. The Group can then take corrective 
action, as applicable.

Members of the SMT attend and speak at industry events and 
contribute to various industry publications to ensure we continue 
to be perceived as a thought leader to the retail market.

Loss of an operational site through disaster
Loss of an operational site as a result of fire, flood 
or other disaster would have the potential to 
seriously disrupt operations.

Regular safety audits and inspections seek to limit this risk. 
Where appropriate, remedial action is taken. In the event of a serious 
incident, each site has a business continuity plan which would come 
into immediate operation.

Failure of IT system or infrastructure
Any significant failure, inefficiency or breakdown 
of our IT systems or infrastructure would seriously 
impair our ability to deliver operationally and 
would put contract renewals at risk.

Business continuity and disaster recovery plans are kept under review 
at all locations and our IT infrastructure is subject to ongoing review 
with regular testing of systems, including penetration testing. The 
Group maintains an extensive IT team, supported, where appropriate, 
by external expertise. Particular focus is given to recovery processes 
and procedures, infrastructure resilience, innovation and security.  
We implemented a new accounting system and a new HR/payroll/
time and attendance system in the prior year, readying the business 
for its next stage of growth and replacing previous systems.

21

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019d
e
u
n

i
t

n
o
c

l

a
n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

e
c
n
a

i
l

p
m
o
C
&

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
i
F
,
l

a
g
e
L

/ Strategic Report

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Risk

Mitigation

Poor cost control on contracts
Inability to control costs on:

/  closed book contracts adversely impacts our 

profitability; and

/  open book contracts adversely affects our 

reputation with customers.

Weekly and monthly management accounts allow Clipper to quickly 
identify areas where costs may be trending out of control. Ahead of 
submission, tenders are reviewed by senior members of the operational 
and finance teams to ensure that targeted productivities and costs can 
be achieved. Post-implementation reviews and knowledge sharing 
across sites ensures that we learn from any mistakes.

Brexit impact on customer behaviour
Amid continued uncertainty ahead of the 
UK’s proposed exit from the European Union, 
our customers may strategically opt to reduce 
investment in the UK or to move operations out of 
the UK.

Our presence in mainland Europe offers our customers a ready-made 
solution should customers wish to relocate their operations out of  
the UK.

Our expertise in running multi-use sites and Clipper’s investment in a 
multi-user IT system reduces the initial outlay required by our customers 
for major capital investments.

Financial resilience of customers
Difficult UK retail market conditions in 2018 and 
2019 have seen more retailers in financial distress. 
As well as the increased bad debt risk this brings 
to Clipper, there is also an increased risk of 
Clipper being burdened with onerous vehicle 
and property leases.

Clipper benefits from a right of lien over its customers’ inventory, 
largely mitigating Clipper from any bad debt risk. Clipper has 
historically been able to fill vacant warehouse space quickly. As such, 
Clipper’s exposure to onerous space costs in any period following a 
customer default is limited. Clipper’s commercial vehicles division 
means Clipper has a ready made route to market for vehicle disposals, 
meaning that any onerous leases can be largely mitigated in the 
event of customer default.

Risk

Mitigation

Legal and regulatory
The Group operates in an increasingly regulated 
market. As the Group continues its expansion 
(particularly in Europe), exposure to regulatory 
and legal risk will increase.

The introduction into law of GDPR on 25 May 2018 
brings additional compliance risks for the Group.

Government policy
The National Living Wage (“NLW”) in the UK 
increases the costs of labour annually. Failure 
to recover these cost increases could adversely 
affect the profitability of the Group.

Financial liquidity
Inadequate cash resources could leave the 
Group unable to fund its growth plans, thus 
affecting future financial performance.

The Group utilises internal and external experts where appropriate, 
supported by its Group General Counsel, to set policy and monitor 
its application. Data control is a major area of client and regulatory 
focus. The Group’s IT management systems and processes are 
designed to ensure controls over system access and data flow 
movements are carefully monitored. The Group undertakes 
appropriate staff training to ensure legal compliance. Operational 
sites are audited on a frequent, cyclical basis to test for instances 
of non-compliance. System penetration testing is undertaken by 
the Group to check the resilience of its IT systems. A GDPR Steering 
Committee was created to ensure all parts of the Group are GDPR 
compliant. External specialist advice is sought to ensure technical 
compliance with financial, taxation, listing and other technical 
legislation. Individuals responsible for compliance are identified and 
are specifically recruited with recognised qualifications. Contracts 
are updated to reflect the new compliance regime and appropriate 
limitations of liability to customers negotiated where possible.

The Group’s greatest exposure to the UK NLW is in UK logistics, where 
we attract a higher proportion of workers at or near the current NLW 
level. In UK logistics, 64% of activity (by revenue) is on an open book 
basis, meaning such upward cost pricing pressures are passed straight 
through to the customer. Many of our closed book and minimum volume 
guarantee customer contracts include price escalators for regulatory 
changes and so these costs can also be passed onto customers.

The Group continually assesses its funding requirements in the context 
of its existing operations and growth plans. In the year ended 30 April 
2018, the Group entered into increased facilities with its bank to 
ensure that expected future growth plans can be funded within these 
increased facilities, and again in the current year. The current facilities 
run until 29 January 2021. The Group will continue to undertake reviews 
of funding requirements as its growth plans evolve.

22

Clipper Logistics plc  
 
 
 
i
t

d
e
u
n
n
o
c
e
c
n
a

i
l

p
m
o
C
&

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
i
F
,
l

a
g
e
L

Risk

Mitigation

Insurance risk
Certain risks may be uninsured or underinsured, 
whether arising from unforeseen gaps in 
insurance coverage or from conscious decisions 
to self-insure. Under-insurance could leave the 
Group with significant financial exposure.

Employment liabilities
Significant employment liabilities may be 
inherited on both acquisition of new businesses 
or on the winning of new contracts or from 
poorly-executed Transfer of Undertakings 
(Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006 
(“TUPE”) processes.

A detailed review of insurance coverage and gaps is undertaken at 
least once annually with expert guidance provided by our insurance 
broker. Members of the SMT responsible for insurance remain in regular 
contact with the insurance broker and regularly attend insurance 
training courses and seminars. Known gaps in insurance coverage  
are regularly presented and discussed at subsidiary board and  
Group Board levels, and additional insurance cover is purchased 
where appropriate.

All senior human resources managers are recruited with relevant 
experience and receive an appropriate level of training on TUPE 
matters. Each TUPE project is given an internal project lead and 
project updates are regularly provided to the SMT. External legal 
advice is sought and expert interim staff is resourced where necessary. 
Our acquisition due diligence always includes a human resources 
element, whether conducted by external advisors or by internal staff 
with an appropriate level of expertise. Acquisition agreements include 
seller indemnities for such liabilities.

Fraud risk
Major fraud, including the risks posed by 
organised crime, may result in significant 
financial loss.

Our accounting procedures manual includes several layers of 
checking and control for new customers and suppliers and changes 
to suppliers’ bank details, including combinations of oral and written 
confirmations from known contacts. Formal whistleblowing and anti-
bribery policies are in place.

Viability Statement

In accordance with provision C.2.2 of 
the 2016 revision of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the “Code”),  
the Directors have assessed the 
prospect of the Company and the 
Group over a longer period than  
the 12 months required by the  
‘Going Concern’ principle.

Whilst the Board has no reason to 
believe the Group will not be viable 
over a longer period, the period 
over which the Board considers it 
appropriate to form a reasonable 
expectation as to the Group’s longer-
term viability is the three year period 
to 30 April 2022. This period reflects 
the period used for the Group’s 
business plans – and the typical 
length of a customer contract – and 
has been selected because it gives 
management and the Board sufficient, 
realistic visibility on the future in the 
context of the industry and market 
environment. Relevant sensitivities 

have been used within the business 
plan to support the Group’s long term 
viability. The Board has considered 
whether it is aware of any specific 
relevant factors beyond the three 
year horizon and confirmed that there 
are none.

The Board’s assessment has been 
made with reference to the resilience 
of the Group and its historical ability 
to deliver strong operational cash 
flows, the Group’s robust balance 
sheet, the Group’s current strategy, 
the Board’s attitude to risk, and the 
principal risks documented in the 
Strategic Report. The starting point 
for the Board’s review was the annual 
strategic planning process, which 
results in business plans for the next 
three financial years. These plans 
are subjected to risk and sensitivity 
analysis. The assessment considers  
the potential impacts these risks would 
have under severe but plausible 

scenarios on the Group’s business 
model, the Group’s solvency and 
liquidity, compliance with covenants, 
likely availability to the business of 
future bank facilities and other key 
financial ratios. Discussions will be 
held with our banks regarding renewal 
of facilities early in the year ending 
30 April 2020. The Board considers 
that the Group’s broad spread of 
customers across independent 
market sectors, the majority of which 
are underpinned by long-term 
agreements with minimum volume 
guarantees or open book terms, acts 
significantly to mitigate the impact any 
of these risks might have on the Group.

Based on this assessment, the Directors 
confirm that they have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and 
the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet all their liabilities 
as they fall due up to 30 April 2022.

23

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019 
 
 
 
/ Strategic Report

Our People

The recruitment, retention and 
development of people are  
fundamental to the ongoing  
success and growth strategy  
of the Group.

46

Number of locations

24

Clipper Logistics plc 6,698

Number of employees

Strategy

Our recruitment strategy aims to 
ensure we can support Clipper’s 
growth plans through hiring the 
best people for our business; first 
time, every time.

We will achieve this through four 
main avenues:

People – improving and 
increasing the channels by 
which potential candidates have 
access to Clipper.

Process – implementing uniform 
and transparent processes across 
the business to ensure we are all 
aligned and working together 
toward a common goal.

Systems – investing in and 
implementing new technology 
to facilitate our ability to achieve 
our recruitment goals.

Collaboration – internal 
recruitment is a new concept 
for Clipper. Working together, 
feedback and communication 
are key to its success.

25

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Our People continued

Our Human Resources (“HR”) agenda 
continues to develop in line with the 
needs of the business and we have 
a well-defined people strategy that 
ensures we remain properly resourced 
in all areas, whilst seeking to develop 
talent and enrich career opportunities.

Clipper directly employs 6,698 people 
across Europe. We have comprehensive 
HR policies in place to protect and 
promote employee welfare and 
we are committed to supporting 
all human rights in our business 
operations as well as in our relationships 
with our customers, suppliers and 
other stakeholders.

Our approach
To underpin our HR strategy, we have 
developed a comprehensive Group-
wide competency framework, which 
defines, at all levels from apprentices 
up to Board level, expected levels of 
behaviour and outputs. This framework 
brings to life our values – Agility, Ability 
and Credibility – and provides the road-
map for everyone to succeed in our 
organisation. Our recruitment, learning 
and development, succession planning 
and retention strategies are all built 
around the competency framework.

Employee engagement
Reward and recognition are 
fundamental to Clipper. Our reward 
strategy ensures that everyone is 
properly remunerated for the role 
they undertake, and we proactively 
benchmark our terms and conditions 
across the wider logistics industry 
sector. All employees with six months’ 
service or more are invited to 
participate in each iteration of the 
Sharesave Plan (see page 95).

Open and regular communication 
across the Group remains high on the 
HR agenda as we continue to seek 
new and innovative ways of ensuring 
everyone remains up to date with 
what is happening. Increasingly, 
technology is playing a greater part 
in our communication strategy and, 
in 2018, we launched a brand new 
Group wide intranet to further improve 
communication channels within the 
Group. The use of social media is 
becoming ever-more popular and is 
used both internally and externally.

In 2019, we also launched Perkbox, an 
all-employee platform for accessing 
discounts from well-known brands, 
which aims to reward, incentivise and 
engage employees at all levels within 
the Group and to improve overall 
employee experience.

26

To provide focus and drive 
a ‘one-team’ dynamic, the 
Team Clipper programme 
has been developed. 

Loyalty of service is a cornerstone 
of our people strategy and we have 
a well-defined award policy that 
recognises those who have given long 
and loyal service to our organisation.

Clipper’s successful Fresh Start 
programme has been recognised by 
the industry through multiple Corporate 
social Responsibility (“CSR”) and 
innovation awards.

We encourage team working by 
involving employees in work-based 
project teams, open days and inter-
site competitions, as well as organised 
themed events on special occasions.

Fresh Start programme
Clipper remains committed to the 
equality of employment for everyone 
and recruits, develops, promotes and 
supports people regardless of their 
characteristics. To further enhance this 
commitment, we continue to drive our 
Fresh Start programme, which brings 
together a number of charity partners 
who represent different minority groups 
– Mencap, Reed in Partnership, Scope 
and Tempus Novo to name but a few. 
Fresh Start was rolled out across all our 
sites in 2018 with the aim of providing 
work and career opportunities for those 
who may otherwise have challenges 
entering the job market.

Over the last 12 months, we have 
employed 500 people from various 
backgrounds through Fresh Start. 20% 
of those employed were rehabilitated 
offenders. As at 30 April 2019, the 
retention rate of Fresh Start employees 
was 92%.

As part of our commitment to  
Fresh Start, we have taken several 
steps to ensure the success of the 
programme, including:

/  achieving Disability Confident 

Employer status;

/  auditing sites to ensure we are fit 

for purpose;

/  nominating Fresh Start champions  
for each site to be both a safe point 
of contact and an ambassador for 
the scheme;

/  mental health first aiders trained for 

each site; and

/  offering flexible and alternative  

shift patterns to increase access  
to employment.

People development
Learning and development  
are major components of our  
HR strategy. Underpinning our  
competency framework is a  
whole suite of people development 
programmes, from technical training 
through to management and senior 
executive development. In addition  
to comprehensive technical  
training, we have a full range  
of NVQ training, supported by  
the Apprenticeship programme.

For middle management, our Emerging 
Leaders programme is an 18-month 
programme which engages people in 
a wide range of people management 
strategies, all aligned to the workplace.

Similarly, our Agile Leaders programme 
for senior managers is designed to 
develop the talents and capabilities 
of people as leaders for the future. 
To further enhance our senior 
executives, in 2019 we will be offering 
the opportunity to complete an 
MBA qualification.

Team Clipper
To provide focus and drive a 
‘one-team’ dynamic, the Team 
Clipper cultural programme has 
been developed aimed at driving 
performance and creating an internal 
branding and dialogue that enable 
everyone at all levels to understand 
their contribution to the success of the 
business. This initiative is supported 
by a number of cultural programmes, 
performance development reviews, 
the competency framework and a 
whole suite of programmes designed 
to augment continuous improvement, 
communication and engagement.

Driver training
With our ever-growing vehicle fleet, 
the continuous development and 
improvement of driver skills is paramount. 
Our dedicated team of driver trainers 
ensures that every one of our drivers 

Clipper Logistics plc i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
R
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

G
r
o
u
p
F
i
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

S
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

C
o
m
p
a
n
y

F
i
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

S
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

Gender Diversity

Board

Total

6

Male (100%)

Other senior management

Total

14

Male (86%)
Female (14%)

All employees

Total

6,698

Male (57%)
Female (43%)

is fully trained and undertakes regular 
professional driver update training. 
Our dedicated driver training simulator 
has significantly enhanced driver 
performance and we continue to 
develop driver competence through 
classroom based and on-road learning.

Schools and universities
We actively promote both Clipper and 
the logistics sector in schools, colleges 
and universities and are working with 
the education bodies to ensure the 
sector is represented on the curriculum.

Our Graduate Training programme 
continues to go from strength to 
strength with a number of graduates 
in various disciplines recruited. In 2018, 
we employed 17 degree apprentices, 
with a further 15 expected in 2019, all 
funded through the Apprenticeship 
Levy. In partnership with Sheffield 
Hallam University, we have developed 
a bespoke management degree 
tailored to the specific needs of our 
organisation, which forms part of 
our Management Apprenticeship 
programme. Current graduates also work 
towards a qualification in leadership and 
management, to further enhance the 
technical training graduates receive.

As part of our commitment to engage 
with schools, we have taken ‘Business 
on the Move’ into both primary and 
secondary schools. This educational 
supply chain game is a versatile 
learning resource which helps to build 
interest in logistics at an early age 
and change the shape of logistics 
recruitment in the long term.

Equal opportunities
The Group is committed to the fair and 
equal treatment of everyone who works 
with and for us. Supported by training, 
policies and our five-point code of 
behaviour, we aim to ensure that no 
employee or worker is discriminated 
against, directly or indirectly, on the 
grounds of colour, race, ethnic and 
national origins, sexual orientation or 
gender, marital status, disability, religion 
or belief, or on the grounds of age.

These principles are included in our 
staff handbook, induction training and 
management programme and their 
impact is reflected in our truly diverse 
workforce. We have comprehensive 
policies which embrace the challenges 
of modern-day living and support 
work/life balance. We are happy to 
consider requests for flexible working 
and, wherever possible, will agree shift 
patterns which facilitate a balance 
between work and family life.

As part of our commitment, we 
engage an independent body to 
audit our processes and systems to 
ensure we meet ethical standards. 
For the year ended 30 April 2019, they 
confirmed such processes and systems 
were compliant.

Case study
Fresh Start

As Clipper Logistics continues to 
grow, the challenge for high quality, 
well-performing labour resource 
will be an increasing challenge 
to a sector that often finds 
resourcing difficult.

On top of this, we take our CSR 
responsibilities seriously and we feel 
there is much a business the size of 
Clipper can do to support those 
who may otherwise be overlooked 
for, or indeed excluded from, 
employment opportunities.

From the culmination of these two 
drivers our “Fresh Start” initiative 
was born.

In July 2018 we met John (not his real 
name). John had been struck down 
with cancer three times over the 
past 10 years, and had struggled to 
gain employment as a result of the 
length of time he had been out  
of work.

Working closely with Reed In 
Partnership, John undertook an 
alternative interviewing process 
and received pre-employment 
training and mentoring. We 
offered John a secure job at our 
new PrettyLittleThing operation 
through Clipper’s Fresh Start 
programme, and within three 
weeks his performance was so 
good that we promoted him to 
Team Leader.

27

Annual Report and Accounts 2019 
 
 
 
 
/ Strategic Report
Sustainability

The Group’s framework of policies and 
guidelines sets clear standards to ensure 
that we conduct our business ethically 
and responsibly.

Operating in a socially responsible 
manner is important to us and our 
stakeholders and is central to our 
values-based culture.

The environment
We are committed to limiting the 
impact that our operations have on the 
environment, and we are doing this by:

/  sourcing all of our UK Logistics 
electricity requirements from 
sustainable sources;

/  adhering to relevant legislation and 
regulations, working to respected 
codes of practice, and regularly 
reviewing and improving how  
we work;

/  continuing with our carbon 

management project to reduce 
energy consumption and emissions 
of greenhouse gases (“GHGs”) from 
our warehouses;

/  investigating fuel use, route planning 
and optimum vehicle design, and 
introducing a study of business travel 
to become more efficient and 
minimise emissions;

/  considering the best use of raw 
materials and using recycled/ 
recyclable products where possible;
/  assessing and reducing water usage 
through efficient technology and 
awareness;

/  continuing to minimise waste through 
compacting and material reuse and 
recycling;

/  promoting environmental awareness 

at all levels of the business and 
encouraging appropriate actions  
by all staff; and

/  liaising with suppliers, customers  

and contractors to improve 
environmental management at  
all levels of the supply chain.

Greenhouse gas emissions
The Group records energy and fuel use 
for all areas of the business, based on 
invoices received for diesel fuel, gas oil, 
electricity and natural gas. Fuel used 
for business travel in company vehicles 
is also included.

The Group uses the average monthly 
price per litre to convert the diesel fuel, 
heating oil and vehicle fuel costs into 
litres of fuel used.

The kWh figures for gas and electricity 
used, and the figures for litres of each 
fuel type used, are then converted 
into tonnes of CO2 equivalent 
(“tCO2 e”) using the relevant DEFRA 
conversion factors.

In the year ended 30 April 2019, Scope 
1 emissions increased from the prior 
year, driven by an increase in the 
warehouse space occupied by the 
Group (which led to higher gas usage), 
and an increase in the transport 
activities within the UK logistics business 
(which increased the amount of diesel 
fuel used). However, total emissions 
per £ million of revenue fell by 7.3% 
as a result of ongoing fuel efficiency 
programmes and increased utilisation 
of space within our warehouses, 
which meant that revenue increased 
without a proportionate increase in 
emissions. Scope 2 emissions have 
increased overall due to higher 
kWh usage; the UK electricity factor 
is prone to fluctuate from year to 
year as the fuel mix consumed in UK 
power stations (and auto-generators) 
and the proportion of net imported 
electricity changes.

Under the most recent update, the 
tCO2e factor has decreased due 
to a decrease in coal generation 
and an increase mainly in natural 
gas and, to a much lower extent, 
renewable generation.

The table below shows a summary of 
GHG emissions for the Group:

Emissions
(tCO2e)

Scope 1

Scope 2

30 April
2019

30 April
2018

33,535 32,070

7,994

6,866

Total emissions

41,529 38,936

Emissions per £m  
of revenue

90.2

97.3

Scope 1 (direct) GHG emissions are 
derived from the consumption of gas, 
oil and vehicle fuel.

Scope 2 (electricity indirect) GHG 
emissions are derived from the 
consumption of purchased electricity.

Waste recycling
The Group carefully considers which 
raw materials to use and uses recycled/
recyclable products where applicable. 
Waste is sorted into plastics, paper/
cardboard, wood and metal. It is 
recycled, reused or compacted on site.

Our expanding returns operations sort, 
reprocess, repair or recycle our clients’ 
products which are returned from their 
customers. These processes help to 
reduce the amount of goods which 
may otherwise go to landfill.

Solar power
Through our commitment to reduce 
our energy consumption and GHG 
emissions, we now have solar panels 
installed at four of our UK sites.

28

Clipper Logistics plc Communities
As a responsible business, we consider 
ourselves an integral part of the 
communities in which we operate.

Part of this responsibility sees us, where 
possible, encouraging a positive 
impact and facilitating local initiatives 
in the following ways:

/  We support a range of charities, 

including those that maintain natural 
environments for animals and the 
safety of local habitats.

/  We provide logistical support  
for relief aid programmes to 
vulnerable areas.

/  We support local communities at site 
level through management and staff 
choice, e.g. providing kit to a 
number of amateur sports teams.
/  We strive to be neighbourly wherever 

we operate.

/  We recruit from within local areas 

and actively promote the business 
as an employer of choice.
/  We encourage and support 

fundraising by our employees.

/  We will continue to develop our CSR 
and environmental management 
processes to improve and enhance 
these areas of our business activities.

Commercial
Wherever possible we work with our 
customers to build environmental 
considerations into our recommended 
solutions. This is particularly evident 
with our pioneering retail consolidation 
centres which greatly reduce final mile 
deliveries, congestion and associated 
emissions when delivering to shopping 
centres and congested city centres.

To further support this initiative, we 
currently use two electric 7.5 tonne 
vehicles within our fleet.

We also perform store consolidation 
activities for John Lewis suppliers 
through our Clicklink joint venture, 
reducing road miles.

Telematics
The vast majority of the commercial 
fleet has telematics fitted. The initial 
reason is road safety; however, when 
drivers drive more conscientiously we 
have seen a 10% reduction in fuel use.

Longer semi-trailers
We are currently utilising a number 
of longer semi-trailers in our trunking 
operations. These trailers are double 
decked and two metres longer 
than our current trailers. These will 
increase capacity per trailer and 
reduce the amount of trunks that we 
will need, therefore reducing costs 
in the operation and reducing our 
carbon footprint.

Gas-powered vehicles
During 2018, we have taken on ten gas 
vehicles which produce less harmful 
emissions and further our commitment 
to limit the impact on the environment.

CSR policy
The Group recognises the importance 
of environmental protection and is 
committed to conducting business 
ethically, responsibly and in 
compliance with laws, regulations 
and codes of practice applicable 
to our business activities. The CSR 
and related policies are reviewed 
and amended where appropriate. 
We actively promote the Ethical Trading 
Initiative Base Code and undertake 
independent auditing of our facilities 
and labour providers. Our Fresh Start 
programme will also ensure that we 
will actively promote the recruitment, 
engagement, development and 
succession of people who may 
otherwise face barriers to entry 
into employment.

Anti-slavery and human trafficking
We are committed to ensuring that 
there is no slavery or human trafficking 
in our supply chains or in any part of 
our business. Our Anti-Slavery and 
Human Trafficking policy reflects 
our commitment to acting ethically 
and with integrity in all our business 
relationships and to implementing and 
enforcing effective systems and controls 
to ensure slavery and human trafficking 
are not taking place anywhere in our 
supply chains.

We believe that, in conjunction with the 
rigorous policies implemented by our 
clients and suppliers, we can drive out 
any aspects of human trafficking and 
slavery from our supply chains.

Clipper places paramount importance 
on only working with suppliers who 
treat their obligations regarding 
modern slavery with the importance 
that Clipper does. We will not work 
with any organisation within our supply 
chain that is unable to demonstrate 
a corresponding commitment to 
this, irrespective of whether they 
are required to do so statutorily or 
otherwise. Where possible, we build 
long-standing relationships with our 
customers and major suppliers, making 
clear our expectations of business 
behaviour. All suppliers are notified 
of Clipper’s Anti-Slavery and Human 
Trafficking policy and are expected 
to comply with it.

Clipper educates its employees 
regarding the types of factors which 
can indicate whether any worker 
(permanent or temporary) in Clipper’s 
supply chain may be subject to undue 
influence. In doing so, Clipper actively 
encourages employees to report 
any suspicious activity to the Group 
Human Resources Director, acting in his 
capacity as Compliance Manager.

Clipper conducts rigorous 
checks to verify the identity of each 
worker and their right to work in the 
UK. Clipper audits its agency suppliers 
against legislative compliance, 
including compliance with the Modern 
Slavery Act 2015. It further complies with 
audits conducted by its customers.

The Board believes that driving out 
slavery in any form from its supply 
chains is fundamental to the aims 
of Clipper.

29

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Operating and Financial Review

Group performance for the year ended 30 April 2019
The Group continued to make good progress in the financial year ended 30 April 2019. Group revenue grew by 15.0% to 
£460.2 million. Group EBIT for the year was £20.2 million compared to £20.9 million in the prior year. However, EBIT before 
Property-related income1 increased by 18.0% to £17.1 million, with revenue and EBIT growth in e-fulfilment & returns 
management services. 

Revenue growth was very strong in e-fulfilment & returns management services, where revenue of £233.9 million was 46.8% 
ahead of the previous year, but we are also pleased that non e-fulfilment revenues grew by 4.4% to £145.3 million.

EBIT from value-added logistics services (excluding Property-related income) increased by 22.8% to £18.0 million, however 
this was partially offset by performance in the commercial vehicles segment, where EBIT of £1.1m was £1.4m lower than in the 
previous year.

Property-related income was £3.1 million in the year to 30 April 2019, £3.3 million lower than the prior year.  Consequently, total 
EBIT was 3.1% lower than in the previous year at £20.2m.

The Group entered into a series of contracts with a customer towards the end of the financial year ended 30 April 2019. 
On consideration of the various agreements it was determined that these agreements should be accounted for as a business 
combination under IFRS 3. Whether the business combination should be accounted for in the year ended 30 April 2019 or in 
the year ending 30 April 2020 was debated at length during the audit process. However, on balance it was determined that 
the business combination should be recognised in the year ending 30 April 2020. The provisional accounting for the business 
combination is disclosed in note 29 and any negative goodwill, currently estimated at £3.0 million, will be recognised within 
e-fulfilment & returns management services’ operating profit in the year ending 30 April 2020. 

1.   “Property-related income” comprises profit from property-related advisory services of £3,100,000 (2018: £4.200,000) and £nil (2018: £2,151,000) of 

profit on disposal of a freehold property.

Group revenue

E-fulfilment & returns management services
Non e-fulfilment logistics

Total value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles
Inter-segment sales

Group revenue

Year ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year ended
30  April
2018
£m

233.9
145.3

379.2
82.6
(1.5)

460.2

159.4
139.1

298.5
103.6
(2.0)

400.1

% change

+46.8%
+4.4%

+27.0%
-20.3%

+15.0%

Group revenue increased by 15.0% to £460.2 million, with strong growth of 27.0% in value-added logistics services revenues 
being partly offset by a decline in commercial vehicles revenues.

Group EBIT

E-fulfilment & returns management services
Non e-fulfilment logistics
Central logistics overheads

Total value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles
Head office costs

EBIT before Property-related income

Property-related income

Group EBIT

Year ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year ended
30 April
2018
£m

13.6
9.9
(5.5)

18.0
1.1
(2.0)

17.1

3.1

20.2

11.3
9.0
(5.7)

14.6
2.5
(2.6)

14.5

6.4

20.9

% change

+20.1%
+10.4%

+22.8%
-53.6%

+18.0%

-51.2%

-3.1%

Percentages are calculated on the underlying numbers as presented in the Group Financial Statements, not on the rounded figures in the tables above.

30

Clipper Logistics plc E-fulfilment & returns management  
services revenue growth was 46.8%, 
significantly outperforming growth in  
the wider UK market. 

E-fulfilment & returns management 
services include the receipt, 
warehousing, stock management, 
picking, packing and despatch of 
products on behalf of customers to 
support their online trading activities, 
as well as a range of ancillary support 
services including returns management, 
branded as Boomerang, under which 
returns of products are managed 
on behalf of retailers. This business 
activity also includes Click and Collect 
activities (through the Clicklink joint 
venture) and Technical Services.

Revenues from e-fulfilment & returns 
management services increased by 
46.8% from £159.4 million for the year 
ended 30 April 2018 to £233.9 million 
for the year ended 30 April 2019, with 
EBIT before Property-related income 
growing by 20.1% to £13.6 million. 
Property-related income was £nil in 
the year to 30 April 2019, compared 
to £0.6 million in the previous year. 
Including the impact of reduced 
Property-related income EBIT was 
14.2% higher than in the previous year. 
This growth continues the double 
digit percentage EBIT growth of prior 
years, and delivers against our stated 
objective of being a thought leader 
and a market leader in the provision 
of value-added services across the 
e-fulfilment sector.

EBIT is the primary KPI by which the 
management team assesses corporate 
performance. EBIT is assessed against 
Board approved budgets. Another KPI 
we have introduced in the year is 
EBIT before Property-related income. 
The prior year included significant 
property-related advisory revenues 
and one-off profits on disposal of a 
freehold property. The new metric 
aids comparability of year-on-year 
profitability. A further KPI is net debt, 
which is discussed further below.

EBIT margin (%) is not considered by 
the Directors to be a key metric since 
the high proportion of open book 
and minimum volume guarantee 
contracts within the UK logistics division 
distorts reported margins. This is due 
to an element of management fees 
on certain contracts being relatively 
fixed in the short term, so that an 
increase in revenue in periods of 
increased activity will not necessarily 
give rise to a proportionate increase 
in profit, resulting in lower reported 
margins. Conversely, in periods of 
reduced activity levels, reported 
margins would typically increase. 
Similarly, revenue derived from 
minimum volume guarantee contracts 
is fixed at a minimum level, so that a 
shortfall in activity levels would give 
rise to a lower cost base and a higher 
reported margin. In addition, within 
the commercial vehicles segment, 
the level of high value, relatively low 
margin new vehicle sales also distorts 
reported margins. Accordingly, EBIT is 
a more relevant measure of financial 
performance than EBIT margin (%).

Segmental trading overview
Clipper is managed through two 
distinct operating segments, being 
value-added logistics services and 
commercial vehicles. The value-
added logistics services segment is 
further subdivided into two business 
activities, being e-fulfilment & returns 
management services and non 
e-fulfilment logistics.

Value added logistics services

Year 
ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year 
ended
30 April
2018
£m

% 
change

Revenue

379.2

298.5

+27.0%

EBIT*
Property- 
related 
income

 18.0 

 14.6 

+22.8%

3.1

6.4

-51.2%

EBIT

 21.1 

 21.0 

+0.4%

EBIT* represents EBIT excluding Property-
related income. 

Within the value-added logistics 
services segment, Group revenue 
benefited from the full-year impact 
of operations commenced during 
the year ended 30 April 2018, volume 
growth and extension of services on 
existing contracts, the part-year impact 
of operations commenced during the 
year ended 30 April 2019, and further 
contributions from property-related 
advisory services.

These revenue items had a positive 
impact on EBIT. In addition, EBIT also 
benefited from improved Clicklink 
results, particularly throughout the 
second half of the year as sales price 
increases took effect.

E-fulfilment & returns management 
services

Year 
ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year 
ended
30 April
2018
£m

%
 change

Revenue

233.9

159.4

+46.8%

EBIT*
Property-
related 
income

 13.6 

 11.3 

+20.1%

– 

 0.6 

-100.0%

EBIT

13.6

11.9

+14.2%

EBIT* represents EBIT excluding Property-
related income.

31

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Operating and Financial Review continued

Group revenue
(2018: £400m) +15.0% 

£460m

Performance in e-fulfilment & returns 
management services benefited from:

/  the part-year impact of operations 

commenced during the year ended 
30 April 2019, including: boohoo.com 
subsidiary PrettyLittleThing, Ginger 
Ray, Levi Strauss, Vestel and Tech 
Data in the UK, and with Mountain 
Warehouse in Poland. The impact 
of these activities will not be fully 
realised until the year ending 
30 April 2020;

/  the full-year impact of operations 

commenced during the year ended 
30 April 2018, including: our M&S 
returns operations, Halfords and River 
Island in the UK; and ASOS returns  
in Poland; and

/  volume growth and extension of 
services on existing contracts, 
including with ASOS, Wilko, Zara, 
Inditex and Browns in the UK, in part 
driven by particularly strong organic 
growth in the UK e-fulfilment market 
due to the continuing shift in retail 
trends towards online trading, and 
European growth in logistics services 
for Westwing, Smiffy’s and s.Oliver, 
and technical returns services  
for Amazon.

Whilst we experienced some organic 
revenue decline with certain of our 
customers, overall revenue growth 
was strong.

The strong net revenue growth 
translated into significant growth in 
EBIT and improved results from the 
Clicklink operation, driven by the 
full-year impact of Superdry and 
Urban Outfitters activity, and a part-
year impact of price increases with 
major customers.

However, the favourable impact of 
this was partly diluted because of (i) 
vacant warehouse space remaining 
underutilised and (ii) productivity 
inefficiencies on a new warehouse 
management system following the 
migration of one of our operations 
between sites.

Late in the financial year under review 
and into the early months of the new 
financial year, we have streamlined 
the Clicklink under-the-roof operation 
through labour sharing initiatives with 
one of our Northampton depots, 
significantly reducing the cost base, 
the benefits of which will be seen in the 
current financial year.

Since the year end, we have 
commenced activities with new 
customers including Shop Direct 
and Simba Sleep, we have secured a 
contract with Amara Living and we shall 
be commencing the Nutmeg online 
operation for Morrisons imminently. 
However, we have received notice 
that Whistles and Go Outdoors will 
not be renewing their contracts at the 
end of their current terms in the year 
ending 30 April 2020, both of which are 
due to the services we provide being 
combined into other operations.

We have also formally notified a 
customer of our intention not to renew 
a major current contract when it 
reaches the end of its current term in 
March 2020; the effect of this will be 
immediately earnings-enhancing.

Non e-fulfilment logistics

Year 
ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year 
ended
30 April
2018
£m

% 
change

Revenue

145.3

139.1

+4.4%

EBIT*
Property-
related 
income

EBIT

 9.9 

 9.0 

+10.4%

 3.1 

13.0

 5.8 

-46.3%

14.8

-11.8%

EBIT* represents EBIT excluding Property-
related income.

Non e-fulfilment logistics operations 
include receipt of inbound product, 
warehousing, picking, packing and 
distribution of products on behalf of 
customers in traditional bricks and 
mortar retail. Within this business 
activity, the Group handles high value 
products, including tobacco, alcohol 
and designer clothing, and also 
undertakes traditional retail support 
services including processing, storage 
and distribution of products, particularly 
fashion, to high street retailers as well 
as property-related advisory services 
linked to optimising the Group’s 
warehousing arrangements.

Revenue from non e-fulfilment 
operations grew by 4.4% for the 
year ended 30 April 2019, from 
£139.1 million to £145.3 million, a positive 
performance given the underlying 
market headwinds in this sector. 

EBIT excluding Property-related income 
increased by 10.4% to £9.9 million 
in the year ended 30 April 2019. 
Property-related income reduced from 
£5.8 million to £3.1 million, resulting in 
total EBIT from this activity reducing by 
11.8% to £13.0 million.

The following factors contributed 
positively to the revenue growth:

/  the full-year effect of the activities 
commenced in the prior year 
with Crosswater and Edinburgh 
Woollen Mill;

/  organic volume growth and 

extensions to service offerings with 
existing customers, including Asda, 
Browns, Morrisons and New Look, 
although this was partly offset by 
some organic decline with certain 
other retail customers driven by high 
street market conditions and the loss 
of a significant product range from 
our M&S activities in Peterborough; 
and

/  part-year contributions from new 

activities commenced in the current 
year, including new activities for 
Halfords out of the new Crick 
warehouse, for Sports Direct out of 
various UK locations, for Levi Strauss 
out of Northampton, for Neon Sheep 
out of Milton Keynes and for Ginger 
Ray out of Harlow. Such activities will 
generate a full year of contribution 
in the year ending 30 April 2020.

32

Clipper Logistics plc The following factors had an adverse 
impact on revenue year-on-year:

/  part-year impacts from activities 

ceased in the year, including those 
operations we performed for M&S 
out of our Swadlincote depot 
and the loss of Bench following its 
insolvency. Certain other of our 
customers have also been through 
high profile financial distress as a 
direct result of the challenges facing 
the UK high street, but we have 
remained relatively insulated from 
any adverse financial impact due to 
our robust contractual protections; 
and

/  a lower contribution to revenue 
and EBIT from property-related 
advisory services, as noted above.

Whilst revenue growth had a 
favourable impact on EBIT, costs on 
one specific closed book contract 
resulted in an adverse contribution to 
EBIT, as we were unable to recover the 
fixed costs of the operation through 
unit rates. This contract has been 
renegotiated since the year end to 
give more favourable terms to Clipper 
going forwards.

Already in the year ending 30 April 
2020, we have migrated our Halfords 
operation from our Daventry facility 
to our new Crick facility.

Shortly before the year end, those 
activities we performed for C&A 
out of our Milton Keynes depot were 
discontinued. The operation involved 
pre-retail activity on supplies from the 
Far East for C&A’s mainland Europe 
customers. The customer has now taken 
UK out of this supply chain due to Brexit 
fears. In addition, activities for Pep&Co 
will cease shortly.

Central logistics overheads

Year 
ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year 
ended
30 April
2018
£m

% 
change

EBIT

(5.5)

(5.7)

Central logistics overheads include 
the costs of the directors of the logistics 
business, the project delivery and IT 
support teams, sales and marketing, 
accounting and finance, and human 
resources, that cannot be allocated in 
a meaningful way to business units.

Central logistics overheads reduced 
by £0.2 million (2.4%), from £5.7 million 
in the year ended 30 April 2018 
to £5.5 million in the year ended 
30 April 2019.

Whilst we have continued to invest 
in the operational support and back 
office functions of the business to 
accommodate revenue growth, 
thereby increasing the overhead 
base, this has been more than offset 
by a favourable impact of share 
based payment charges year-on-
year of £0.9 million (see below), which 
contributed a credit of £0.4 million in 
the year ended 30 April 2019 having 
contributed a charge of £0.5 million in 
the prior year.

Overall share based payment charges
Share based payment credits totalling 
£1.2 million have been credited 
(2018: £1.2 million charged) primarily 
to central logistics overheads and 
head office costs (as appropriate) in 
respect of the Sharesave Plan and 
the Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) 
(see note 23 to the Group Financial 
Statements and page 48 of the 
Directors Remuneration Report for 
further information). 

Commercial vehicles

Year 
ended
30 April
2019
£m

Revenue
EBIT

82.6
1.1

Year 
ended
30 April
2018
£m

103.6
2.5

% 
change

-20.3%
-53.6%

The commercial vehicles business, 
Northern Commercials (Mirfield) Limited, 
operates Iveco and Fiat commercial 
vehicle dealerships from five dealership 
locations and has three sub-dealers. 
Main dealerships are located in 
Brighouse, Manchester, Northampton, 
Dunstable and Tonbridge. The former 
Brighton dealership has been recently 
closed. Thus, the business operates 
across the north of England and into 
Wales, through the Midlands, and into 
the South-east.

The UK commercial vehicles market 
has been challenging in the year, with 
new vehicle registrations 1.7% down 
in calendar year 2018 compared 
to calendar year 2017. Much of the 
market decline is undoubtedly due 
to Brexit uncertainties, whilst concerns 
around urban clean air zones has also 
curbed sales.

The overall market contraction has 
been exacerbated for Iveco dealers 
specifically because of Iveco’s own UK 
strategy which has focused on margin 
preservation for Iveco, rather than 
growing sales and maintaining market 
share. As a result, our commercial 
vehicles segment has been unable to 
be competitive when pitching against 
other marques and, as a result, sales 
have declined significantly. We expect 
to see a strategic shift from Iveco UK in 
the coming months following the May 
2019 appointment of a new business 
director for UK and Ireland.

Head office costs

Year 
ended
30 April
2019
£m

Year 
ended
30  April
2018
£m

% 
change

EBIT

(2.0)

(2.6)

Head office costs represent the cost of 
certain Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors, plc compliance costs and the 
costs of the plc head office at Central 
Square, Leeds.

Head office costs decreased by 
£0.6 million (22.9%), from £2.6 million 
in the year ended 30 April 2018 to 
£2.0 million in the year ended 30 April 
2019. The year-on-year decrease 
in head office costs is largely due 
to the £1.4 million impact of share-
based payments (see above) – which 
contributed a credit of £0.8 million in 
the year ended 30 April 2019 having 
contributed a charge of £0.6 million in 
the prior year – although this is partly 
offset by the increased investment we 
have made in the senior management 
team and certain costs relating to one-
off events and projects.

Overview of P&L performance 
for the year ended 30 April 2019
The revenue and EBIT performance 
of the Group are as discussed above. 
The other aspects of the Group income 
statement are discussed below.

Net finance costs
Net finance costs for the year ended 
30 April 2019 increased by 8.4% to 
£2.1 million (2018: £2.0 million), the 
increase being attributable to the 
increased average net debt following 
increases in our average debtor 
levels due to the revenue growth in 
the value-added logistics services 
segment, certain overdue debtors 
and increased accrued income.

33

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Strategic Report

Operating and Financial Review continued

Profit Before Tax and Amortisation 
(“PBTA”)
PBTA is defined as profit before 
income tax, before amortisation 
of intangible assets arising on 
consolidation. Whilst not considered 
a KPI by management, this measure 
is used by market analysts. PBTA was 
£18.1 million (=£16.9m PBT plus £1.2m 
amortisation of other intangible assets) 
for the year ended 30 April 2019, a 
decrease of 5.0% on the year ended 
30 April 2018 PBTA of £19.1 million 
(=£18.0m PBT plus £1.1m amortisation 
of other intangible assets).

Taxation
The effective rate of taxation of 
20.8% (2018: 20.5%) is higher than 
the average standard UK rate of 
corporation tax applicable in the year 
of 19.0% (2018: 19.0%) principally due to 
certain expenditure incurred which is 
disallowable for tax purposes and the 
higher effective rate of tax to which 
the German and Polish businesses 
are subject.

Profit after tax
The profit after tax for the year 
ended 30 April 2019 was £13.4 million 
(2018: £14.3 million), a decrease of 6.1%.

Earnings per share
Earnings per share were 13.2 pence 
for the year ended 30 April 2019 
(2018: 14.2 pence). Adjusted to remove 
amortisation of intangible assets arising 
on consolidation, earnings per share 
were 14.4 pence (2018: 15.2 pence).

Current trading and outlook
In the year ending 30 April 2020, 
we expect revenue to benefit from:

/  the full-year effects of the new 

operations brought on line in the 
logistics segment in the year ended 
30 April 2019. As noted previously, the 
Group commenced activities on a 
number of new contracts in the year 
ended 30 April 2019;

/  growth with existing customers, either 
organically – particularly with those 
in e-commerce who will benefit from 
market growth – or through new 
service lines for those customers;

/  growth from conversion of some of 

the opportunities on our new 
business pipeline, including in 
mainland Europe. There is a strong 
new business pipeline in the Group. 
These opportunities will be converted 
through a focus on retail specialisms 
and provision of cost-effective, 
value-added solutions. Some of 
these new business activities will not 
reach full-year run-rate until the year 
ending 30 April 2021 and beyond;

/  operations which have either 

recently commenced after the year 
end or other known new activities 
which are at various stages of 
planning. The annualised impact 
of these activities will not be fully 
delivered until the year ending 
30 April 2021; and

/  a return to steady growth in the 
commercial vehicles business in 
the year ending 30 April 2020.

In addition to the revenue impacts, 
we expect EBIT to benefit in the year 
ending April 2020 from:

/  those contracts that were entered 
into in the latter part of the year 
ended 30 April 2019 but which fall to 
be accounted for in the year to 
30 April 2020; and

/  improved profitability from Clicklink, 
as the joint venture benefits from the 
full-year revenue impact of price 
increases with customers secured in 
November 2018 and the labour 
sharing initiatives implemented in 
Spring 2019.

However, as a result of the net 
anticipated EBIT improvements 
elsewhere, we expect the share-based 
payment P&L impact to return to a 
charge in the year ending 30 April 2020 
and beyond, compared to a credit in 
the year ended 30 April 2019, partially 
offsetting overall profit gains elsewhere.

Whilst the business is still in a robust 
position, we remain mindful of the 
political and economic uncertainty 
facing our core markets.

The adoption of the new leasing 
accounting standard (IFRS 16) in 
the year ending 30 April 2020 will 
significantly reduce the Group’s 
future operating lease charges, will 
significantly increase the Group’s future 
depreciation and finance costs, and 
will also affect the deferred tax  
charge / credit (see page 80).

Balance sheet and cash flow
Capital expenditure and fixed assets
We incurred expenditure of 
£26.4 million in the year ended 
30 April 2019 (2018: £12.7 million) on 
intangible assets and property, plant 
& equipment. £25.8 million of this 
was incurred in the logistics services 
segment (2018: £12.3 million) and 
£0.6 million (2018: £0.7 million) in the 
commercial vehicles segment.

Approximately £7.7 million 
(2018: £7.7 million) of the additions were 
purchased in cash and £18.7 million 
(2018: £5.0 million) were purchased 
through HP and finance leases.

Noteworthy capital additions in the 
year were a pick tower in Poland, 
new site development at Crick and 
Peterborough, a conveyor in Ollerton 
and an additional mezzanine floor 
at Northampton.

In the year ended 30 April 2019, we 
disposed of assets with a net book 
value of £0.4 million, on which we 
generated a profit on disposal of 
£0.1 million.

In the prior year, we disposed of 
assets with a net book value of 
£4.5 million, on which we generated 
a profit on disposal of £2.2 million. 
Substantially all of the £4.5 million net 
book value related to the disposal of 
a freehold property which the Group 
had acquired earlier in the period as 
part of the purchase of Tesam.

Clipper’s outstanding capital 
expenditure commitment at 30 April 
2019 was £8.6 million (2017: £17.9 million), 
reflecting the timing of investments in 
new and existing customer contracts.

34

Clipper Logistics plc The adoption of the new leasing 
accounting standard (IFRS 16) in 
the year ending 30 April 2020 will 
significantly increase the Group’s 
reported total non-current assets  
(see page 80).

Cash flow
Cash generated from operations was 
£28.3 million (2018: £24.5 million).

The business continues to be highly 
cash generative. Under the UK logistics 
business model, Clipper is typically 
paid in the month in which services 
are delivered on open book and 
minimum volume guarantee contracts, 
giving rise to a typically net favourable 
impact on working capital, whilst in the 
commercial vehicles business working 
capital is substantially funded by the 
manufacturer through stocking facilities 
for new vehicles and trade credit terms 
for parts supplied.

In the year ended 30 April 2019, 
we generated £0.6 million  of 
cash inflow from working capital 
(2018: £3.2 million outflow).

There are a number of cash flows 
disclosed outside of cash flow from 
operations which occur regularly, 
although the magnitude of these 
can change significantly year-on-year.

These cash flows include dividends, 
drawdown and repayment of bank 
loans, sales and purchase of fixed 
assets (including repayments on 
assets purchased under finance 
leases), corporation tax payments, 
interest payments and share issues. 
Taking each of these in turn:

/  Dividends paid in the year ended 
30 April 2019 amounted to £8.9 
million, an increase of 17.2% on the 
prior year (2018: £7.6 million), and in 
line with our stated dividend policy.

/  Cash flows arising from the 

drawdown and repayments of 
bank loans were a £7.3 million inflow 
in the year ended 30 April 2019 (2018: 
£8.2 million), the drawdown being 
used to fund short-term working 
capital requirements.

/  Cash purchases of fixed assets 

amounted to £7.7 million in the year 
ended 30 April 2019 (2018: £7.7 
million), with a further £10.4 million 
cash used to repay finance leases 
(2018: £7.4 million). Finance leasing 
and hire purchase funding remains 
an attractive means of funding for 
Clipper, as the future cash outflows 
can be funded through future cash 
inflows on open book contracts. 
Sales of fixed assets generated £0.5 
million in the year ended 30 April 
2019 (2018: £6.7 million), the 
significant reduction being due to 
the inclusion of a freehold property 
sale in the prior year.

/  Corporation tax of £4.3 million was 

paid in the year ended 30 April 2019 
(2018: £4.0 million), the increase 
being driven by the overall increased 
profitability of the Group.

/  Interest paid increased by £0.1 million 

to £2.0 million in the year ended 
30 April 2019 (2018: £1.9 million), 
primarily due to increased borrowing 
levels on HP contracts and revolving 
credit facilities.

/  Cash inflows of £0.35 million were 

generated from shares issued in the 
year ended 30 April 2019, compared 
to £1.63 million in the prior year. In the 
prior year, share issues to employees 
generated £1.38 million. This amount 
was so high because it was the first 
vesting of Sharesave since Clipper’s 
listing on the London Stock 
Exchange, and so benefited from a 
high initial take up. There were also 
shares issued to Numis Securities 
Limited (Clipper’s corporate broker) 
in the prior year which generated 
£0.25 million, when it exercised a 
warrant in place since the Initial 
Public Offering (“IPO”).

Whilst the timing and magnitude 
of dividends, tax payments and 
interest payments can be predicted 
with relative certainty, the timing of 
drawdowns on bank loans and fixed 
asset-related cash flows is much more 
dependent on specific one-off projects, 
and so can quite easily fall into one 
financial period or the next.

Two significant one-off cash flows 
arose in the prior year (ended 30 April 
2018): firstly, there was the acquisition 
of Tesam for a cash consideration of 
£9.6 million (net of cash acquired); and 
secondly, there was the acquisition of 
RepairTech for a cash consideration 
of £2.2 million (net of cash acquired). 
There was also £0.5 million of deferred 
consideration paid in respect of the 
latter in the year ended 30 April 2019 
and a £0.5 million increase in the loan 
to Clicklink, disclosed as a non-current 
financial asset (see note 27 to the 
Group Financial Statements).

Net debt
In addition to EBIT, net debt is 
considered a KPI for the Group.

The Group had £45.9 million of net 
debt outstanding at 30 April 2019 
(2018: £31.7 million) (see note 20 to 
the Group Financial Statements), an 
increase of £14.3 million. The increase 
in net debt was driven primarily by 
the £18.7 million of assets acquired 
on HP and finance contracts in the 
year ended 30 April 2019, which more 
than offset the positive cash flows 
from operating activities, net of cash 
flows from investing activities and 
dividends paid.

It is worth noting that where an open 
book customer has a strong credit 
rating, Clipper will often fund the 
initial capital requirements on the 
condition that the customer commits 
to repaying this over the term of 
the contract, together with finance 
charges and a management fee. 
At 30 April 2019, Clipper has £34.9 million 
(2018: £22.4 million) of capital 
contracted to be recovered from open 
book customers over the remaining 
term of the customer contracts.

The adoption of the new leasing 
accounting standard (IFRS 16) in 
the year ending 30 April 2020 will 
significantly increase the Group’s 
reported net debt (see page 80).

Our 2019 Strategic Report, from page 
1 to page 35, has been reviewed and 
approved by the Board of Directors on 
29 August 2019.

David Hodkin
Chief Financial Officer

35

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Board of Directors

Steve Parkin
Executive Chairman

Tony Mannix
Chief Executive Officer

David Hodkin
Chief Financial Officer

Steve, a fashion logistics specialist, 
founded Clipper in 1992. As Executive 
Chairman, he is responsible for the 
strategic direction of the Group. 
Steve has extensive experience of retail 
logistics. He holds and pursues strategic 
level discussions with major retailers. 
In addition, he drives the Group’s 
acquisition strategy.

Tony was appointed Chief Executive 
Officer of the Group in May 2014. 
He joined Clipper in 2006 as Managing 
Director of the UK logistics division. 
Tony has over 30 years’ experience in 
the logistics sector, and held a number 
of senior roles with Roseby’s plc (which 
became part of Homestyle Group plc), 
ultimately becoming Logistics Director.

Steve is the chairman of the 
Nomination Committee.

Tony has particular experience of 
operating in complex retail logistics 
environments, including the design 
and specification of both distribution 
centres and warehouse management 
systems. He began his career in logistics 
with the Burton Group, after working 
in the construction industry following 
his graduation with a degree in 
architectural engineering.

David joined Clipper as Group 
Chief Financial Officer in 2003. 
He held a variety of board level roles 
prior to joining Clipper, including Group 
Finance Director of Symphony Group 
plc, Finance Director of Kunick Leisure 
Limited and held a number of senior 
roles in Magnet Limited.

David is a member of the Chartered 
Institute of Management Accountants.

36

Clipper Logistics plc 

Stephen Robertson
Senior Independent 
Non-Executive Director
Stephen joined the Group as Non-
Executive Director in 2014, and became 
Clipper’s Senior Independent Non-
Executive Director in March 2019. 
He has many years of experience in 
the retail industry and held executive 
positions at Kingfisher plc, WH Smith 
plc and Woolworths Group plc. 
He was previously Director General 
of the British Retail Consortium and is 
currently chairman of Retail Economics. 
His current non-executive directorships 
include Timpson Group plc and 
Hargreaves Lansdown plc.

Stephen is a member of the Nomination 
Committee, Remuneration Committee 
and Audit Committee.

Mike Russell
Independent  
Non-Executive Director
Mike Russell was appointed Non-
Executive Director of Clipper’s former 
parent company in 2011, and was 
appointed Non-Executive Director 
of the Company in 2014. He is a 
Chartered Certified Accountant and 
has held senior finance positions 
within Allied Lyons plc and Asda 
Stores Limited.

He was appointed Group Finance 
Director of Nurdin & Peacock plc, a 
FTSE 250 company. From 1997 to 2011, 
he was an executive director of Prize 
Food Group, initially as Group Finance 
Director and, from 2005, as Chief 
Executive Officer.

Mike is chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee and is a member of the 
Nomination Committee and the 
Audit Committee.

Stuart Watson
Independent  
Non-Executive Director
Stuart Watson joined the Group as  
Non-Executive Director in March 2019.

Stuart is a Chartered Accountant and 
was a partner with Ernst & Young from 
1998 until retiring from the partnership 
in 2017. Stuart was an audit partner 
working mainly with listed and private 
equity backed companies and was 
the Senior Partner for Yorkshire and 
the North East. He is also a member 
of the Council of the University of 
Bradford and of the University’s 
Audit Committee.

Stuart is chairman of the Audit 
Committee and is a member of 
the Nomination Committee and 
the Remuneration Committee.

Annual Report and Accounts 2019

37

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report/ Governance

Corporate Governance Report

The Board recognises, 
understands and is 
committed to high 
standards of corporate 
governance across  
the Group.

Steve Parkin 
Executive Chairman

Chairman’s introduction
Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to present the 
Company’s Corporate Governance 
Report for the year ended 30 April 2019. 
The Board recognises, understands 
and is committed to the high standards 
of corporate governance across the 
Group that are expected of all premium 
listed companies. During the year, the 
Company followed an approach which 
largely complied with the provisions of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 
2016 (the “Code”). The report which 
follows describes how the Company 
has applied the Main Principles of the 
Code during the year to 30 April 2019.

Compliance with the Code
The Board recognises the importance 
of high standards of corporate 
governance and is committed to 
managing the Group’s operations 
in accordance with the Code. A full 
version of the Code can be found 
on the Financial Reporting Council’s 
website www.frc.org.uk. The Company 
complied with the provisions of the Code 
throughout the year ended 30 April 2019, 
except for provisions A4.2 and E.1.1. For a 
period of four months the Company did 
not comply with provision A4.1.

In July 2018 the Financial Reporting 
Council published a revised 2018 
Corporate Governance Code (“2018 
Code”) which will apply to premium 
listed companies in respect of 
accounting periods commencing on 
or after 1 January 2019. This will apply 
to the Company in the financial year 
ending 30 April 2020.

This Report, which incorporates reports 
from the Nomination and Audit 
Committees on pages 42 to 45 together 
with the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 
35, the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
on pages 46 to 57 and the Directors’ 
Report on pages 58 to 61, describes how 
the Company has applied the Main 
Principles of the Code.

The role of the Board
During the year the Board consisted of 
three Executive Directors and three Non-
Executive Directors (except for the period 
7 November 2018 to 26 March 2019 where 
there were two Non-Executive Directors). 
Ron Series (Senior Independent Director) 
stepped down from the Board with effect 
from 7 November 2018. On 7 March 2019 
Stephen Robertson (an existing Non-
Executive Director of the Company) 
was appointed as Senior Independent 
Director in his place. On 26 March 2019 
Stuart Watson was appointed as a Non-
Executive Director.

Biographies and profiles of the current 
members of the Board appear on 
pages 36 and 37.

The Board is responsible for leading 
and controlling the Group and has 
overall authority for the management 
and conduct of the Group’s business, 
strategy and development. The Board 
is also responsible for ensuring the 
maintenance of a sound system of 
internal control and risk management 
(including financial, operational and 
compliance controls and for reviewing 
the overall effectiveness of systems in 
place) and for the approval of any 
changes to the capital, corporate and/
or management structure of the Group.

The Code indicates at A.4.2 that the 
chairman should hold meetings with 
non-executive directors without the 
executive directors present. Since Steve 
Parkin as Executive Chairman also has an 
executive function, he has not met with 
the Non-Executive Directors as a group 
without the other Executive Directors 
present, but the Senior Independent 
Director has done so. The Chairman 
has met with individual Non-Executive 
Directors on a one-to-one basis from 
time to time, at which meetings Board 
performance and other appropriate 
matters were discussed. The Chairman 
has also discussed the Board evaluation 
review with the Senior Independent 
Director without the other Executive 
Directors present.

The Board delegates to management the 
day-to-day running of the business within 
defined risk parameters. Board meetings 
are scheduled to coincide with key 
events in the corporate calendar and this 
includes the interim and final results and 
Annual General Meeting (“AGM”).

The Board has adopted a formal 
schedule of matters reserved for 
its approval and has delegated 
other specific responsibilities to its 
committees. The standing Board 
agenda includes regular reports 
from the Chief Executive Officer and 
the Chief Financial Officer on the 
operational and financial performance 
of the Group, together with feedback 
from the Non-Executive Directors on 
their engagement with the business. 
It includes a rolling agenda of reports 
from the Nomination Committee, 
the Audit Committee and the 
Remuneration Committee together 

38

Clipper Logistics plc with various other key operational, 
strategic, governance and risk topics. 
The latter are regularly updated to 
ensure the Board is responsive to 

the operational and strategic issues 
affecting the business, and a Strategy 
Day was held for the Board to review 
the Group’s strategy and market 

position. The Board does not delegate 
key strategic, operational and financial 
issues or other matters specifically 
reserved to the Board.

The following matters (amongst others) were considered or dealt with at Board meetings during the year:

Strategy and management

Financial and contracts

Governance

/  approval and consideration of 
strategic initiatives and plans, 
including potential acquisitions;
/  Brexit and its continued impact;
/  automation and its role in the 

business;

/  learning and development;
/  European strategy review;
/  growth strategy;
/  health and safety record;
/  workforce engagement and 

methods of feedback to the Board in 
readiness for the 2018 Code coming 
into force;

/  approval of Senior Management 

Team (“SMT”) restructuring;

/  brand health; and
/  integration of new subsidiaries.

/  review of the performance and 

management of certain contracts;

/  Black Friday performance;
/  financial review;
/  review and approval of mid-year 

financial re-forecast;

/  approval of capital projects and 
contracts of material importance;

/  approval of project to migrate IT 

hardware and network infrastructure 
to a third party managed data 
centre;

/  implementation of independent IT 
and cyber integrity reviews and 
consideration of reports; and

/  review of insurance cover including 

cyber cover.

/  full risk review;
/  legal and governance updates, 
including forthcoming changes 
under the 2018 Code and 
forthcoming reporting obligations 
under The Companies 
(Miscellaneous) Reporting 
Regulations 2018, which apply to the 
Group from the financial year 
commencing 1 May 2019;

/  Board and committee evaluation;
/  update training on The Market Abuse 

Regulation and directors’ duties;
/  implementation and monitoring of 

actions recommended by an 
independent review of the 
Company’s corporate governance 
practices; and

/  external audit and review of agency 

providers and terms.

All Directors have access to the 
advice and services of the Company 
Secretary who has responsibility for 
ensuring compliance with the Board’s 
procedures. All Directors have the right 
to have their opposition to or concerns 
over any Board decision noted in 
the minutes. The Board has adopted 
guidelines by which Directors may 
take independent professional advice 

at the Company’s expense in the 
performance of their duties.

The Board has a full programme of 
Board meetings planned for the 
financial year ending 30 April 2020. 
At these meetings, the Board will review 
the Group’s long-term strategic direction 
and financial plans and monitor on a 
regular basis the Group’s performance 
against an agreed business plan. 

The Board will also continue to take 
action to ensure compliance with the 
new requirements under the 2018 Code 
and The Companies (Miscellaneous) 
Reporting Regulations 2018.

In addition, the Board will agree key 
objectives for the Group on an annual 
basis and will monitor performance 
against these objectives.

Meetings and attendance
In the year under review, the Board held eight meetings and various Board committee meetings were also held with 
attendance as follows:

Director

Role

Steve Parkin

Executive Chairman

Tony Mannix

Chief Executive Officer

David Hodkin

Chief Financial Officer

Stephen Robertson1 Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

Mike Russell

Independent Non-Executive Director

Stuart Watson2

Independent Non-Executive Director

Ron Series3

Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

1.  Became a member of the Nomination Committee in November 2018
2.  Appointed 26 March 2019
3.  Resigned 7 November 2018

Board  

meetings

Audit 
Committee 
meetings

Remuneration 
Committee 
meetings

Nomination 
Committee 
meetings

8/8

8/8

8/8

8/8

8/8

1/1

2/2

3/3

3/3

1/1

1/1

3/3

3/3

1/1

2/2

5/5

4/4

5/5

1/1

1/1

39

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Corporate Governance Report continued

The Chairman is responsible for 
ensuring that the Directors receive 
accurate, timely and clear information. 
Prior to each scheduled Board 
meeting, a Board pack is circulated. 
This Board pack includes an update 
on key performance targets, trading 
performance against budget and 
detailed financial data and analysis.

Board packs are distributed in sufficient 
time for Directors to review their papers 
in advance. If Directors are unable to 
attend a Board meeting for any reason, 
they nonetheless receive the relevant 
papers and are consulted prior to the 
meeting and their views made known 
to the other Directors.

Conflicts of interest
In line with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006, each Director 
has notified the Board of any situation 
in which he has, or could have, a 
direct or indirect interest that conflicts, 
or may conflict, with the interests of 
the Company (a situational conflict). 
These were considered and approved 
by the Board in accordance with the 
Company’s Articles of Association 
(the “Articles”) and each Director 
informed of any relevant authorisation 
and the terms on which it was given. 
In furtherance of this obligation, each 
Director has notified the Board of all 
his business interests and those of his 
connected persons. The Register of 
Directors’ Interests is updated annually 
and as otherwise required. The Board 
has formal procedures to deal with 
Directors’ conflicts of interest.

The Board reviews and, where 
appropriate, approves certain 
situational conflicts of interest reported 
to it by Directors, and a register of 
such situational conflicts is maintained 
and will be reviewed by the Board 
going forward.

During the year, the Company’s then 
Senior Independent Director Ron Series 
stepped down from the Board due to a 
conflict arising in relation to certain new 
contracts and business developments 
within the Group.

Board committees
Subject to those matters reserved for 
its decision, the Board has delegated 
to its Nomination, Audit, Remuneration 
and Executive Committees certain 
authorities. There are written terms 
of reference for each of these 
Committees available on request 
from the Company Secretary. 
Separate reports for each of the 
Nomination, Audit and Remuneration 

40

Committees are included in this  
Annual Report and Accounts from 
pages 42 to 57.

Role of the executive chairman  
and chief executive
The Board is chaired by Steve 
Parkin who is Executive Chairman. 
The Executive Chairman is responsible 
for the leadership and overall 
effectiveness of the Board and setting 
the Board’s agenda, having regard 
to the interests of all stakeholders and 
promoting high standards of corporate 
governance. Tony Mannix is the Chief 
Executive Officer and is responsible for 
implementing the Board’s strategy and 
leading the SMT. The role is distinct and 
separate to that of Executive Chairman 
and clear divisions of accountability 
and responsibility have been agreed 
by the Board.

Role of the senior  
independent director
The Code indicates (at A.4.1) that 
the board of directors of a company 
with a premium listing on the Official 
List should appoint one of the non-
executive directors to be the senior 
independent director to provide a 
sounding board for the chairman and 
to serve as an intermediary for the other 
directors when necessary. The senior 
independent director should be 
available to shareholders if they have 
concerns which contact through the 
normal channels of the chairman, chief 
executive officer or other executive 
directors has failed to resolve or for 
which such contact is inappropriate.

Ron Series served as Senior 
Independent Director until November 
2018, when he stepped down from 
the Board as a result of a conflict 
arising in relation to certain new 
contracts and business developments. 
The Nomination Committee 
commenced a process to recruit a 
replacement Senior Independent 
Director, and in March 2019 Stephen 
Robertson (an existing Independent 
Non-Executive Director) was appointed 
to the role of Senior Independent 
Director. As a result of this sequence 
of events, there was a period of four 
months when the Company did 
not comply with provision A.4.1 of 
the Code.

The Code indicates (at E.1.1) that the 
senior independent director should 
attend meetings with a range of 
major shareholders to listen to their 
views in order to help develop a 
balanced understanding of their 
issues and concerns. Whilst the Senior 
Independent Director (and the other 

Non-Executive Directors) are available 
to meet with shareholders to discuss 
issues and concerns, no such meetings 
have been requested by shareholders.

Notwithstanding this, we have 
maintained dialogue with our major 
shareholders and, overall, the Board 
believes that appropriate steps have 
been taken throughout the year to 
ensure that members of the Board, 
including the Non-Executive Directors, 
develop an understanding of the views 
of major shareholders. These steps 
include attending the AGM, receiving 
feedback on other shareholder 
meetings and analysts’ and brokers’ 
briefings on a regular basis.

Board balance and independence
The Code recommends that at least 
half the board of directors of UK listed 
companies, excluding the chairman, 
should comprise non-executive 
directors determined by the board 
to be independent in character and 
judgment and free from relationships  
or circumstances which may affect,  
or could appear to affect, the  
directors’ judgment.

The Board regards all of the Non-
Executive Directors as Independent 
Non-Executive Directors within the 
meaning of the Code and free from 
any business or other relationship 
that could materially interfere with 
the exercise of their independent 
judgment. The Board believes that the 
current directorate supports its ability  
to develop the Group’s operations.

Role of the company secretary
Marianne Hodgkiss is the Company 
Secretary. The role of the Company 
Secretary, under the direction of the 
Executive Chairman, is to develop, 
implement and maintain good 
corporate governance practices. 
This includes supporting the Executive 
Chairman and Non-Executive 
Directors as appropriate, managing 
Board and Nomination Committee 
meetings, ensuring that appropriate 
levels of directors’ and officers’ 
insurance is in place and that the 
Group is compliant with statutory and 
regulatory requirements.

Development
There has been one appointment 
to the Board since the last AGM: 
Stuart Watson as Independent Non-
Executive Director. The Group has an 
induction and training process for 
new directors. New directors receive a 
detailed induction on joining the Board, 
including meeting other members of 

Clipper Logistics plc the Board and the SMT. New directors 
are encouraged to visit the Group’s 
sites and to provide feedback to the 
Board. The Group’s Company Secretary 
periodically reports to the Board on any 
new legal, regulatory and governance 
developments that affect the Group 
and, where necessary, actions are 
agreed. External lawyers have provided 
updated training to the Directors and 
SMT on insider dealing and The Market 
Abuse Regulation, and have also 
provided training on the 2018 Code 
and The Companies (Miscellaneous) 
Reporting Regulations 2018 (with a 
specific focus on directors’ duties), 
which will apply to the Group for the 
financial year ending 30 April 2020, as 
well as other regulatory matters. This is 
supplemented by advice and training 
provided, where required, by the 
Company Secretary.

Board evaluation
The Code indicates (at B.6) that the 
board should undertake a formal 
and rigorous annual evaluation of its 
performance. The Board is committed 
to and is fully aligned with the benefits 
to be derived from a regular board 
evaluation which is viewed as a critical 
component of the Board’s agenda 
for continuing improvement of its 
corporate governance.

The effectiveness of the Board 
is essential to the success of the 
Group. During the year an internal 
evaluation process was undertaken. 
The evaluation process was based on 
a series of questions devised for the 
purpose by the Senior Independent 
Director and the Company Secretary 
and circulated to the Directors. 
The process reviewed issues such as: 
the assessment and monitoring of 
the Company’s strategy; the mix of 
knowledge and skills on the Board; 
succession; and the effectiveness 
of the Board and the Directors. 
Separate questionnaires were devised 
for each of the Audit, Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees, and 
circulated to Committee members.

The results were collated by the 
Company Secretary and considered by 
the Senior Independent Director who 
discussed the results with the Executive 
Chairman. The performance of the 
Board as a whole and of each of its 
principal Committees was considered.

The full (anonymised) results of the 
evaluation were shared with the 
Board, and key actions to undertake 
to enhance or maintain performance 
of the Board and Committees have 
been agreed and will be monitored 
throughout the current financial year.

The Board is satisfied that each Director 
remains competent to discharge 
his responsibilities as a member of 
the Board.

Election of directors
The Board can appoint any person to 
be a Director, either to fill a vacancy 
or as an addition to the existing Board 
provided that the total number of 
Directors does not exceed 12, the 
maximum prescribed in the Company’s 
Articles. Any Director so appointed by 
the Board shall hold office only until 
the following AGM and shall then be 
eligible for election by the shareholders.

In accordance with the Articles, at 
every AGM of the Company, one-third 
of the Directors, or the number nearest 
to but not less than one-third, shall retire 
from office. The Directors to retire shall 
be, first, those who wish to retire, and 
then those who have been longest in 
office since their last appointment or 
re-appointment. When a Director retires 
at an AGM in accordance with the 
Articles, the Company may, by ordinary 
resolution at the meeting, fill the office 
being vacated by re-electing the 
retiring Director. If the Company does 
not fill the vacancy at the meeting, 
the retiring Director shall nevertheless 
be deemed to have been re-elected, 
except in the cases identified by 
the Articles.

As recommended by the 2018 Code, 
notwithstanding the Company’s 
articles, the Directors have determined 
that all Directors shall retire from office 
annually at the AGM (with effect from 
the 2019 AGM), and shall be eligible for 
re-appointment at that same AGM.

The Company intends to continue this 
practice but will review it regularly.

At the 2019 AGM Steve Parkin, Tony 
Mannix, David Hodkin, Stephen 
Robertson and Mike Russell will be 
offering themselves for re-election, and 
Stuart Watson will be offering himself 
for election. The 2019 AGM is to be 
held at the Novotel Leeds Centre, 4 
Whitehall, Whitehall Quay, Leeds, LS1 
4HR on 21 October 2019 at 11.00am, 
full details of which will be issued under 
separate cover.

External appointments and 
time commitment
The Executive Directors may accept 
outside appointments provided that 
such appointments do not in any 
way prejudice their ability to perform 
their duties as Executive Directors of 
the Company.

Stephen Robertson and Mike Russell 
(Non-Executive Directors) were 
re-appointed for new three year 
terms commencing on 1 May 2017. 
Stuart Watson (Non-Executive Director) 
was appointed for a three year term 
commencing 26 March 2019.

Appointment letters are not specific 
about the maximum time commitment, 
recognising that there is always 
the possibility of an additional time 
commitment and ad hoc matters that 
may arise from time to time, particularly 
when the Group is undergoing a period 
of increased activity. The average time 
commitment inevitably increases where 
a Non-Executive Director assumes 
additional responsibilities such as being 
appointed to a Board Committee or as 
a Non-Executive Director on the boards 
of any of the Company’s subsidiaries.

Communication with shareholders
The Board considers effective 
communication with its investors, 
whether institutional, private or 
employee shareholders, to be 
extremely important and we have 
set ourselves the target of providing 
information that is timely, clear 
and concise.

During the year to 30 April 2019, the 
Company met regularly with analysts 
and institutional investors and such 
meetings will continue. The Executive 
Chairman, Chief Executive Officer 
and Chief Financial Officer have 
responsibility for investor relations and 
they meet institutional investors regularly 
to provide an opportunity to discuss, 
in the context of publicly available 
information, the progress of the Group. 
They are supported by members of 
the SMT, where required, and the 
Company’s retained financial PR 
advisors, Buchanan, and joint corporate 
brokers, Numis Securities and Berenberg, 
who, amongst other matters, assist in 
organising presentations for analysts 
and institutional investors and ensure 
that procedures are in place to keep 
the Board regularly informed of such 
investors’ views. Reports from analysts 
and brokers are circulated to the Board.

The formal reporting of our full and 
half year results will be a combination 
of presentations, group calls and 
one-to-one meetings in a variety of 
locations where we have institutional 
shareholders. All the Non-Executive 
Directors and the Executive Chairman 
are available to meet with major 
shareholders if they wish to raise issues 
separately from the arrangements 
as described above. The Company’s 
investor website is regularly updated 
with news and information, including 
this Annual Report and Accounts, 
which sets out our strategy and 
performance together with our plans 
for growth.

41

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Nomination Committee Report

I am pleased to 
present the report 
of the Nomination 
Committee for the year 
ended 30 April 2019.

Steve Parkin 
Chairman, Nomination Committee

Committee Chairman’s introduction
The Nomination Committee (the 
“Committee”) is a key committee 
of the Board whose role is to keep the 
composition and structure of the Board 
and its committees under review.

The Committee’s role also includes 
enhancing the quality of nominees 
to the Board and ensuring that the 
recruitment and appointment process 
is conducted with rigour and integrity.

The Committee is proactive in 
discharging its responsibilities, cognisant 
of the importance of succession 
planning and the need to align Board 
and executive leadership skills to the 
Company’s long-term strategy. I hope 
this report gives you a helpful insight into 
how the Committee intends to carry out 
its responsibilities in the year ahead.

Composition
The Code recommends that a 
majority of the members of a 
nomination committee should be 
independent non-executive directors. 
The Nomination Committee is chaired 
by Steve Parkin and its other members 
are Stephen Robertson, Mike Russell 
and Stuart Watson.

Roles and responsibilities
It is intended that the Committee will 
meet as often as required but not less 
than once a year to assist the Board in 
discharging its responsibilities relating to 
the composition and make-up of the 
Board and any committees of the Board.

It is also responsible for periodically 
reviewing the Board’s structure and 
identifying potential candidates to be 
appointed as directors or committee 
members as the need may arise. 

42

The Committee is responsible 
for evaluating and making 
recommendations to the Board on: 
the balance of skills, knowledge and 
experience and the size, structure 
and composition of the Board and 
committees of the Board, and 
retirements and appointments of 
additional and replacement directors 
and committee members.

Diversity
Whilst the Group pursues diversity, 
including gender diversity, throughout 
the business, and the Board endorses 
the aspirations of the Davies Review 
on Women on Boards, the Board 
is not committing to any specific 
targets. Instead, the Board will engage 
executive search firms which have 
signed up to the voluntary code of 
conduct setting out the seven key 
principles of best practice to abide 
by throughout the recruitment process 
and will continue to follow a policy of 
appointing talented people at every 
level to deliver high performance. It is 
Group policy to make all appointments 
based on the best candidate for the 
role regardless of gender or other 
diversity. The Board will also ensure 
that its own development in this area 
is consistent with its strategic objectives 
and enhances Board effectiveness.

Activities of the Nomination 
Committee in the year ended  
30 April 2019
The Committee met five times during 
the financial year and considered, inter 
alia, the following matters:

/  the splitting of the Company 

Secretary and Group Legal Counsel 
role, to increase the capacity for 
ensuring high standards of 
corporate governance;

/  succession planning for the 

executive director roles;

/  the replacement of the Senior 

Independent Director and recruitment 
of a third non-executive director, 
following the departure of Ron Series;

/  the size and composition of the 

Board, with regard to the changes 
under the 2018 Code which mean 
that the requirement for at least half 
of the Board to be independent 
non-executive directors will apply 
to all companies, not just FTSE 350;

/  the restructure of the SMT;
/  a review of job descriptions for all 

Board roles and certain SMT roles in 
light of the above restructure;

/  the Board Evaluation process; and
/  changes to Committee memberships 

and chairmanships.

With effect from 7 November 2018 
Ron Series stepped down as Senior 
Independent Non-Executive Director. 
He was replaced by Stephen Robertson 
(formerly an Independent Non-Executive 
Director) with effect from 7 March 2019.

With effect from November 2018, 
Stephen Robertson became a member 
of the Nomination Committee.

With effect from 7 March 2019, Mike 
Russell, Independent Non-Executive 
Director, took over from Stephen 
Robertson as chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee.

On 26 March 2019, Stuart Watson 
was appointed Independent Non-
Executive Director, and took over 
from Mike Russell as chairman of the 
Audit Committee.

Clipper Logistics plc Audit Committee Report

In this report, I explain 
how the Committee 
has discharged its 
responsibilities to 
protect shareholders.

Stuart Watson
Chairman, Audit Committee

Committee Chairman’s introduction
In the year under review, Mike Russell 
chaired the Audit Committee (the 
“Committee”) until my appointment 
on 26 March 2019. He and Stephen 
Robertson have served on the 
Committee throughout the year 
under review. Ron Series served on 
the Committee until his resignation on 
7 November 2018. Under its terms of 
reference, the Committee is required to 
meet at least three times in each year 
at appropriate times in the reporting 
and auditing cycle. The requirement 
to hold three meetings was originally 
proposed in order to address three 
formal matters:

(i) to review and approve the auditor’s 
proposed audit approach; (ii) to 
consider the half year report; and (iii) to 
consider any findings from the year end 
audit. In the year ended 30 April 2019, 
the Committee met three times.

The primary function of the Committee 
is to assist the Board in fulfilling its 
responsibilities to protect the interests of 
shareholders with regard to the integrity 
of the financial reporting, audit, risk 
management and internal controls.

In this report, I explain how the 
Committee has discharged these 
responsibilities, with specific reference 
to the requirement of the Code, to 
address significant financial statement 
reporting issues and to explain how the 
Committee assessed external audit 
effectiveness and safeguards in relation 
to the provision by the auditor of non-
audit services.

Composition
The Code recommends that an 
audit committee should comprise 
at least three, or in the case of smaller 
companies, two independent non-
executive directors (other than the 
chairman) and that at least one 
member should have recent and 
relevant financial experience. Clipper’s 
Audit Committee is chaired by Stuart 
Watson and its other members are 
Mike Russell and Stephen Robertson. 
By virtue of their former executive 
roles, the Directors consider that 
Stuart Watson and Mike Russell 
have recent and relevant financial 
experience. The Company is therefore 
compliant with the Code in this regard. 
Other Directors or senior financial 
management attend meetings of the 
Committee by invitation.

Roles and responsibilities
The Committee assists the Board 
in discharging its responsibilities 
with regard to:

/  agreeing the scope of the annual 
audit and the annual audit plan 
and monitoring the same;

/  monitoring, making judgments and 
recommendations on the financial 
reporting process and the integrity 
and clarity of the Group Financial 
Statements;

/  considering the appointment of the 

Group’s auditor and its remuneration, 
including reviewing and monitoring 
independence and objectivity and 
agreeing and monitoring the extent 
of the non-audit work that may be 
undertaken; and

/  reviewing and monitoring the 
adequacy and effectiveness 
of the internal control and risk 
management policies.

The Committee gives due consideration 
to laws and regulations, the provisions 
of the Code and the requirements of 
the Listing Rules.

The ultimate responsibility for reviewing 
and approving the Annual Report and 
Accounts and the half year reports 
remains with the Board.

The Board has requested that the 
Committee advise them in ensuring 
that the Financial Statements, when 
taken as a whole, are fair, balanced 
and understandable and provide the 
information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model 
and strategy.

Activities during the year ended 
30 April 2019
During the year, the Committee met 
three times. A summary of the main 
areas dealt with by the Committee is 
set out below:

/  review and approval for 

consideration by the Board of the 
financial results for the year ended 
30 April 2018;

/  findings from the external audit for 

the year ended 30 April 2018;

/  approval of the auditor’s 

remuneration in respect of the year 
ended 30 April 2018;

/  discussion around the Code on risk 

management, internal control, 
viability and going concern;

/  auditor’s confirmation of 

independence;

/  review of auditor’s effectiveness; and
/  discussion with the external auditor 

over the audit planning, with 
particular reference to significant 
risks highlighted in the planning 
documents, together with the audit 
scope and timetable.

43

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Audit Committee Report continued

Since the year end, the Committee 
has reviewed and approved for 
consideration by the Board this Annual 
Report and reviewed the findings from 
the external audit for the year ended 
30 April 2019.

As part of their review process, the 
members of the Committee are 
provided with a draft of the full Annual 
Report and Accounts, enabling them 
to ensure that the figures are consistent 
with those in the Financial Statements 
or are sourced from appropriate 
data. As important, the Committee 
assesses whether the words used are 
consistent with its understanding of 
the Group’s business obtained through 
Board and Committee meetings 
and other interaction it has had with 
management, using its experience 
to assess whether the Annual Report 
taken as a whole is fair, balanced and 
understandable. This additional review 
by the Committee, supplemented by 
advice from external advisors during 
the drafting process, assists the Board 
in determining that the report is fair, 
balanced and understandable at the 
time that it is approved. The Committee 
considers the appropriateness of 
preparing the Financial Statements 
on a going concern basis, including 
consideration of forecast plans and 
supporting assumptions.

Significant issues considered in 
relation to the Financial Statements 
The Committee, together with the 
Board, considered what the significant 
risks and issues in relation to the 
Financial Statements were and how 
these would be addressed. The most 
significant risks identified are set 
out below:

Revenue recognition
/  The Group has a multiplicity of 

complex contract mechanisms. 
As a result, there could be a risk 
of misstatement of revenue.

/  To mitigate this risk, the revenue 

recognition methodology adopted is 
kept under regular review to ensure 
that it remains appropriate.

/  In the current year, on adoption of 

IFRS 15, a detailed review of revenue 
contracts has been undertaken and 
accounting policies updated. For 
more information see page 78. 

44

Management override of controls
/  Management are in a unique 

position and could override controls 
that otherwise operate effectively.

/  To mitigate this risk, the Board is 

made aware of any non-recurring 
material transactions.

Related party transactions
/  There is a risk that not all related 

party transactions are appropriately 
identified, accounted for and 
disclosed in the Financial Statements. 
Related party relationships may 
present a greater opportunity for 
management to override controls 
that otherwise operate effectively.
/  To mitigate these risks, during the 
year the Board has implemented 
new controls and procedures around 
related party transactions, which 
were recommended as part of  
a wider independent review of  
the Company’s corporate 
governance practices.

Accounting for a business 
combination
/  During the year the Company 
entered into contracts that 
constituted a business combination; 
i.e. with the three elements of a 
business as defined in IFRS 3: inputs 
and processes that have the ability 
to create outputs.

/  Under International Financial 

Reporting Standards, the Group is 
required to assess the fair value of 
assets and liabilities acquired and 
liabilities assumed and specifically  
to identify any intangible assets.
/  The Committee offered insight into 

the timing of when the Group 
effectively took control following  
the business combination and, 
ultimately, agreed the it should be 
accounted for in the year ending 
30 April 2020.

External auditor
The Committee oversees the 
relationship with the external auditor 
and considers the re-appointment of 
the Group’s auditor, before making a 
recommendation to the Board to be 
put to shareholders.

The Committee conducted a review 
of the external auditor’s performance 
and ongoing independence 
taking into consideration input 
from management, responses to 
questions from the Committee and 
the audit findings reported to the 
Committee. Based on this information, 
the Committee concluded that 
the external audit process had 
been efficiently run and that KPMG 
LLP proved effective in its role as 

external auditor. In accordance 
with best practice and professional 
standards, the external auditor is 
required to adhere to a rotation policy 
whereby the audit engagement 
partner is rotated after five years. 
The current audit engagement 
partner has now served for four years. 
The external auditor is also required 
periodically to assess whether, in its 
professional opinion, it is independent 
and those views are shared with 
the Committee.

The Committee has authority to take 
independent advice as it deems 
appropriate in order to resolve issues on 
auditor independence. No such advice 
has, to date, been required.

As required, the external auditor 
provided the Committee with 
information for review about policies 
and procedures for maintaining its 
independence and compliance 
regarding the rotation of audit partners 
and staff. Separate external firms 
are engaged for taxation advisory 
services. The Committee is satisfied 
that the independence of KPMG LLP 
is not impaired.

Furthermore, KPMG LLP has provided 
an independence report to the 
Committee, in which it has confirmed 
that it is independent, that its objectivity 
is not compromised, and that it has 
complied with the Auditing Practices 
Board’s ethical standards (including 
in relation to the supply of non-
audit services).

KPMG LLP received £nil in respect of 
non-audit work for the Group in the 
year ended 30 April 2019 (2018: £nil).

The Company intends to hold a tender 
for audit services in 2019 ahead of the 
half year results. 

Internal audit
The Board has considered the benefits 
that an internal audit function might 
bring to the Group. It has concluded 
that, due to the nature of those control 
weaknesses identified by the external 
auditor, tight financial controls in 
place across the Group and the close 
management of financial matters by 
the Executive Directors, an internal 
audit function would not currently 
provide additional assurance.

In terms of operational matters, the 
specialised nature of the Group’s 
activities means that a non-specialist 
internal audit function would not 
provide additional comfort over the 
Group’s operational management. 
The Board will continue to evaluate 

Clipper Logistics plc this matter, and the Committee will 
formally consider the issue annually, in 
accordance with Code provision C.3.2.

Internal control and 
risk management
The Board is responsible for the overall 
system of internal controls for the Group 
and for reviewing its effectiveness.

It carries out such a review at least 
annually, covering all material controls 
including financial, operational 
and compliance controls and risk 
management systems.

The system of internal controls is 
designed to manage, rather than 
eliminate, the risk of failure to 
achieve business objectives and 
can only provide reasonable and 
not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement or loss.

Operating policies and controls are 
in place and have been in place 
throughout the financial year under 
review, and cover a wide range of 
issues including financial reporting, 
capital expenditure, IT, business 
continuity and management 
of employees.

Detailed policies ensure the accuracy 
and reliability of financial reporting 
and the preparation of the Financial 
Statements, including the consolidation 
process. The key elements of the 
Group’s ongoing processes for the 
provision of effective internal control 
and risk management systems, in place 
throughout the year and at the date of 
this report, include:

/  regular Board meetings to consider 
matters reserved for the Directors’ 
consideration;

/  regular management reporting, 

providing a balanced assessment 
of key risks and controls;

/  an annual Board review of corporate 

strategy, including a review of 
material business risks and 
uncertainties facing the business;
/  established organisational structure 

with clearly defined lines of 
responsibility and levels of authority;

/  documented policies and 

procedures; and

/  regular review by the Board of 
financial budgets, forecasts  
and covenants.

In reviewing the effectiveness of 
the system of internal controls, the 
Committee receives self-assurance 
statements from the members of 
the SMT, who are responsible for the 
principal business units, confirming 
that controls and risk management 
processes in their business units 
have been operated satisfactorily. 
These returns are reviewed by 
the Committee and challenged 
where appropriate.

Whistleblowing
The Group has a Whistleblowing 
Policy which encourages employees 
to report any malpractice or illegal 
acts or omissions or matters of similar 
concern by other employees or former 
employees, contractors, suppliers or 
advisors using a prescribed reporting 
procedure. The Whistleblowing Policy 
is complemented by an Anti-bribery 
and Corruption Policy, and a Gifts and 
Entertainment Policy.

The Deputy Chief Financial Officer 
is responsible for compiling and 
maintaining a risk register to monitor 
all of the risks facing the business.

These policies facilitate the reporting of 
any ethical wrongdoing or malpractice, 
or suspicion which may constitute 
ethical wrongdoing or malpractice.

Examples include bribery, corruption, 
fraud, dishonesty and illegal practices 
which may endanger employees or 
third parties.

There have been no instances of 
whistleblowing during the year under 
review and we are not aware of any 
instances of non-compliance with our 
Anti-bribery and Corruption Policy or 
our Gifts and Entertainment Policy.

Accountability
The Board is required to present a 
fair, balanced and understandable 
assessment of the Company and 
Group’s financial position, performance, 
business model and strategy. The Board, 
with the advice of the Committee, is 
satisfied that this has been achieved.

The responsibilities of the Directors and 
external auditor are set out on pages 62 
and 68 respectively.

The key risks are summarised for 
review and approval by the Committee 
for inclusion in the Annual Report. 
In addition, the Committee reviews 
the financial and accounting controls.

In respect of the Group’s financial 
reporting, the finance department is 
responsible for preparing the Group 
Financial Statements using a well-
established consolidation process 
and ensuring that accounting 
policies are in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting 
Standards. All financial information 
published by the Group is subject to 
the approval of the Committee.

There have been no changes in the 
Group’s internal controls during the 
financial year under review that have 
materially affected, or are reasonably 
likely to materially affect, the Group’s 
control over financial reporting.

The Board, with advice from the 
Committee, is satisfied that effective 
systems for internal control and risk 
management are in place which 
enable the Group to identify, evaluate 
and manage key risks, and which 
accord with the guidance of the 
Turnbull Committee on internal control 
updated by the Financial Reporting 
Council in 2005. These processes have 
been in place throughout the financial 
year and up to the date of approval of 
the Financial Statements. Further details 
of risk management frameworks and 
specific material risks and uncertainties 
facing the business can be found on 
pages 20 to 23.

45

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Remuneration Report

The Committee hopes it 
can rely on the support 
of shareholders to 
approve our Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

Mike Russell
Chairman, Remuneration Committee

Committee Chairman’s introduction
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased 
to present the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report for the year ended 30 April 2019.

As was announced earlier this year, 
from 7 March 2019 Stephen Robertson 
became our Senior Independent 
Director and I became the Chairman 
of the Remuneration Committee (the 
“Committee”) again. I would like to 
thank Stephen for his work in the role of 
Committee Chairman from August 2017. 
We are pleased that Stuart Watson 
has joined the Committee following 
his appointment to the Board on 
26 March 2019.

Also, I would like to thank our 
shareholders for the continued support 
which they showed for the Committee 
at our 2018 AGM when our Directors’ 
Remuneration Report was approved 
by 100% of shareholders’ voting.

Pay for performance in the year 
ended 30 April 2019
Reported EBIT fell by 3.1% to £20.0 million 
in the financial year ended 30 April 
2019. Consequently, the threshold level 
of target for our Annual Incentive Plan 
(“AIP”) was not considered achieved by 
the Committee. Accordingly, no annual  
bonuses will be paid to our Executive 
Directors in respect of the year ended 
30 April 2019.

During the year, the Committee 
determined that it would not be 
appropriate for the January 2016 
Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) awards 
to vest. In deciding this, the Committee 
exercised judgment having considered 
the performance of the business in the 
performance period for the PSP, and 
also the shareholder experience in 
2018. This resulted in a credit within the 
income statement.

With regard to our January 2017 PSP 
awards (for which the three financial 
year performance period ended on 
April 2019), the minimum performance 
threshold was not achieved and the 
awards will not vest in January 2020.

Remuneration actions for the year 
ending 30 April 2020
Although as noted above we were very 
pleased at the 100% level of support for 
the resolution to approve our Directors’ 
Remuneration Report at the 2018 AGM, 
we were disappointed to receive 
an almost 25% ‘vote against’ result 
on the resolution at our 2018 AGM to 
disapply Rule 9 of the Takeover Code 
which allows our “Concert Party” (the 
Executive Chairman, Chief Financial 
Officer and the Group General 
Counsel) to participate in our annual 
share plans. Since the Initial Public 
Offering (“IPO”), we have proposed this 
resolution as an annual matter, and 
only our independent shareholders 
vote on this resolution (the votes of the 
Concert Party are excluded).

In the year ending 30 April 2020 it is 
proposed not to make any new PSP 
awards. This reflects:

/  The concerns raised by a number 
of our independent shareholders 
as noted above;

/  An appreciation of the wider 

shareholder experience during the 
financial year ended 30 April 2019; 
and

/  Our obligation to review our Directors’ 
remuneration policy during the year 
ending 30 April 2020 ahead of its 
three-yearly renewal at our 2020 
AGM. This review will also include 
consideration of the matters relating 
to Executive Directors’ remuneration 
included within the 2018 Code, 
although the Committee has already 
determined that any newly appointed 
executive director will now be offered 
the same level of pension 
contribution available to the majority 
of UK staff.

2019 AGM
At our 2019 AGM there will be the 
normal annual resolution to approve 
our Directors’ Remuneration Report. 
The Committee hopes that you will 
continue to support our approach on 
remuneration matters and hopes that it 
can rely on the support of shareholders 
for the resolution to approve our 
Directors’ Remuneration Report at 
the 2019 AGM.

46

Clipper Logistics plc This report contains the material required to be set out as the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the purposes of Part 4 of the 
Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013, which amended 
the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (the “DRR regulations”).

The auditor has reported on certain parts of the Directors’ Remuneration Report and stated whether, in its opinion, those parts 
have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006. Those parts of the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
which have been subject to audit are clearly indicated.

Part A: Implementation Report on Remuneration
Audited information
Single figure table

Salary 
year ended 
30 April

Benefits1 
year ended 
30 April

Annual bonus2 
year ended 
30 April

Long-term
incentives3, 4
year ended 
30 April

Pension 
contributions 
year ended 
30 April

Total 
year ended 
30 April

£’000

Steve Parkin

Tony Mannix5

David Hodkin5

2019

411 

282

222

2018

411

260

206

2019

2018

2019

2018

2019

2018

2019

2018

2019

2018

70

18

2

72

24

2

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

10

28

33

10

29

29

491

328

257

493

313

237

1.  Benefits comprise a car allowance or company car, fuel allowance, private family medical cover and insurance benefits.
2.  Details of the AIP for the financial year ended 30 April 2019 are set out below.
3.  The 2019 values for long-term incentives reflect a nil vesting for PSP awards granted in January 2017 (performance period of financial years ending 
30 April 2017 to 30 April 2019), which are due to vest in January 2020. The performance conditions required Basic EPS, after adjustment, for the year 
ended 30 April 2019 of between 14.7 pence and 18.0 pence, and the minimum level was not achieved.

4.  The 2018 values for long-term incentives have been restated from last year’s Annual Report to reflect the confirmed nil vesting of 2016’s PSP awards on 
14 January 2019. The equivalent value in last year’s Annual Report reflected an initial assumption of full vesting and the average share price for the 
three months ended 30 April 2018 (401.07 pence). The Remuneration Committee determined that it was not appropriate for these awards to vest having 
considered business performance and shareholder experience in the period to January 2019.

5.  David Hodkin’s and Tony Mannix’s pension entitlement is paid by way of an additional allowance, taxed as salary. No Director participated in a defined 

benefit pension.

AIP outcomes for the year ended 30 April 2019
Performance for the AIP was measured against EBIT1 for the year ended 30 April 2019.

Performance measure

Threshold 
performance 
level for  
2019 AIP

Maximum 
performance 
level for 
2019 AIP

EBIT1 for financial year to 30 April 2019

£22.68m

£25.06m

 Performance 
level attained 
for 2019 AIP

AIP attained  
as a % of  

base salary

Below 
threshold

nil

1.  As adjusted for certain matters in the Committee’s judgment. 

Non-Executive Directors’ fees

£’000

Stephen Robertson

Mike Russell

Stuart Watson2

Ron Series3

Fees year ended 30 April:
 2018

 2019

Benefits1 year ended 30 April:
 2018

 2019

Total year ended 30 April:
2018

 2019

50

48

5

50

48

48

–

65

3

–

–

–

3

–

–

–

53

48

5

50

51

48

–

65

1.  Benefits amounts reported relate to expenses such as travel and accommodation expenditure incurred on Group business. Whilst these payments are 

the reimbursement of expenses and not benefits per se, they are included as being a payment which is subject to tax.

2.  Stuart Watson was appointed to the Board on 26 March 2019.
3.  Ron Series resigned as a Director on 7 November 2018.

Directors’ interests
The interests (all being beneficial) of the Directors in the Company’s ordinary shares are set out below:

Ordinary shares
number1

Steve Parkin

Tony Mannix

David Hodkin

Stephen Robertson

Stuart Watson

Mike Russell

At 29 August
2019

At 30 April
2019

25,140,820

25,140,820

946,786

946,786

1,113,196

1,113,196

9,410

4,000

–

9,410

4,000

–

1.  All shares are wholly owned by Directors or connected persons (i.e. none are subject to performance conditions and none are previously vested but as 

yet unexercised share options).

47

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Share plan interests
Performance Share Plan:

Steve Parkin

Tony Mannix

David Hodkin

Sharesave Plan:

Steve Parkin

Tony Mannix

David Hodkin

Options 
held at  
1 May  
2018

Options 
granted

Options 
lapsed

Options 
exercised

Option 
grant price 
(p)

Options 
held at 
30 April 
2019

Earliest 
exercise 
date

Latest 
exercise 
date

559,670

173,499

135,374

320,961

116,489

256,178

92,009

75,208

60,166

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

nil

597,795 14/01/2018 15/01/2029

362,242 14/01/2018 15/01/2029

288,021 14/01/2018 15/01/2029

Options 
held at 
1 May  
2018

4,740

–

6,130

4,740

4,655

–

Options 
granted

Options 
lapsed

Options 
exercised

Option 
grant price 
(p)

Options 
held at 
30 April 
2019

Earliest 
exercise 
date

Latest 
exercise 
date

–

–

–

–

379.74

4,740 01/04/2021 30/09/2021

193.34
239.34
and 379.74

3,760

7,025 01/04/2021 30/09/2022

–

379.74

4,740 01/04/2021 30/09/2021

1.  The range of market prices of shares in Clipper Logistics plc during the year ended 30 April 2019 was 212 pence to 450 pence. The closing price on 

30 April 2019 was 288 pence.

2.  None of the Directors paid for the award of options.
3.  Options granted in the year under the PSP represent awards with a face value of 100% of base salary for all Executive Directors. This has been 

calculated using the average mid-market price of the three days preceding the date of grant, being 241.67 pence for the options which were granted 
on 16 January 2019.

4.  The threshold level of vesting for the PSP options granted in the year is 25% of the total number of options granted.
5.  Subsequent to the 30 April 2019 year end, the Committee determined that the PSP awards granted in January 2017 (performance period of financial 

years ending 30 April 2017 to 30 April 2019), which were due to vest in January 2020 would not vest. The performance conditions required Basic EPS, after 
adjustment, for the year ended 30 April 2019 of between 14.7 pence and 18.0 pence, and the minimum level was not achieved. As a result, the PSP 
options held at 29 August 2019 were as follows: Steve Parkin: 489,783, Tony Mannix: 302,235, and David Hodkin: 240,016.

6.  The performance conditions attached to the PSP awards granted during the year are set out below.
7.  The exercise price for options under the Sharesave Plan was set at 80% of the three day average market price of shares before invitations to participate 

were made, in accordance with HMRC rules.

8.  The options under the Sharesave Plan were granted under an HMRC tax-advantaged plan and are therefore not subject to performance conditions.
9.  The Sharesave options exercised in the year were granted in February 2016 at an option price of 239.34 pence.

Performance conditions for PSP awards
The performance measures and targets for the PSP awards made in the year ended 30 April 2019 are based on EPS 
performance measured until 30 April 2021, summarised as follows:

EPS – 3 year CAGR to 30 April 2021

16.75%

PSP award

100%

Between 9.2% and 16.75%

Pro-rata between 25% and 100% (straight-line)

9.2%

Less than 9.2%

For these purposes:

25%

0%

1.  EPS will be measured using the adjusted diluted earnings per share of the Company (and subject to such further adjustments as the Committee shall 
determine appropriate). As in past years, the adjustments may include adjustments to ensure that only the profits generated from our core business 
activities will be credited towards the attainment of these targets.

2.  As an underpin, no part of a PSP award shall vest unless the Committee is satisfied as to the Company’s overall performance during the three year 

period ending on the Normal Vesting Date for PSP awards.

3.  The EPS base from which the above performance condition will be measured to 30 April 2021 will be 12.3 pence, being equivalent to the Diluted EPS 

for the year ended 30 April 2017. This base point was considered appropriate for the performance period, and consistent with the negative adjustment 
from reported EPS resulting in the non-vesting of the 2016 awards, which sought to measure only profits derived from core business activities for the PSP.

48

Clipper Logistics plc Unaudited information
Remuneration Committee
The members of the Committee during the year were:

/  Mike Russell (Chairman from 7 March 2019);
/  Stephen Robertson (Chairman until 7 March 2019);
/  Stuart Watson (from 26 March 2019); and
/  Ron Series (until 7 November 2018).

The Committee’s principal responsibilities are:

/  recommending to the Board the remuneration strategy and framework for the Executive Directors and senior managers;
/  determining, within that framework, the individual remuneration arrangements for the Executive Directors and senior 

managers; and

/  overseeing any major changes in employee benefit structures throughout the Group.

The Executive Chairman is invited to attend meetings of the Committee, except when his own remuneration is being 
discussed, and the Chief Financial Officer and other executives attend meetings as required.

Advisors
FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP (“FIT”), signatory to the Remuneration Consultants Group’s Code of Conduct, was appointed 
by the Committee following a competitive tender process. FIT provides advice to the Committee on all matters relating to 
remuneration, including best practice. FIT provided no other services to the Group and accordingly the Committee was 
satisfied that the advice provided by FIT was objective and independent. FIT’s fees in respect of the year ended 30 April 2019 
were £50,000. FIT’s fees were charged on the basis of the firm’s standard terms of business for advice provided.

Implementation of Policy in the year ending 30 April 2020
Executive Directors
Base salary
/  Steve Parkin’s base salary for the year ending 30 April 2020 is £421,352 (2019: £411,075, 2.5% increase). Tony Mannix’s base 
salary for the year ending 30 April 2020 is £288,558 (2019: £281,520, 2.5% increase), and David Hodkin’s base salary for  
the year ending 30 April 2020 is £227,919 (2019: £222,360, 2.5% increase). The 2.5% increase is in line with increases for  
staff generally.

Pension
/  Contribution rates for Executive Directors are as follows (expressed as percentages of base salary): Tony Mannix – 10% and 
David Hodkin – 15%. Steve Parkin will receive a contribution of £10,000. These are unchanged from the financial year ended 
30 April 2019.

Benefits
/  Details of the benefits received by Executive Directors are set out in note 1 to the single figure table on page 47.
/  There is no intention to introduce additional benefits in the financial year ending 30 April 2020.

Annual Incentive Plan for the year ending 30 April 2020
/  The AIP maximum is 50% of base salary. This is unchanged from the financial year ended 30 April 2019.
/  Performance measures for the AIP in the year to 30 April 2020 will be based on EBIT (adjusted for certain matters in the 

Committee’s judgment). The Committee selected EBIT (adjusted, where necessary) as the performance measure for the AIP 
for the year ending 30 April 2020 as it is regarded as a key performance indicator for the Group. Given the competitive 
nature of the Group’s sectors, the specific performance targets for the AIP are considered to be commercially sensitive and 
accordingly are not disclosed. Following the conclusion of the current financial year, the Committee’s intention is to 
disclose the performance targets for the current financial year on a retrospective basis.

Performance Share Plan for the year ending 30 April 2020
/  As explained in the Committee Chairman’s introductory statement, it is intended that no new PSP awards will be made in 

the year ending 30 April 2020.

Non-Executive Directors
Fees
The base fee payable to each Non-Executive Director is as follows:

/  Stephen Robertson – £65,000 (Senior Independent Director);
/  Mike Russell – £47,500; and
/  Stuart Watson – £47,500.

Relative importance of spend on pay
The table below shows the Group’s expenditure on remuneration paid to all employees against distributions to shareholders:

£’000

Remuneration paid to all employees of the Group1

Distributions to shareholders

2019

2018

% change

138,400

114,872

8,934

7,622

+20.5%

+17.2%

1.  Total remuneration reflects overall employee costs. See note 5 to the Group Financial Statements for further information.

49

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Comparative Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”)
The DRR regulations require a line graph showing the TSR on a holding of shares in the Company since admission to the 
London Stock Exchange (“Admission”) to the financial year end, as well as the TSR for a hypothetical holding of shares 
in a broad equity market index for the same period. The graph below compares the Company’s TSR to the TSR of the FTSE 
SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts) over this period.

The FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts) was chosen as a comparator as the Company is a constituent of 
this index.

Total Shareholder Return Index (30 May 2014 = 100)

500

400

300

200

100

0

30 May
2014

30 April
2015

30 April
2016

30 April
2017

30 April
2018

30 April
2019

Source: Thomson Reuters

Clipper Logistics plc

FTSE SmallCap Index excluding Investment Trusts

The DRR regulations also require a table setting out selected details of the remuneration of the Executive Chairman over the 
same period as shown on the TSR graph:

Year ended 30 April 2019: Steve Parkin

Year ended 30 April 2018: Steve Parkin

Year ended 30 April 2017: Steve Parkin

Year ended 30 April 2016: Steve Parkin

Year ended 30 April 2015: Steve Parkin

Annual 
variable 
element 
award rates 
against 
maximum 
opportunity

Long-term
 incentive 
vesting rates
 against 
maximum
opportunity

Single figure  
of total 
remuneration 
(£’000)

491

4931

1,574

486

518

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%2

0.0%

20.8%

0.0%

0.0%

100.0%

n/a

n/a

1.  Figure conformed to total stated in single figure table after re-calculation for non-vesting of LTIPs.
2.  Steve Parkin waived his entitlement to his bonus for the year ended 30 April 2017.

Executive Chairman’s relative pay
In accordance with the DRR regulations, we present in the table below the percentage change in the prescribed pay 
elements (salary, taxable benefits and annual bonus outcome) of the Executive Chairman and the average percentage 
change for all Group staff between the year ended 30 April 2018 and the year ended 30 April 2019.

Salary

0%

4.7%

Taxable 
benefits Annual bonus

-2.8%

7.1%

n/a

31.2%

Year-on-year % change

Executive Chairman

All employees

50

Clipper Logistics plc AGM voting results
Details of the votes on remuneration matters held at the 2018 AGM (and 2017 AGM in respect of the Remuneration Policy)  
are as follows:

Resolution

Votes for

% for Votes against

% against

Total votes

Withheld

Approve Directors’ Remuneration Report

87,967,391

100.00%

0

0.00%

87,967,391

0

Approve participation by Concert Party 
in PSP and Sharesave Plan

Approve Remuneration Policy  
(2017 AGM)

36,496,501

75.29%

11,975,141

24.71%

48,471,642

33,800

87,807,973

99.03%

858,214

0.97%

88,666,187

0

The Committee understands that the reason for the voting outcome in relation to the Concert Party resolution is a concern 
raised by certain governance bodies in relation to the Executive Chairman’s participation in the PSP given the level of his 
existing shareholding in the Company, which is an issue with perceived creeping control rather than a remuneration issue. 
The Committee is giving this matter further consideration as described on page 46. 

Service contracts summary
Each Executive Director has a service contract of indefinite duration with a notice period of twelve months, which may be 
given by the Company or the individual.

The date of each Executive Director’s contract is:
Steve Parkin: 30 May 2014
Tony Mannix: 30 May 2014
David Hodkin: 30 May 2014

Non-Executive Directors
Each Non-Executive Director is engaged for an initial period of three years. The appointments can be renewed following the 
initial three year term. The engagements can be terminated by either party on three months’ notice.

The Non-Executive Directors cannot participate in the Company’s share schemes, are not entitled to pension benefits and are 
not entitled to payment in compensation for early termination of their appointment.

For each Non-Executive Director the effective date of their latest letter of appointment is:
Stephen Robertson: 1 May 2017
Mike Russell: 1 May 2017
Stuart Watson: 21 March 2019

Part B: Policy Report
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved by the Company’s shareholders at the Company’s AGM on 25 September 
2017 and has effect for all payments made to Directors from that date. The Company’s Directors’ Remuneration Policy is 
available for inspection in the Company’s 2017 Annual Report and Accounts via its website at: www.clippergroup.co.uk/
report-accounts/. For ease of reference, the Directors’ Remuneration Policy which was approved at the 2017 AGM is included 
as an appendix to this report, although the scenario charts have been updated to reflect up-to-date salaries.

This report was reviewed and approved by the Board on 29 August 2019 and signed on its behalf by:

Mike Russell
Chairman, Remuneration Committee

51

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Appendix: Directors’ Remuneration Policy
The following material is the Directors’ Remuneration Policy approved at the 2017 AGM. It is included in this year’s report for 
information only and does not form part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report which is subject to approval by shareholders 
at the 2019 AGM.

Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Maximum

Performance measures

N/A

N/A

In the normal course of 
events, the Executive 
Directors’ salaries would 
not normally be increased 
by more than the average 
awarded to staff generally. 
However, given the need 
for a formal cap under 
the DRR regulations, the 
Remuneration Committee 
has further limited the 
maximum salary which it 
may award to Executive 
Directors to the median 
salary level plus 10% for that 
role in the top half of the 
FTSE SmallCap.

It is not possible to prescribe 
the likely change in the cost 
of insured benefits or the cost 
of some of the other reported 
benefits year-to-year, but 
the provision of benefits will 
operate within an annual 
limit of £100,000 (plus a 
further 100% of base salary  
in the case of relocations).

The Remuneration 
Committee will monitor the 
costs in practice and ensure 
that the overall costs do not 
increase by more than the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers appropriate in all 
the circumstances.

The maximum employer’s 
contribution is limited to 15% 
of base salary.

N/A

Base salaries will be 
reviewed each year by the 
Remuneration Committee.

The Remuneration 
Committee does not strictly 
follow data but uses it 
as a reference point in 
considering, in its judgment, 
the appropriate level of 
salary having regard to other 
relevant factors including 
corporate and individual 
performance and any 
changes in an individual’s 
role and responsibilities.

Base salary is paid monthly 
in cash.

The Executive Directors 
may receive a car 
allowance or company 
car, fuel allowance, private 
family medical cover and 
insurance benefits.

The Remuneration 
Committee reserves 
discretion to introduce new 
benefits where it concludes 
that it is appropriate to do 
so, having regard to the 
particular circumstances 
and to market practice.

Where appropriate, the 
Group will meet certain 
costs relating to Executive 
Director relocations.

Executive Directors 
can receive pension 
contributions to personal 
pension arrangements, or, 
if a Director is impacted 
by annual or lifetime limits 
on contribution levels to 
qualifying pension plans, the 
balance can be paid as a 
cash supplement.

Base salary
This is the core element 
of pay and reflects the 
individual’s role and position 
within the Group with some 
adjustment to reflect their 
capability and contribution.

Benefits
To provide benefits valued 
by recipients.

Pension
To provide 
retirement benefits.

52

Clipper Logistics plc Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Maximum

Performance measures

Annual Incentive Plan 
(“AIP”)
To motivate executives 
and incentivise delivery 
of performance over a 
one year operating cycle, 
focusing on the short to 
medium term elements of 
our strategic aims.

Long-Term Incentives 
(“LTI”)
To motivate and incentivise 
delivery of sustained 
performance over the 
long-term, and to promote 
alignment with shareholders’ 
interests, the Group operates 
a Performance Share Plan 
(“PSP”).

The maximum level of AIP 
outcomes is 50% of base 
salary p.a. for the duration 
of this Policy.

The PSP allows for awards 
over shares with a maximum 
value of 150% of base salary 
per financial year.

The Remuneration 
Committee expressly 
reserves discretion to 
make such awards as it 
considers appropriate within 
these limits.

AIP levels and the 
appropriateness of measures 
are reviewed annually at the 
commencement of each 
financial year to ensure 
they continue to support 
our strategy.

Once set, performance 
measures and targets 
will generally remain 
unchanged for the 
year, except to reflect 
events such as corporate 
acquisitions or other major 
transactions where the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers it to be necessary 
in its opinion to make 
appropriate adjustments.

AIP outcomes are 
paid in cash following 
the determination of 
achievement against 
performance measures 
and targets.

Malus and clawback 
provisions apply to the AIP 
as explained in more detail  
in the notes to this table.

Awards under the PSP 
may be granted as nil-
cost options or conditional 
awards of shares which vest 
to the extent performance 
conditions are satisfied 
over a period of at least 
three years.

Under the PSP rules, vested 
awards may also be settled 
in cash.

The PSP rules allow that the 
number of shares subject to 
vested PSP awards may be 
increased to reflect the value 
of dividends that would 
have been paid in respect 
of any dividend dates falling 
between the grant of awards 
and the vesting of awards.

Whilst this feature does 
not currently operate for 
awards, the Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion 
to introduce this feature 
during the period of 
this policy.

Malus and clawback 
provisions apply to PSP 
awards and are explained 
in more detail in the notes to 
this table.

The performance measures 
applied may be financial or 
non-financial and corporate, 
divisional or individual and 
in such proportions as the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers appropriate.

Attaining the threshold level of 
performance for any measure 
will not produce a pay-out 
of more than 20% of the 
maximum portion of overall AIP 
attributable to that measure, 
with a sliding scale to full pay-
out for maximum performance.

However, the AIP remains a 
discretionary arrangement and 
the Remuneration Committee 
retains a standard power to 
apply its judgment to adjust 
the outcome of the AIP for any 
performance measure (from 
zero to any cap) should it 
consider that to be appropriate.

The Remuneration Committee 
may set such performance 
conditions on PSP awards 
as it considers appropriate 
(whether financial or non-
financial and whether 
corporate, divisional 
or individual).

Once set, performance 
measures and targets will 
generally remain unaltered 
unless events occur which, in 
the Remuneration Committee’s 
opinion, make it appropriate 
to substitute, vary or waive 
the performance conditions 
in such manner as the 
Remuneration Committee 
thinks fit.

Performance periods may 
be over such periods as the 
Remuneration Committee 
selects at grant, which will 
not be less than (but may 
be longer than) three years.

No more than 25% of 
awards vest for attaining 
the threshold level of 
performance conditions.

53

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Maximum

Performance measures

Share ownership guidelines
To further align the interests 
of Executive Directors with 
those of shareholders.

Executive Directors are 
expected to retain all of 
the ordinary shares vesting 
under the PSP, after any 
disposals for the payment of 
applicable taxes, until they 
have achieved the required 
level of shareholding.

100% of salary for all 
Executive Directors.

N/A

The Remuneration 
Committee reserves the 
power to amend (but not 
reduce) these levels in 
future years.

All-employee share plans
To encourage share 
ownership by employees, 
thereby allowing them 
to share in the long-term 
success of the Group and 
align their interests with those 
of the shareholders.

The Sharesave Plan is an 
all-employee share plan 
established under the HMRC 
tax-advantaged regime and 
follows the usual form for 
such plans.

The exercise price of the 
options is usually equal 
to the market price of 
the shares at the date of 
invitation to participate less a 
maximum discount of 20%.

Consistent with normal 
practice, such awards 
are not subject to 
performance conditions.

Executive Directors are 
able to participate in all-
employee share plans on 
the same terms as other 
Group employees.

The maximum amount that 
can be invested in the plan 
will not exceed the statutory 
limit from time to time 
(currently £500 pcm).

The options vest on the 
third anniversary of the 
commencement of the 
savings period.

Non-Executive Director fees
To enable the Group to 
recruit and retain Non-
Executive Directors of the 
highest calibre, at the 
appropriate cost.

The fees paid to Non-
Executive Directors aim to 
be competitive with other 
fully listed companies 
of equivalent size 
and complexity.

Fees are paid monthly 
in cash.

N/A

Any increases made will be 
appropriately disclosed.

The fees payable to the 
Non-Executive Directors are 
determined by the Board.

Notes to the Policy Table
1. Malus and clawback
Malus (being the forfeiture of unvested awards) and clawback (being the ability of the Company to claim repayment of paid 
amounts as a debt) provisions apply to the AIP and PSP if, in the opinion of the Remuneration Committee, any of the following 
has occurred:

/  there has been a material misstatement of the Group’s financial results which has led to an overpayment;
/  the assessment of performance targets is based on an error or inaccurate or misleading information or assumptions;
/  circumstances warranting summary dismissal; or
/  any other act or omission that has had a sufficiently significant impact on the reputation of the Group to justify the 

operation of malus/clawback.

Amounts in respect of awards under both plans may be subject to clawback for up to three years post payment or vesting 
as appropriate.

2. Stating maximum amounts for the Remuneration Policy
The DRR regulations and related investor guidance encourages companies to disclose a cap within which each element of 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy will operate. Where maximum amounts for elements of remuneration have been set within 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, these will operate simply as caps and are not indicative of any aspiration.

3. Travel and hospitality
While the Remuneration Committee does not consider it to form part of benefits in the normal usage of that term, it has been 
advised that corporate hospitality (whether paid for by the Group or another company) and business travel for Directors (and 
exceptionally their families) may technically come within the applicable rules and so the Remuneration Committee expressly 
reserves the right for the Remuneration Committee to authorise such activities within its agreed policies.

54

Clipper Logistics plc 4. Differences between the policy on remuneration for Directors from the policy on remuneration of other employees
Where the Group’s pay policy for Directors differs to its pay policies for groups of employees, this reflects the appropriate 
market rate position for the relevant roles. The Company takes into account pay levels, bonus opportunity and share awards 
applied across the Group as a whole when setting the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.

5. Discretions reserved in operating incentive plans
The Committee will operate the AIP and PSP according to their respective rules and the above Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy table. The Committee retains certain discretions, consistent with market practice, in relation to the operation and 
administration of these plans including:

/  the timing of awards and payments;
/  the size of awards, within the overall limits disclosed in the policy table;
/  the determination of performance measures and targets and resultant vesting and pay-out levels;
/  (as described in the termination payment policy section below) determination of the treatment of individuals who leave 
employment, based on the rules of the incentive plans, and the treatment of the incentive plans on exceptional events, 
such as a change of control of the Company; and

/  the ability to make adjustments to existing awards made under the incentive plans in certain circumstances (e.g. rights 

issues, corporate restructurings or special dividends).

While performance conditions will generally remain unchanged once set, the Committee has the usual discretions 
to amend the measures, weightings and targets in exceptional circumstances (such as a major transaction) where the 
original conditions would cease to operate as intended. Any such changes would be explained in the subsequent Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and, if appropriate, be the subject of consultation with the Company’s major shareholders.

6. Previous Policies
The Company will honour all pre-existing commitments made under previous policies in accordance with the terms of 
such commitments.

Recruitment remuneration policy
In terms of the principles for setting a package for a new Executive Director, the starting point for the Committee will be to 
apply the general policy for Executive Directors as set out above and structure a package in accordance with that policy. 
Consistent with the DRR regulations, the caps contained within the policy for fixed pay do not apply to new recruits, although 
the Committee would not envisage exceeding these caps in practice.

The AIP and PSP will operate (including the maximum award levels) as detailed in the general policy in relation to any newly 
appointed Executive Director. For an internal appointment, any variable pay element awarded in respect of the prior role may 
either continue on its original terms or be adjusted to reflect the new appointment as appropriate.

For external and internal appointments, the Committee may agree that the Company will meet certain relocation expenses 
as it considers appropriate.

For external candidates, it may be necessary to make additional awards to buy-out awards forfeited by the individual on 
leaving a previous employer.

For the avoidance of doubt, buy-out awards are not subject to a formal cap. Details of any buy-out awards will be 
appropriately disclosed.

For any buy-outs the Company will not pay more than is, in the view of the Committee, necessary and will in all cases seek, 
in the first instance, to deliver any such awards under the terms of the existing AIP and PSP. It may, however, be necessary in 
some cases to make buy-out awards on terms that are more bespoke than the existing AIP and PSP (including in reliance on 
UKLA Listing Rule 9.4.2).

All buy-outs, whether under the AIP, PSP or otherwise, will take account of the service obligations and performance 
requirements for any remuneration relinquished by the individual when leaving a previous employer. The Committee will 
seek to make buy-outs subject to what are, in its opinion, comparable requirements in respect of service and performance. 
However, the Committee may choose to relax this requirement in certain cases (such as where the service and/or 
performance requirements are materially completed, or where such factors are, in the view of the Committee, reflected in 
some other way, such as a significant discount to the face value of the awards forfeited) and where the Committee considers 
it to be in the interests of shareholders.

A new Non-Executive Director would be recruited on the terms explained above in respect of the main policy for 
such Directors.

55

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Termination policy summary
It is appropriate for the Committee to consider treatments on a termination having regard to all of the relevant facts and 
circumstances available at that time. This policy applies both to any negotiations linked to notice periods on a termination 
and to any treatments that the Committee may choose to apply under the discretions available to it under the terms of the 
AIP and PSP plans. The potential treatments on termination under these plans are summarised below:

Incentives

Annual Incentive Plan

Performance Share Plan

If a leaver is deemed to be a 
‘good leaver’; for example, 
leaving through death or 
otherwise at the discretion  
of the Committee

If a leaver is deemed to be a ‘bad 
leaver’; for example, leaving for 
disciplinary reasons or to join a 
competitor

Committee has discretion to 
determine AIP.

No awards made.

Other exceptional cases;  
e.g. change in control

Committee has discretion  
to determine AIP.

All awards will normally lapse. Will receive a pro-

rated award subject to 
the application of the 
performance conditions 
at the date of the event, 
subject to standard 
Committee discretions to 
vary time pro-rating.

Will receive a pro-rated award 
subject to the application of 
the performance conditions 
at the end of the normal 
performance period.

Committee retains standard 
discretions to either vary 
time pro-rating or to allow 
vesting after the date of 
cessation (determining the 
performance conditions at 
that time).

The Company has the power to enter into settlement agreements with executives and to pay compensation to settle 
potential legal claims. In addition, and consistent with market practice, in the event of termination of an Executive Director, 
the Company may pay a contribution towards the individual’s legal fees and fees for outplacement services as part of a 
negotiated settlement. Any such fees would be disclosed as part of the detail of termination arrangements. For the avoidance 
of doubt, the policy does not include an explicit cap on the cost of termination payments.

In the event of cessation of a Non-Executive Director’s appointment, they would be entitled to a three month notice period.

External appointments
Where Executive Directors serve on the boards of other companies in either an executive or non-executive role, the individuals 
are permitted to retain any income earned for acting as director.

Statement of consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
Pay and employment conditions generally in the Group are taken into account when setting Executive Directors’ remuneration. 
The Committee receives regular updates on overall pay and conditions in the Group, including (but not limited to) changes in 
base pay and any staff bonus pools in operation. There is also oversight of the all-employee Sharesave Plan which Executive 
Directors and all other Group employees can participate in on the same terms and conditions.

The Company did not consult with employees in drawing up this Remuneration Report.

Statement of consideration of shareholder views
The Committee welcomes feedback from all shareholders and from shareholder representative bodies. As explained in the 
Committee Chairman’s introductory statement, in 2016 the Committee engaged with shareholder and representative bodies 
to discuss the continued operation of our current policy, including the inclusion of our Executive Chairman and other Concert 
Party individuals in our PSP.

56

Clipper Logistics plc Illustrations of application of remuneration policy (£’000)

Executive Chairman – Steve Parkin

CEO – Tony Mannix

CFO – David Hodkin

£1,134

37%

19%

£733

15%

17%

£500

100%

68%

44%

1,200

1,000

800

600

400

200

0

£767

38%

19%

£493
14%

18%

£333

£607

38%

19%

£391
15%

17%

£264

100%

68%

43%

100%

68%

43%

Minimum

In line with
expectation

Maximum

Minimum

In line with
expectation

Maximum

Minimum

In line with
expectation

Maximum

Total fixed pay

Annual Incentive Plan

Long-term Incentives

The charts above aim to show how the remuneration policy set out above for Executive Directors is applied using the 
following assumptions:

/  Consists of base salary, benefits and pension.

/  Base salary is the salary to be paid in the year ending 30 April 2020.

/  Benefits measured as benefits paid in the year ended 30 April 2019 as set out in the single figure table.

/  Pension measured as the defined contribution or cash allowance in lieu of Company contributions,  

Minimum

as a percentage of salary (£10,000 for Steve Parkin, 10% for Tony Mannix and 15% in the case of  
David Hodkin).

£’000

Steve Parkin

Tony Mannix

David Hodkin

Base Salary

Benefits

Pension

Total Fixed

421

288

228

69

16

2

10

29

34

500

333

264

In line with  
expectations

Based on what the Director would receive if performance was on target (excluding share price 
appreciation and dividends):

/  STI: consists of the on-target bonus of 30% of salary.
/  LTI: consists of the threshold level of vesting (25% vesting), plus the fair value of full investment in the 

Sharesave Plan (£1,200).

Based on the maximum remuneration receivable (excluding share price appreciation and dividends):

Maximum

/  STI: consists of maximum bonus of 50% of base salary.
/  LTI: consists of the face value of awards (100% of salary), plus the fair value of full investment in the 

Sharesave Plan (£1,200).

57

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Directors’ Report

The Directors are pleased to present 
their report and the audited Financial 
Statements of Clipper Logistics plc for 
the year ended 30 April 2019.

The Corporate Governance Report 
on pages 38 to 41 and the ‘Our 
People’ and ‘Sustainability’ sections 
of the Strategic Report (with regard to 
information about the employment 
of disabled persons, employee 
involvement and greenhouse gas 
emissions) are also incorporated 
into this report by reference.

The Company has chosen, in 
accordance with section 414C (11) of 
the Companies Act 2006 to include the 
disclosure of particulars of likely future 
developments in the Strategic Report 
(see pages 1 to 35).

Financial risk management
The Group’s business activities, together 
with the factors likely to affect its future 
development, performance and 
position are set out in the Operating 
and Financial Review on pages 30 to 
35, along with the financial position of 
the Group, its cash flows and liquidity.

In addition, note 26 to the Group 
Financial Statements includes the 
Group’s objectives, policies and 
processes for capital and financial risk 
management, including information on 
the Group’s exposures to market risk, 
including foreign currency, interest rate, 
inflation and equity price risks; details 
of its financial instruments and hedging 
activities; and its exposures to credit risk 
and liquidity risk.

Results and dividends
The consolidated profit for the 
Group for the year after taxation 
was £13.4 million (2018: £14.3 million). 
The results are discussed in greater 
detail in the Operating and Financial 
Review on pages 30 to 35 and set out  
in the Group Income Statement on 
page 70.

The Directors are recommending the 
payment on 23 October 2019 of a final 
dividend of 6.5 pence per ordinary 
share to shareholders on the register at 
the close of business on 20 September 
2019 which, together with the interim 
dividend of 3.2 pence per ordinary 
share paid on 7 January 2019, results 
in a total dividend for the year of 9.7 
pence per share (2018: 8.4 pence).

Directors
The names and biographies of the current Directors of the Company are set out on 
pages 36 and 37 of this Annual Report.

The following Directors served the Company during the year ended 30 April 2019:

Name

Position

Steven (Steve) Nicholas Parkin Executive Chairman

Antony (Tony) Gerard Mannix Chief Executive Officer

David Arthur Hodkin

Chief Financial Officer

Stephen Peter Robertson1

Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

Michael (Mike) John Russell

Independent Non-Executive Director

Stuart William Watson2

Independent Non-Executive Director

Ronald (Ron) Charles Series3

Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

1.  Stephen Robertson became Senior Independent Non-Executive Director with effect from 7 March 

2019 (formerly Independent Non-Executive Director).

2.  Stuart Watson was appointed on 26 March 2019.
3.  Ron Series stepped down from the Board on 7 November 2018 due to a conflict arising in relation to 

certain new contracts and business developments within Clipper.

Articles of Association
The Articles of Association (adopted by 
special resolution on 15 May 2014) (the 
“Articles”) may only be amended by 
special resolution of the shareholders. 
A copy of the Articles is available on 
request from the Company Secretary.

Directors’ share interests
Details of the Directors’ interests in the 
Company’s shares are included in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on 
page 47.

Directors’ indemnities
The Company provided indemnities 
to each of its Directors during the year 
ended 30 April 2019 in accordance 
with the provisions of the Company’s 
Articles, allowing the indemnification 
of Directors out of the assets of the 
Company to the extent permitted 
by law. These indemnities constitute 
qualifying indemnities for the purposes 
of the Companies Act 2006 and remain 
in force at the date of approval of this 
report without any payment having 
been made under them.

Directors’ and officers’ liability 
insurance
Directors’ and officers’ liability 
insurance cover is in place at the 
date of this report. The Board remains 
satisfied that an appropriate level of 
cover is in place and a review of cover 
will take place on an annual basis.

Compensation for loss of office
There are no agreements between the 
Company and its Directors or employees 
providing for compensation for loss of 
office or employment that occurs as a 
result of a takeover bid. Further details 
of the Directors’ service contracts can 
be found in the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report on pages 46 to 57.

Significant contracts
The only significant contract involving 
any Director or controlling shareholder 
of the Company during the year was 
the Relationship Agreement (referred to 
later in this report) entered into between 
the Company and Steve Parkin and 
Carlton Court Investments Limited.

Share capital structure
Details of the Company’s share capital 
are set out in note 22 to the Group 
Financial Statements on page 94.

During the year the Company issued:

/  189,035 new ordinary shares of 0.05 

pence each pursuant to the exercise 
of options granted to certain 
employees of the Company under 
the Company’s Sharesave Plan 
approved by shareholders at the 
2014 AGM; and

/  64,964 new ordinary shares of 0.05 

pence each pursuant to the exercise 
of options granted to certain 
employees of the Group under the 
Company’s PSP approved by 
shareholders at the 2014 AGM.

58

Clipper Logistics plc The Company has a single class of 
share capital divided into ordinary 
shares of 0.05 pence each. The ordinary 
shares are listed on the London Stock 
Exchange. The rights and obligations 
attaching to these shares are governed 
by UK law and the Company’s Articles.

Voting rights attaching to shares
Ordinary shareholders are entitled 
to receive notice and to attend and 
speak at any general meeting of 
the Company. On a show of hands, 
every shareholder present in person 
or by proxy (or being a corporation 
represented by a duly authorised 
representative) shall have one vote, 
and on a poll every shareholder who is 
present in person or by proxy shall have 
one vote for every share of which he or 
she is the holder. The Notice of Annual 
General Meeting specifies deadlines for 
exercising voting rights and appointing 
a proxy or proxies.

Deadlines for exercising voting rights 
attaching to shares
The Articles provide a deadline 
for the submission of proxy forms 
(whether by an instrument in writing 
or electronically) of not less than 48 
hours before the time appointed for 
the holding of the meeting or the 
adjourned meeting.

Shares in uncertificated form
Directors may determine that shares 
may be held in uncertificated form and 
title to such shares may be transferred 
by means of a relevant system or that 
shares should cease to be so held 
and transferred.

Variation of rights attaching  
to shares
The Articles provide that rights 
attached to any class of shares may be 
varied with the written consent of the 
holders of not less than three-quarters 
in nominal value of the issued shares, or 
with the sanction of a special resolution 
passed at a separate general meeting 
of the holders of those shares. At every 
such separate general meeting, the 
quorum shall be two persons holding or 
representing by proxy at least one-third 
in nominal value of the issued shares 
(calculated excluding any shares held 
in treasury). The rights conferred upon 
the holders of any shares shall not, 
unless otherwise expressly provided in 
the rights attaching to those shares, be 
deemed to be varied by the creation 
or issue of further shares ranking pari 
passu with them.

Restrictions on the transfer of shares 
There are no restrictions on the transfer 
of the ordinary shares other than:

/  the standard restrictions for a 

UK-quoted company where any 
amount is unpaid on a share;
/  where, from time to time, certain 

restrictions may become imposed by 
laws and regulations (for example, 
insider trading laws and market 
regulations relating to close periods); 
and

/  pursuant to the Listing Rules of the 

Financial Conduct Authority whereby 
certain Directors, officers or 
employees of the Company require 
the approval of the Company to 
deal in the ordinary shares.

On 30 May 2014 each of the Executive 
Directors (save for Steve Parkin) and 
certain persons who held ordinary 
shares after the Company’s Admission 
or whose associates held such shares 
entered into an agreement with Steve 
Parkin agreeing to certain restrictions 
on their ability (and that of their family) 
to dispose of ordinary shares in which 
they are interested for a period of five 
years from the date of Admission.

Under the terms of the agreement, 
the obligors may not dispose of any 
interest in the ordinary shares held 
by them at Admission until the fourth 
year of the five year period. During the 
fourth year of the period, each obligor 
may dispose of up to one third of the 
ordinary shares in which he is interested 
at Admission. During the fifth year of 
the five year period, each obligor 
may dispose of up to two thirds of the 
ordinary shares in which he is interested 
at Admission (less a number equal to 
those ordinary shares sold during the 
prior year (if any)).

Authority to purchase own shares
As at 28 August 2019, being the 
latest practicable date prior to the 
publication of this report, the Company 
did not hold any shares in treasury.

Appointment and replacement  
of Directors
Unless determined by ordinary 
resolution of the Company, the number 
of Directors shall not be less than two 
or more than 12 in number. A Director 
is not required to hold any shares in the 
Company by way of qualification.

The Board may appoint any person to 
be a Director and such Director shall 
hold office only until the next AGM, 
when he or she shall be eligible for 
appointment by the shareholders.

The articles provide that at each 
AGM, one-third of the Directors for the 
time being (or, if their number is not 
a multiple of three, then the number 
nearest to but not less than one-third) 
shall retire from office. A Director who 
retires at any AGM shall be eligible 
for re-appointment. In addition, any 
Director appointed by the Board shall 
hold office only until the next AGM and 
shall then be eligible for appointment.

As recommended by the 2018 Code, 
notwithstanding the Company’s 
Articles, the Directors have determined 
that all Directors shall retire from office 
annually at the AGM, and shall be 
eligible for re-appointment at that 
same AGM.

On 30 May 2014, the Company entered 
into an agreement (the “Relationship 
Agreement”) with Steve Parkin and 
his nominee company Carlton Court 
Investments Limited (the “Controlling 
Shareholders”). Pursuant to that 
agreement the Company has agreed 
with the Controlling Shareholders that 
the Controlling Shareholders shall be 
entitled to appoint and remove one 
Director to the Board so long as the 
Controlling Shareholders (and/or any of 
their associates), when taken together, 
hold 25% or more of the voting rights 
over the Company’s issued shares.

Where any Controlling Shareholder has 
already been nominated to the Board 
as a Director himself such appointment 
will reduce the number of persons 
which the Controlling Shareholders are 
entitled to nominate for appointment 
by one.

Any person appointed by the 
Controlling Shareholders to the Board 
may be removed by the Controlling 
Shareholders by notice in writing.

59

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019out in the ‘Our People’ section of the 
Strategic Report on pages 24 to 27.

Significant agreements
There are a number of agreements 
which, subject to any discussions with 
relevant parties, could terminate upon 
a change of control of the Company 
such as commercial contracts, bank 
loan agreements, property lease 
arrangements and employees’ share 
plans. None of these individually is 
considered to be significant in terms 
of their likely impact on the business 
of the Group as a whole.

Political donations
The Company has made no political 
donations since Admission on 4 June 
2014 and intends to continue its policy 
of not doing so.

Charitable donations
During the year to 30 April 2019, the 
Group made charitable donations 
totalling £68,000 (2018: £48,000).

Audit information
Each of the Directors at the date of the 
approval of this report confirms that:

/  so far as he is aware, there is no 

relevant audit information of which 
the Group’s auditor is unaware; and
/  he has taken all the reasonable steps 

that he ought to have taken as a 
Director to make himself aware of 
any relevant audit information and 
to establish that the Group’s auditor 
is aware of the information.

The confirmation is given and should 
be interpreted in accordance with 
the provisions of section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

Auditor
The auditor, KPMG LLP, has indicated its 
willingness to continue in office and a 
resolution seeking to re-appoint KPMG 
LLP will be proposed at the AGM.

The Group intends to hold a tender for 
audit services in 2019 ahead of the half 
year results.

/ Governance

Directors’ Report continued

Relationship Agreement with 
Controlling Shareholders
Carlton Court Investments Limited 
(“Carlton”) holds 24.73% of the issued 
share capital of the Company and, 
together with its concert parties, 
controls 38.82% of the issued share 
capital of the Company. As such 
Carlton is a Controlling Shareholder as 
defined in the Listing Rules. Carlton is 
controlled by Steve Parkin. Steve Parkin 
and Carlton have entered into, and 
the Company’s relationship with 
them is governed by the terms of, the 
Relationship Agreement referred to 
above, the principal purpose of which 
is to ensure that the Company and 
the Group are capable of carrying 
on their business independently of 
the Controlling Shareholders and that 
any transactions and relationships 
with the Controlling Shareholders are 
conducted at arm’s length and on 
normal commercial terms.

The Controlling Shareholders have 
agreed to procure that their associates 
also comply with the Relationship 
Agreement. The Relationship 
Agreement will continue for so long 
as the Company is listed on the main 
market for listed securities of the 
London Stock Exchange and the 
Controlling Shareholders and their 
associates own or control at least 25% 
of the Company’s issued share capital 
or voting rights.

The Listing Rules require premium 
listed companies with controlling 
shareholders to provide a confirmation 
in their annual reports that all of the 
independence provisions contained 
in their agreements have been 
complied with.

In line with this requirement, the 
Board has assessed the Controlling 
Shareholders’ and Company’s 
compliance with the Relationship 
Agreement’s independence 
requirements and has assessed 
compliance with these requirements 
during the period under review. As such, 
the Board can confirm that since the 
entry into the Relationship Agreement 
on 30 May 2014 until 28 August 2019, 
being the latest practicable date prior 
to the publication of this Annual Report 
and Accounts:

/  the Company has complied with the 
independence provisions included in 
the Relationship Agreement;

/  so far as the Company is aware, the 

independence provisions included in 
the Relationship Agreement have 
been complied with by each of the 

Controlling Shareholders and their 
associates and also by the 
Company; and

/  so far as the Company is aware, the 
procurement obligation included in 
the Relationship Agreement has 
been complied with by each of the 
Controlling Shareholders.

Power of Directors
Subject to the Articles, the Companies 
Act 2006 and any directions given 
by special resolution, the business 
of the Company shall be managed 
by the Board which may exercise all 
the powers of the Company to, for 
example, borrow money; mortgage 
or charge any of its undertaking, 
property and uncalled capital; and 
issue debentures and other securities, 
whether outright or as collateral 
security for any debt, liability or 
obligation of the Company.

Greenhouse gas emissions
The Group’s disclosures on greenhouse 
gas emissions can be found in the 
Sustainability section of the Strategic 
Report on pages 28 and 29 and form 
part of the Directors’ Report.

Employment policies
Arrangements for consulting and 
involving Group employees on 
matters affecting their interests at 
work, and informing them of the 
performance of their employing 
business and the Group, are 
developed in ways appropriate to 
each business. Various approaches are 
adopted aimed at encouraging the 
involvement of employees in effective 
communication and consultation, 
and the contribution of productive 
ideas at all levels. The Company has 
commenced a workforce engagement 
programme in line with the 2018 Code.

Employment policies are designed to 
provide equal opportunities irrespective 
of race, caste, national origin, religion, 
age, disability, gender, marital status, 
sexual orientation or political affiliation. 
Group policy is to ensure that disabled 
applicants for employment are given 
full and fair consideration having 
regard to their particular aptitudes 
and abilities, and that existing disabled 
employees are given equal access 
to training, career development and 
promotion opportunities. In the event of 
existing employees becoming disabled, 
all reasonable means will be explored 
to achieve retention in employment in 
the same or an alternative capacity, 
including arranging appropriate 
training. Further details in relation to 
the Group’s employment policy are set 

60

Clipper Logistics plc Major interests in shares
As at 28 August 2019, being the last practicable date prior to publication of this report, the Company had been advised, 
in accordance with the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority, of the following notifiable 
interests (whether directly or indirectly held) in 3% or more of its voting rights:

Notification received from

Carlton Court Investments Limited1

Liontrust Asset Management

SOMLIE Limited

Unicorn Asset Management

Global Alpha Capital Management

Franklin Templeton Fund Management

Summit Limited

Royal London Asset Management

1.  Ultimately controlled by Steve Parkin, Executive Chairman.

Going concern 
After making enquiries, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that 
the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. In making this 
assessment they have considered 
the Company and Group budgets 
and cash flow forecasts for the period 
to 30 April 2022. The Company has 
considerable financial resources, 
negligible liquidity risk and is 
operating within a sector that is 
experiencing growing demand for 
its services. The Directors therefore 
have a reasonable expectation 
that the Company and the Group 
have adequate resources to 
continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future. Thus they 
continue to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting in preparing 
the annual Financial Statements. 
Further information is disclosed in the 
Viability Statement on page 23 and note 
2.2 to the Group Financial Statements.

Annual General Meeting
The Company’s AGM will be held at 
the Novotel Leeds Centre, 4 Whitehall, 
Whitehall Quay, Leeds, LS1 4HR on 
21 October 2019 at 11.00am.

Details of the meeting venue and the 
resolutions to be proposed are set out 
in a Notice of Meeting which will be 
issued under separate cover.

The Directors consider that all of 
the proposed resolutions are in the 
best interests of the Company and 
its shareholders as a whole. It is the 
Directors’ recommendation that 
shareholders support the proposed 
resolutions and vote in favour of them, 
as each of the Directors intends to do.

The Directors’ Report has been 
approved by the Board of Directors 
of Clipper Logistics plc.

Signed on behalf of the Board by:

Marianne Hodgkiss
Company Secretary
29 August 2019

Number of 
voting rights

25,128,000

17,150,370

6,424,945

6,500,000

5,894,305

5,437,000

5,000,000

4,557,069

%

24.72

16.87

6.32

6.39

5.80

5.35

4.92

4.48

61

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Governance

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
in respect of the Annual Report and the Financial Statements

We consider the Annual Report and the 
Financial Statements, taken as a whole, 
is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business 
model and strategy.

Approved by the Board and signed on 
its behalf by:

Steve Parkin
Executive Chairman
29 August 2019

David Hodkin
Chief Financial Officer
29 August 2019

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and 
the Group and Company Financial 
Statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors 
to prepare group and parent 
company financial statements for 
each financial year. Under that law 
they are required to prepare the group 
financial statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the European 
Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU) and 
applicable law and have elected to 
prepare the parent company financial 
statements in accordance with UK 
accounting standards, including FRS 
101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’.

Under company law the directors must 
not approve the financial statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view of the state of affairs 
of the group and parent company and 
of their profit or loss for that period. 
In preparing each of the group and 
parent company financial statements, 
the directors are required to:

/  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
/  make judgments and estimates that 
are reasonable, relevant, reliable 
and prudent;

/  for the group financial statements, 
state whether they have been 
prepared in accordance with IFRSs 
as adopted by the EU;

/  for the parent company financial 

statements, state whether applicable 
UK accounting standards have been 
followed, subject to any material 
departures disclosed and explained 
in the parent company financial 
statements;

/  assess the group and parent 

company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern, disclosing, as 
applicable, matters related to going 
concern; and

/  use the going concern basis of 

accounting unless they either intend 
to liquidate the group or the parent 
company or to cease operations or 
have no realistic alternative but to  
do so.

The directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that are sufficient to show and explain 
the parent company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any time the financial position of the 
parent company and enable them 
to ensure that its financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. 
They are responsible for such internal 
control as they determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or 
error, and have general responsibility 
for taking such steps as are reasonably 
open to them to safeguard the assets 
of the group and to prevent and detect 
fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, 
the directors are also responsible for 
preparing a strategic report, directors’ 
report, directors’ remuneration report 
and corporate governance statement 
that comply with that law and 
those regulations.

The directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information 
included on the company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the 
preparation and dissemination of 
financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the 
Directors in respect of the Annual 
Report and the Financial Statements
We confirm that to the best of 
our knowledge:

/  the Financial Statements, prepared 
in accordance with the applicable 
set of accounting standards, give a 
true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit 
or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole; and

/  the Strategic Report and Directors’ 
Report include a fair review of the 
development and performance of 
the business and the position of the 
issuer and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a 
whole, together with a description of 
the principal risks and uncertainties 
that they face.

62

Clipper Logistics plc / Group Financial Statements

Independent Auditor’s Report
to the members of Clipper Logistics plc

1. Our opinion is unmodified
We have audited the Financial 
Statements of Clipper Logistics plc 
(the “Company”) for the year ended 
30 April 2019 which comprise the Group 
Income Statement, Group Statement 
of Comprehensive Income, Group 
Statement of Financial Position, Group 
Statement of Changes in Equity, Group 
Statement of Cash Flows, Company 
Statement of Financial Position, 
Company Statement of Changes in 
Equity and the related notes, including 
the accounting policies in notes 2 and B.

In our opinion:

/  the Financial Statements give a true 

and fair view of the state of the Group’s 
and of the Parent Company’s affairs 
as at 30 April 2019 and of the Group’s 
profit for the year then ended;

Overview

/  the Group Financial Statements have 

been properly prepared in 
accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the European Union;

/  the Parent Company Financial 
Statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with UK 
accounting standards, including 
FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework; and

/  the Financial Statements have been 
prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 
2006 and, as regards the Group 
Financial Statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in 
accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) 

(“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities are described 
below. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a 
sufficient and appropriate basis for our 
opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent 
with our report to the audit committee.

We were first appointed as auditor by 
the shareholders on 31 March 2016. 
The period of total uninterrupted 
engagement is for the four financial 
years ended 30 April 2019. We have 
fulfilled our ethical responsibilities 
under, and we remain independent 
of the Group in accordance with, UK 
ethical requirements including the FRC 
Ethical Standard as applied to listed 
public interest entities. No non-audit 
services prohibited by that standard 
were provided.

Materiality: Group Financial Statements as a whole £0.892m (2018: £0.822m)

Coverage

Key audit matters

Recurring risks

Event driven

5.3% (2018: 4.6%) of Group profit before tax 

92.8% (2018: 93.5%) of Group profit before tax

vs 2018

Group and Parent Company: Accuracy of revenue recognition in 
Clipper Logistics plc and Clipper Logistics KG (GmbH & Co.) 



New: The impact of uncertainties due to the UK exiting the 
European Union on our audit

New: Group and Parent Company: Going concern

New: Management override of internal controls and related 
party transactions







2. Key audit matters: including our 
assessment of risks of material 
misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters 
that, in our professional judgment, 
were of most significance in the audit 
of the financial statements and include 
the most significant assessed risks 
of material misstatement (whether 
or not due to fraud) identified by us, 
including those which had the greatest 
effect on: the overall audit strategy; 
the allocation of resources in the 
audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. We summarise 
below the key audit matters, in arriving 
at our audit opinion above, together 
with our key audit procedures to 
address those matters and, as required 
for public interest entities, our results 
from those procedures. These matters 
were addressed, and our results are 
based on procedures undertaken, 
in the context of, and solely for the 
purpose of, our audit of the Financial 
Statements as a whole, and in forming 
our opinion thereon, and consequently 

are incidental to that opinion, and we 
do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters.

The impact of uncertainties due to 
the UK exiting the European Union on 
our audit 
Refer to page 20 (principal risks), page 
23 (viability statement) and page 43 
(Audit Committee Report).

The risk
Unprecedented levels of uncertainty
All audits assess and challenge 
the reasonableness of estimates, in 
particular as described in ‘accuracy of 
revenue recognition in Clipper Logistics 
plc and Clipper Logistics KG (GmbH 
& Co.)’ below, and related disclosures 
and the appropriateness of the going 
concern basis of preparation of the 
Financial Statements (see below). 
All of these depend on assessments 
of the future economic environment 
and the Group’s future prospects 
and performance.

In addition, we are required to consider 
the other information presented in 
the Annual Report including the 
principal risks disclosure and the 
viability statement and to consider the 
Directors’ statement that the Annual 
Report and Financial Statements 
taken as a whole is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model 
and strategy.

Brexit is one of the most significant 
economic events for the UK and at the 
date of this report its effects are subject 
to unprecedented levels of uncertainty 
of outcomes, with the full range of 
possible effects unknown.

Our response  
We developed a standardised firm-
wide approach to the consideration of 
the uncertainties arising from Brexit in 
planning and performing our audits. 
Our procedures included:

63

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Independent Auditor’s Report continued

/  Our Brexit knowledge:  

We considered the Directors’ 
assessment of Brexit-related sources 
of risk for the Group’s business and 
financial resources compared with 
our own understanding of the risks. 
We considered the Directors’ plans  
to take action to mitigate the risks;

/  Sensitivity analysis: When 

addressing going concern and other 
areas that depend on forecasts, we 
compared the Directors’ analysis to 
our assessment of the full range of 
reasonably possible scenarios 
resulting from Brexit uncertainty; and
/  Assessing transparency: As well as 
assessing individual disclosures as 
part of our procedures on going 
concern we considered all of the 
Brexit related disclosures together, 
including those in the strategic report, 
comparing the overall picture against 
our understanding of the risks.

Our results
As reported under the impact of 
uncertainties due to the UK exiting the 
European Union on our audit, we found 
the resulting estimates and related 
disclosures of Brexit and disclosures 
in relation to going concern to be 
acceptable. However, no audit should 
be expected to predict the unknowable 
factors or all possible future implications 
for a Company and this is particularly 
the case in relation to Brexit.

Group and Parent Company:  
Going concern 
Refer to page 20 (principal risks), page 
23 (viability statement), page 43 (Audit 
Committee Report) and page 74 and 
105 (accounting policy).

The risk
Disclosure quality
The Financial Statements explain how 
the Board has formed a judgment that 
it is appropriate to adopt the going 
concern basis of preparation for the 
Group and Parent Company.

That judgment is based on an 
evaluation of the inherent risks to the 
Group’s and Company’s business 
model and how those risks might 
affect the Group’s and Company’s 
financial resources or ability to continue 
operations over a period of at least a 
year from the date of approval of the 
Financial Statements.

The risks most likely to adversely 
affect the Group’s and Company’s 
available financial resources over this 
period were:

/  The impact of Brexit on the  

availability or cost of warehousing 
and transport labour.

There are also less predictable but 
realistic second order impacts, such as:

/  The impact of Brexit and the erosion 
of customer or supplier confidence, 
which could result in a rapid 
reduction of available financial 
resources; and

/  Reduction in investment in the UK by 
customers, resulting in relocation of 
operations outside of the UK.

The risk for our audit was whether or 
not those risks were such that they 
amounted to a material uncertainty 
that may have cast significant doubt 
about the ability to continue as a going 
concern. Had they been such, then 
that fact would have been required to 
have been disclosed.

Our response
Our procedures included:

/  Funding assessment: We assessed 
the committed level of financing 
available to the Group for at least 
the next 12 months through 
consideration of the facility 
agreement. We challenged the 
Directors’ assumptions by 
considering our own expectations 
based on our knowledge of the 
entity and experience of the industry 
in which it operates;

/  Historical comparisons:  

We considered the Group’s historical 
budgeting accuracy, by assessing 
actual performance against budget;

/  Benchmarking assumptions:  

We benchmarked the assumptions 
behind the cash flow forecasts  
to third party evidence  
where available;

/  Sensitivity analysis: We considered 
sensitivities over the level of available 
financial resources indicated by the 
Group’s financial forecasts taking 
account of reasonably possible (but 
not unrealistic) adverse effects that 
could arise from these risks 
individually and collectively; and

/  Assessing transparency:  

We assessed the completeness  
and accuracy of the matters 
covered in the going concern 
disclosure by assessing the 
reasonableness of risks and 
uncertainties specified by the 
disclosure against our findings from 
our evaluation of management’s 
assessment of going concern.

Our results
We found the going concern disclosure 
without any material uncertainty to 
be acceptable.

Group and Parent Company: 
Accuracy of revenue recognition in 
Clipper Logistics plc and Clipper 
Logistics KG (GmBH & Co.)  
Refer to page 44 (Audit 
Committee Report), pages 78-79 
(accounting policy) and page 81 
(financial disclosures).

The risk
Calculation and revenue recognition 
Contract and billing terms with 
customers across Clipper Logistics plc 
and Clipper KG (GmBH & Co.) vary 
significantly and include different and 
complex mechanisms for calculating 
the amount receivable in respect of 
services delivered. These mechanisms 
take into account delivery against 
service level agreements and require 
agreement of the level of costs 
incurred in delivering the services with 
customers. Failure to meet the terms 
of the service level agreements could 
result in potential penalties.

The varied terms, costs and 
performance requirements used 
to determine revenue can lead to 
complexity around the calculation 
of contract assets and liabilities, and 
assessing that revenue is recognised  
in the correct period.

Our response
Our procedures included:

/  Tests of details: We inspected the 

contract terms and billing schedule 
of a sample of key customer 
contracts to form an expectation of 
whether the year end balance sheet 
position would include contract 
assets or liabilities, which we then 
compared to the actual year  
end balances;

64

Clipper Logistics plc /  Re-performance: We recalculated a 
sample of contract liability balances 
using confirmation of services 
provided to customers or contracts 
detailing the specific calculation 
mechanisms where available. We 
also agreed the sample to invoices 
raised before the year end and cash 
receipt where possible;

/  Tests of details: We agreed a 
sample of year end contract  
asset balances to subsequent  
cash receipts where available or 
alternative evidence, including  
third party confirmations of services 
provided to customers in the year;

/  Tests of details: For a sample of 
invoices raised around the year  
end date, we considered the nature 
and timings of the services provided 
to understand if revenue had been 
accrued or deferred as expected. 
We also agreed amounts to 
subsequent cash receipts where 
available or alternative third party 
audit evidence including customer 
confirmation of services received in 
the year. This led to the identification 
of transactions which the Company 
has adjusted for; and

/  Assessing transparency: We 
assessed the adequacy of the 
Group’s disclosures in respect of  
the accounting policies on revenue 
recognition set out in note 2 to the 
Group Financial Statements.

Our results
The results of our procedures were 
satisfactory and we considered the 
amount of revenue recognised to be 
acceptable (2018 result: acceptable).

We consider the Group’s disclosures in 
respect of the accounting policies on 
revenue recognition to be acceptable 
(2018 result: acceptable).

Related Party Transactions  
Refer to page 44 (Audit Committee 
Report) and pages 98-99 
(financial disclosures).

The risk
Management override of internal 
controls and completeness 
of disclosure  
Various related party transactions have 
occurred with companies in which the 
Group, or key management personnel 
of the Group, have interests and/or 
are directors.

There is a risk that not all related 
party transactions are appropriately 
identified, accounted for and disclosed 
in the Financial Statements, and 
therefore that insufficient information 
is provided to understand the nature 
and effect of the various related 
party relationships and transactions, 
affecting the fair presentation of the 
Financial Statements.

There is additional risk in relation to the 
fact that related party relationships 
may present a greater opportunity 
for collusion, concealment or 
manipulation by the Directors.

The risk is considered to be limited 
to the Clipper Logistics plc parent 
entity, where transactions with related 
parties in which key management 
personnel and/or shareholders are 
more common.

Our response
Our procedures included:

/  Control observation: We evaluated 
the entity’s controls in relation to the 
assessment and approval of related 
party transactions;

/  Tests of details: We obtained a list of 
related parties from the Directors and 
gained an understanding of the 
entity’s related party relationships, 
including changes from the prior 
period. We understood the nature of 
transactions with related parties, 
including the terms and business  
purposes (or the lack thereof) of the 
transactions involving related parties;

/  Tests of details: We inspected 

minutes of meetings of shareholders 
and of those charged with 
governance, and shareholder 
registers that identify the entity’s 
principal shareholders, for indications 
of the existence of related party 
relationships or transactions that the 
Directors had not previously 
identified or disclosed to us;

/  Comparisons: We assessed the 
Directors’ evaluation that the 
transactions are on an arm’s length 
basis comparing the related party 
transaction price to those quoted by 
comparable unrelated companies, 
where possible;

/  Tests of details: For significant related 
party transactions outside the entity’s 
normal course of business, and for 
related party transactions identified 
during our testing that were not 
previously brought to our attention,  

we inspected the underlying contracts 
or agreements where available, and 
evaluated whether the business 
rationale (or lack thereof) of the 
transactions suggests that they may 
have been entered into to engage  
in fraudulent financial reporting or  
to conceal misappropriation of 
assets. We determined whether  
the terms of the transactions were 
consistent with the Directors’ 
explanations; and the transactions 
had been appropriately accounted 
for and disclosed in accordance  
with the relevant financial reporting 
framework. We obtained audit 
evidence that the transactions have 
been appropriately authorised and 
approved, where available;
/  Enquiry of key management 
personnel: We obtained self-
certifications from the Directors that 
they have disclosed to us the identity 
of their related parties and all the 
related party relationships and 
transactions of which they are 
aware; and they have appropriately 
accounted for and disclosed such 
relationships and transactions in 
accordance with the requirements  
of the relevant framework;

/  Extended scope: For each Director 
we ran a search for any companies 
controlled by those individuals (the 
search was performed via 
Companies House records). We 
compared the results of the searches 
made with the list of entities provided 
to us by the Directors and 
investigated the differences between 
the listings;

/  Extended scope: We inspected 

bank statements, transaction listings, 
sales and purchase ledgers and/or 
relevant agreements for 
arrangements or other information 
that may have indicated the 
existence of related party 
relationships or transactions that the 
Group had not previously identified 
or disclosed; and

/  Assessing transparency: For each 

class of related party transaction we 
compared the Financial Statements 
disclosures against the underlying 
transactions and the accounting 
requirements, assessing the 
adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
in respect of related party 
transactions.

Our results
We found the disclosure of related 
party transactions to be satisfactory.

65

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Independent Auditor’s Report continued

We continue to perform procedures 
over revenue recognition. However, 
given no acquisitions have occurred 
during the year, we have not assessed 
acquisition accounting as a significant 
risk in our current year audit and, 
therefore, it is not separately identified 
in our report this year. 

3. Our application of materiality and 
an overview of the scope of our audit
Materiality for the Group Financial 
Statements as a whole was set at 
£892,000 (2018: £822,000), determined 
with reference to a benchmark of 
Group profit before income tax, of 
which it represents 5.3% (2018: 4.6%).

Materiality for the Parent Company 
Financial Statements as a whole 
was set at £775,000 (2018: £557,000), 
determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Company profit before 
income tax, of which it represents 4.9% 
(2018: 5.0%). 

We agreed to report to the Audit 
Committee any corrected or 
uncorrected identified misstatements 
exceeding £44,600 (2018: £41,100), 
in addition to other identified 

misstatements that warranted reporting 
on qualitative grounds. 

Of the Group’s nine (2018: ten) reporting 
components we subjected four (2018: 
five) to full-scope audits for Group 
reporting purposes. These procedures 
covered 97.4% of total Group revenue 
(2018: 98.6%), 92.8% of Group profit 
before income tax (2018: 93.5%) and 
94.4% of total Group assets (2018: 97.6%). 

The Group team instructed component 
auditors as to the significant areas to 
be covered, including the relevant risks 
detailed above and the information 
to be reported back. The Group team 
approved the following component  
materiality, having regard to the mix of 
size and risk profile of the Group across 
the components: 

/  Clipper Logistics KG (GmbH & Co.): 

€490,000 (2018: €430,000)

The work on one of the four 
components (2018: one of the five 
components) was performed by the 
component auditor and the rest, 
including the audit of the Parent 
Company, was performed by the 
Group team. 

The Group team visited no locations 
(2018: no component locations), to 
assess the audit risk and strategy. 
Telephone conference meetings were 
held with the component auditor. 
At these meetings, the findings reported 
to the Group team were discussed 
in more detail, and any further work 
required by the Group team was then 
performed by the component auditor.

The remaining 2.6% (2018: 1.4%) of total 
Group revenue, 7.2% (2018: 6.5%) of 
absolute Group profit before tax and 
5.6% (2018: 2.4%) of total Group assets 
is represented by five (2018: five) of the 
reporting components, none of which 
individually represented more than 
4.2% (2018: 2.2%) of any of total Group 
revenue, Group profit before tax or 
total Group assets. For these residual 
components, we performed analysis 
at an aggregated Group level to re-
examine our assessment that there 
were no significant risks of material 
misstatement within these.

Group profit before income tax
£16.930m (2018: £17.966m)

Group materiality
£892k (2018: £822k)

£892k
Whole Financial Statements materiality
(2018: £822k)

£775k
Range of materiality at 4 components 
(£105k – £775k) (2018: £136k to £557k)

£44.6k
Misstatements reported to the Audit Committee
(2018: £41.1k)

 Group profit before income tax
 Group materiality 

66

Clipper Logistics plc Group revenue

Group profit before tax

Group total assets

2019

2018

97%

(2018: 99%)

98.6
97.4

2019

2018

93%

(2018: 94%)

2019

2018

94%

(2018: 98%)

93.5
92.8

97.6
94.4

 Full scope for Group audit purposes 2019

 Full scope for Group audit purposes 2018

 Residual components

4. We have nothing to report on 
going concern
The Directors have prepared the 
Financial Statements on the going 
concern basis as they do not intend to 
liquidate the Company or the Group or 
to cease their operations, and as they 
have concluded that the Company’s 
and the Group’s financial position 
means that this is realistic. They have 
also concluded that there are no 
material uncertainties that could have 
cast significant doubt over their ability 
to continue as a going concern for at 
least a year from the date of approval 
of the Financial Statements (‘the going 
concern period’).

Our responsibility is to conclude on 
the appropriateness of the Directors’ 
conclusions and, had there been a 
material uncertainty related to going 
concern, to make reference to that 
in this audit report. However, as we 
cannot predict all future events or 
conditions and as subsequent events 
may result in outcomes that are 
inconsistent with judgments that were 
reasonable at the time they were 
made, the absence of reference to  
a material uncertainty in this auditor’s 
report is not a guarantee that the 
Group and the Company will continue 
in operation.

We identified going concern as a 
key audit matter (see section 2 of this 
report). Based on the work described in 
our response to that key audit matter, 
we are required to report to you if:

/  we have anything material to add or 
draw attention to in relation to the 
Directors’ statement in Note 2 to  
the Financial Statements on the  
use of the going concern basis  
of accounting with no material 
uncertainties that may cast 
significant doubt over the Group  
and Company’s use of that basis for 
a period of at least twelve months 
from the date of approval of the 
Financial Statements; or 

/  the related statement under the 
Listing Rules set out on page 61  
is materially inconsistent with our 
audit knowledge.

We have nothing to report in 
these respects.

5. We have nothing to report  
on the other information in the  
Annual Report
The Directors are responsible for the 
other information presented in the 
Annual Report together with the 
Financial Statements. Our opinion 
on the Financial Statements does 
not cover the other information and, 
accordingly, we do not express an 
audit opinion or, except as explicitly 
stated below, any form of assurance 
conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other 
information and, in doing so, consider 
whether, based on our financial 
statements audit work, the information 
therein is materially misstated or 
inconsistent with the Financial 
Statements or our audit knowledge. 
Based solely on that work we have not 
identified material misstatements in the 
other information.

Strategic Report and  
Directors’ Report
Based solely on our work on the 
other information:

/  we have not identified material 

misstatements in the Strategic Report 
and the Directors’ Report;

/  in our opinion the information given 
in those reports for the financial year 
is consistent with the Financial 
Statements; and

/  in our opinion those reports have 

been prepared in accordance with 
the Companies Act 2006.

Directors’ Remuneration Report
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report to be audited has 
been properly prepared in accordance 
with the Companies Act 2006.

Disclosures of principal risks and 
longer-term viability
Based on the knowledge we acquired 
during our Financial Statements audit, 
we have nothing material to add or 
draw attention to in relation to:

/  the Directors’ confirmation within the 
Viability Statement page 23 that they 
have carried out a robust assessment 
of the principal risks facing the 
Group, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency and liquidity;

/  the Principal Risks disclosures 

describing these risks and explaining 
how they are being managed and 
mitigated; and

67

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Independent Auditor’s Report continued

/  the Directors’ explanation in the 

Viability Statement of how they have 
assessed the prospects of the Group, 
over what period they have done  
so and why they considered that 
period to be appropriate, and their 
statement as to whether they have  
a reasonable expectation that the 
Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities  
as they fall due over the period  
of their assessment, including any 
related disclosures drawing attention 
to any necessary qualifications  
or assumptions.

Under the Listing Rules we are required 
to review the Viability Statement. 
We have nothing to report in 
this respect.

Our work is limited to assessing these 
matters in the context of only the 
knowledge acquired during our 
financial statements audit. As we 
cannot predict all future events or 
conditions and as subsequent events 
may result in outcomes that are 
inconsistent with judgments that were 
reasonable at the time they were 
made, the absence of anything to 
report on these statements is not a 
guarantee as to the Group’s and 
Company’s longer-term viability.

Corporate governance disclosures
We are required to report to you if:

We are required to report to you if the 
Corporate Governance Statement 
does not properly disclose a departure 
from the eleven provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code specified 
by the Listing Rules for our review.

We have nothing to report in 
these respects.

Based solely on our work on the other 
information described above:

/  with respect to the Corporate 

Governance Statement disclosures 
about internal control and risk 
management systems in relation to 
financial reporting processes and 
about share capital structures:
–  we have not identified material 
misstatements therein; and

–  the information therein is 

consistent with the Financial 
Statements; and

/  in our opinion, the Corporate 

Governance Statement has been 
prepared in accordance with 
relevant rules of the Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rules 
of the Financial Conduct Authority.

6. We have nothing to report on the 
other matters on which we are 
required to report by exception
Under the Companies Act 2006, we 
are required to report to you if, in 
our opinion:

/  we have identified material 

/  adequate accounting records have 

inconsistencies between the 
knowledge we acquired during our 
Financial Statements audit and the 
Directors’ statement that they 
consider that the Annual Report and 
Financial Statements taken as a 
whole is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the 
information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business 
model and strategy; or

/  the section of the Annual Report 
describing the work of the Audit 
Committee does not appropriately 
address matters communicated by 
us to the Audit Committee; or

/  a Corporate Governance Statement 

has not been prepared by  
the Company.

not been kept by the Parent 
Company, or returns adequate for 
our audit have not been received 
from branches not visited by us; or

/  the Parent Company Financial 
Statements and the part of the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report to  
be audited are not in agreement 
with the accounting records and 
returns; or

/  certain disclosures of Directors’ 

remuneration specified by law are 
not made; or

/  we have not received all the 

information and explanations we 
require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in 
these respects.

7. Respective responsibilities
Directors’ responsibilities
As explained more fully in their 
statement set out on page 62, the 
Directors are responsible for: the 
preparation of the Financial Statements 
including being satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view; such internal 
control as they determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of Financial 
Statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error; assessing the Group and 
Parent Company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing, 
as applicable, matters related to 
going concern; and using the going 
concern basis of accounting unless 
they either intend to liquidate the 
Group or the Parent Company or to 
cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable 
assurance about whether the Financial 
Statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or other irregularities 
(see below), or error, and to issue 
our opinion in an auditor’s report. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of 
assurance, but does not guarantee that 
an audit conducted in accordance 
with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. 
Misstatements can arise from fraud, 
other irregularities or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in 
aggregate, they could reasonably be 
expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of 
the Financial Statements.

A fuller description of our responsibilities 
is provided on the FRC’s website at 
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

Irregularities – ability to detect
We identified areas of laws and 
regulations that could reasonably 
be expected to have a material 
effect on the Financial Statements 
from our general commercial and 
sector experience, and through 
discussion with the Directors and other 
management (as required by auditing 
standards), and discussed with the 
Directors and other management the 
policies and procedures regarding 

68

Clipper Logistics plc compliance with laws and regulations. 
We communicated identified laws and 
regulations throughout our team and 
remained alert to any indications of 
non-compliance throughout the audit. 
This included communication from the 
Group to component audit teams of 
relevant laws and regulations identified 
at Group level.

The potential effect of these laws and 
regulations on the Financial Statements 
varies considerably.

Firstly, the Group is subject to laws 
and regulations that directly affect 
the Financial Statements including 
financial reporting legislation (including 
related companies legislation), 
distributable profits legislation and 
taxation legislation and we assessed 
the extent of compliance with these 
laws and regulations as part of our 
procedures on the related Financial 
Statement items.

Secondly, the Group is subject to many 
other laws and regulations where the 
consequences of non-compliance 
could have a material effect on 
amounts or disclosures in the Financial 
Statements, for instance through the 
imposition of fines or litigation or the 
loss of the Group’s licence to operate. 
We identified the following areas as 
those most likely to have such an 
effect: health and safety, anti-bribery, 
employment law, transport law and 
certain aspects of Company legislation 
recognising the financial and regulated 
nature of the Group’s activities and 
its legal form. Auditing standards limit 
the required audit procedures to 
identify non-compliance with these 
laws and regulations to enquiry of the 
Directors and other management and 
inspection of regulatory and legal 
correspondence, if any. 

Through these procedures, we became 
aware of actual or suspected non-
compliance and considered the 
effect as part of our procedures on 
the related Financial Statement items. 
The identified actual or suspected 
non-compliance was not sufficiently 
significant to our audit to result in 
our response being identified as a 
key audit matter. Transactions with 
Directors were identified during the 
course of the audit. These transactions 
were unlawful as they were entered 
into in contravention of the provisions 
of the Companies Act 2006 relating 
to ‘quasi loans’ to directors. As a 
result we inspected bank statements 
to identify any similar transactions 
and credit card statements at the 

balance sheet date to identify any 
quasi loans that remained outstanding. 
The in-year transactions had all been 
settled and the amounts outstanding 
at the balance sheet date were 
settled once the non-compliance 
was identified. We inspected the 
legal advice sought by the Group 
and assessed the adequacy of the 
disclosure of these transactions in the 
Financial Statements. 

Owing to the inherent limitations of 
an audit, there is an unavoidable risk 
that we may not have detected some 
material misstatements in the Financial 
Statements, even though we have 
properly planned and performed our 
audit in accordance with auditing 
standards. For example, the further 
removed non-compliance with laws 
and regulations (irregularities) is from 
the events and transactions reflected 
in the Financial Statements, the less 
likely the inherently limited procedures 
required by auditing standards would 
identify it. In addition, as with any audit, 
there remained a higher risk of non-
detection of irregularities, as these may 
involve collusion, forgery, intentional 
omissions, misrepresentations, or the 
override of internal controls. We are 
not responsible for preventing non-
compliance and cannot be expected 
to detect non-compliance with all laws 
and regulations.

8. The purpose of our audit work and 
to whom we owe our responsibilities
This report is made solely to the 
Company’s members, as a body, in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 
of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we 
might state to the Company’s members 
those matters we are required to state 
to them in an auditor’s report and for 
no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or 
assume responsibility to anyone other 
than the Company and the Company’s 
members, as a body, for our audit work, 
for this report, or for the opinions we 
have formed.

Johnathan Pass  
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, 
Statutory Auditor

Chartered Accountants
1 Sovereign Square
Sovereign Street
Leeds
LS1 4DA

29 August 2019

69

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019 
/ Group Financial Statements
Group Income Statement
For the year ended 30 April

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Other net losses or gains
Administration and other expenses

Operating profit before share of equity-accounted investees, net of tax
Share of equity-accounted investees, net of tax

Operating profit

EBIT
Less: amortisation of other intangible assets

share of tax and finance costs of equity-accounted investees

Operating profit

Finance costs
Finance income

Profit before income tax
Income tax expense

Profit for the financial year

Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share

2019  
Group  
£’000

460,171
(331,879)

128,292
(327)
(108,481)

19,484
(413)

19,071

20,213
(1,185)
43
19,071

(2,199)
58

16,930
(3,524)

13,406

13.2p
13.1p

2018  
Group  
£’000

400,115
(283,324)

116,791
2,398
(98,358)

20,831
(889)

19,942

20,854
(1,094)
182
19,942

(2,014)
38

17,966
(3,685)

14,281

14.2p
14.1p

Note

3

6

4

6

4
4
6

8
9

10

11
11

Group Statement of Comprehensive Income
For the year ended 30 April

Profit for the financial year
Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year, net of tax:
To be reclassified to the income statement in subsequent periods:
Exchange differences on retranslation of foreign operations

Total comprehensive income for the financial year

Note

2019  
Group  
£’000

2018  
Group  
£’000

13,406

14,281

31

13,437

(106)

14,175

70

Clipper Logistics plc  
Group Statement of Financial Position
At 30 April

Assets:
Non-current assets

Goodwill
Other intangible assets

Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Interest in equity-accounted investees
Non-current financial assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Equity and liabilities:
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Financial liabilities: borrowings
Short-term provisions
Current income tax liabilities

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Financial liabilities: borrowings
Long-term provisions
Deferred tax liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Equity shareholders’ funds
Share capital
Share premium
Currency translation reserve
Other reserve
Merger reserve
Share based payment reserve
Retained earnings

Total equity attributable to the owners of the Company

2019  
Group  
£’000

2018  
Group  
£’000

Note

12
14
15
27

16
17
18

19
20
21

20
21
10

22

25,951
11,390

37,341
61,470
865
1,950

101,626

24,049
96,347
3,517

123,913

25,951
11,267

37,218
44,998
1,278
1,950

85,444

22,099
73,430
2,275

97,804

225,539

183,248

125,982
12,285
214
803

139,284

39,110
1,610
2,320

43,040

102,402
9,219
78
2,540

114,239

26,664
1,486
1,541

29,691

182,324

143,930

51
2,060
(108)
84
6,006
1,643
33,479

43,215

51
1,710
(139)
84
6,006
2,745
28,861

39,318

Total equity and liabilities

225,539

183,248

The accompanying notes on pages 74 to 102 form part of these Financial Statements.

Approved by the Board on 29 August 2019 and signed on its behalf by:

DA Hodkin
Chief Financial Officer
Clipper Logistics plc
Company No. 03042024

71

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Group Statement of Changes in Equity
For the year ended 30 April

Balance at 1 May 2017
Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share issue
Dividends

Balance at 30 April 2018

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share issue
Dividends

Share  
capital  
Group  
£’000

 Share  
premium 
Group  
£’000

Currency 
translation 
reserve  
Group 
£’000

Other  
reserve  
Group  
£’000

Carried 
forward  
Group  
£’000

50
–
–
–
1
–

51

–
–
–
–
–

80
–
–
–
1,630
–

1,710

–
–
–
350
–

(33)
–
(106)
–
–
–

(139)

–
31
–
–
–

84
–
–
–
–
–

84

–
–
–
–
–

181
–
(106)
–
1,631
–

1,706

–
31
–
350
–

Balance at 30 April 2019

51

2,060

(108)

84

2,087

Balance at 1 May 2017
Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share Issue
Dividends

Balance at 30 April 2018

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share issue
Dividends

Brought 
forward  
Group  
£’000

181
–
(106)
–
1,631
–

1,706

–
31
–
350
-

Merger  
reserve  
Group  
£’000

Share based 
payment 
reserve  
Group  
£’000

6,006
–
–
–
–
–

6,006

–
–
–
–
–

2,038
–
–
707
–
–

2,745

–
–
(1,102)
–
–

Retained 
earnings  
Group  
£’000

21,845
14,281
–
357
–
(7,622)

28,861

13,406
–
146
–
(8,934)

Total  
Group  
£’000

30,070
14,281
(106)
1,064
1,631
(7,622)

39,318

13,406
31
(956)
350
(8,934)

Balance at 30 April 2019

2,087

6,006

1,643

33,479

43,215

72

Clipper Logistics plc Group Statement of Cash Flows
For the year ended 30 April

Profit before tax from operating activities
Adjustments to reconcile profit before tax to net cash flows:
 / Depreciation and impairment of property, plant and equipment
 / Amortisation and impairment of intangible assets
 / Gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment
 / Share of equity-accounted investees, net of tax
 / Exchange differences
 / Finance costs
 / Share based payments charge
Working capital adjustments:
 / (Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
 / (Increase)/decrease in inventories
 / Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables

Operating activities:
 / Cash generated from operations
 / Interest received
 / Interest paid
 / Income tax paid

Net cash flows from operating activities

Investing activities:
 / Purchase of property, plant and equipment1
 / Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
 / Purchase of intangible assets1
 / Proceeds from sale of intangible assets
 / Acquisition of subsidiary undertakings net of cash acquired

Net cash flows from investing activities

Net cash flows from operating and investing activities

Financing activities:
 / Drawdown of bank loans
 / Debt issue costs paid
 / Shares issued
 / Dividends paid
 / Non-current financial assets advanced
 / Repayment of bank loans
 / Finance leases advanced in respect of purchases of property, plant and 

equipment and intangible assets1

 / Repayment of capital on finance leases

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at start of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

2019  
Group  
£’000

2018  
Group  
£’000

16,930

17,966

7,426
1,973
(124)
413
104
2,141
(1,178)

(22,915)
(773)
24,298

28,295
55
(2,027)
(4,276)

22,047

(24,320)
490
(2,096)
–
(500)

6,394
1,621
(2,203)
889
(198)
1,976
1,219

(23,785)
8,816
11,801

24,496
38
(1,932)
(3,968)

18,634

(11,599)
6,658
(1,060)
3
(11,773)

(26,426)

(17,771)

(4,379)

863

8,000
(20)
350
(8,934)
–
(747)

18,698
(10,389)

6,958

2,579

938

3,517

9,017
(101)
1,631
(7,622)
(500)
(812)

4,966
(7,366)

(787)

76

862

938

Note

6
6
6
15

8 & 9
23

28

22
7

18

1.  The cashflows for the year ended 30 April 2018 for these items have been re-presented for ease of comparability with the presentation convention 

adopted in the year ended 30 April 2019. Purchases of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets are now presented gross of the related 
finance lease drawdown in this year’s Group Financial Statements, having previously been presented net of the related finance lease drawdown.  
In the prior year, purchase of property, plant and equipment was reported as £(6,849,000), purchase of intangible assets was reported as £(844,000)  
and finance leases advanced in respect of purchases of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets was reported as £nil.

73

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements

1. General information
The Group Financial Statements for 
the year ended 30 April 2019 were 
authorised for issue by the Board of 
Directors on 29 August 2019 and the 
Group Statement of Financial Position 
was signed on the Board’s behalf by 
David Hodkin.

Clipper Logistics plc (the “Company”) 
and its subsidiaries (together the 
“Group”) provide value-added logistics 
and other services to predominantly 
the retail sector and also operate as 
distributors of commercial vehicles.

The Company is limited by share 
capital, incorporated and domiciled 
in the United Kingdom. The address of 
its registered office is Clipper Logistics 
Group, Gelderd Road, Leeds, LS12 6LT.

The Group’s Financial Statements have 
been prepared in accordance with 
note 2.1 Basis of preparation, and note 
2.3 Basis of consolidation. The principal 
accounting policies adopted by the 
Group are set out in note 2.

2. Summary of significant 
accounting policies
The principal accounting policies 
applied in the preparation of these 
consolidated Financial Statements 
are set out below. These policies have 
been consistently applied to all years 
presented, unless otherwise stated.

2.1 Basis of preparation
The Company acts as Parent 
undertaking for the Clipper Group 
of companies. The Company has 
independent operations in its own right 
and owns 100% of the share capital and 
voting rights of the following principal 
trading entities:

/  Clipper Logistics KG (GmbH & Co.) 

(Germany)

/  Clipper Logistics Sp.z o.o (Poland)
/  Servicecare Support Services Limited
/  Northern Commercials  

(Mirfield) Limited

During the year ended 30 April 2018, the 
Company acquired the entire issued 
share capital of Tesam Distribution 
Limited and RepairTech Limited (see 
note 28).

The Company also owns 50% of the 
share capital and voting rights of 
Clicklink Logistics Limited (see note 15).

In addition, the Group has a number of 
other subsidiaries as set out in note F to 
the Company Financial Statements.

The Group’s Financial Statements 
have been prepared in accordance 

74

with International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the European 
Union (IFRS) and also in accordance 
with the provisions of the Companies 
Act 2006.

The preparation of the financial 
information under IFRS requires 
management to make judgments, 
estimates and assumptions that 
affect the application of policies 
and reported amounts of assets and 
liabilities, income and expenses. 
The estimates and associated 
assumptions are based on historical 
experience and other factors that are 
believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances, the results of which 
form the basis of making the judgments 
about carrying values of assets and 
liabilities that are not readily apparent 
from other sources. Actual results may 
differ from these estimates.

The accounting policies which follow 
set out those policies which apply in 
preparing the Financial Statements for 
the year ended 30 April 2019.

The Group’s Financial Statements 
have been prepared on a historical 
cost basis. The Financial Statements 
are presented in Pounds Sterling 
and all values are rounded to the 
nearest thousand (£’000) unless 
otherwise indicated.

2.2 Going concern
The Financial Statements have been 
prepared on a going concern basis. 
In determining the appropriate 
basis of preparation of the Financial 
Statements, the Directors are required 
to consider whether the Group can 
continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future, being at 
least twelve months from the date of 
approval of the Financial Statements. 

Note 26 to the Group Financial 
Statements includes the Group’s 
objectives, policies and processes 
for managing its capital, its financial 
risk management objectives and its 
exposure to foreign exchange, credit 
and interest rate risk. Further details of 
the Group’s net debt at 30 April 2019 
are included in note 20 to the Group 
Financial Statements.

The Group Statement of Financial 
Position shows total current assets of 
£123,913,000 and total current liabilities 
of £139,284,000. Net current liabilities at 
30 April 2019 were therefore £15,371,000 
(2018: £16,435,000). At the year end, 
the Group had a committed Revolving 
Credit Facility of £35,000,000 (of 
which £17,000,000 was drawn) and an 

overdraft facility of £8,000,000 (none of 
which was drawn). 

The net current liability position arises 
due to a significant proportion of 
invoicing being raised in advance 
creating a significant contract 
liability which is unwound to revenue 
in line with the Group’s revenue 
recognition policies.

The Directors have assessed the future 
funding requirements of the Group and 
the Company and compared them to 
the bank facilities which are available. 
The assessment included a detailed 
review of financial and cash flow 
forecasts for at least 12 months from 
the date of approval of the Financial 
Statements. The Directors considered 
a range of potential scenarios within 
the key markets the Group serves 
and how these might impact on the 
Group’s cash flow. The Directors also 
considered what mitigating actions 
the Group could take to limit any 
adverse consequences.

The Group’s forecasts and projections 
show that the Group should be able 
to operate without the need for any 
increase in borrowing facilities.

Having undertaken this work, the 
Directors are of the opinion that 
the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, 
they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the 
Financial Statements.

2.3 Basis of consolidation
a. Group reorganisation and 
merger reserve
At 30 April 2014 the Company was a 
wholly owned subsidiary of Clipper 
Group Holdings Limited. In April 2014 
the Group undertook a restructuring, 
whereby the Company acquired 
certain fellow subsidiaries from Clipper 
Group Holdings Limited and the 
remaining 25% ownership interest of the 
Group’s German operations from the 
minority shareholders. On 4 June 2014 
Clipper Logistics plc was admitted to 
the premium segment of the London 
Stock Exchange and Clipper Group 
Holdings Limited was no longer the 
parent company.

Clipper Logistics plc IFRS 3 states that it does not apply to a 
combination of entities or businesses 
under common control. Accordingly, 
the consolidated information of the 
Clipper Group has been prepared 
to reflect the combination of the 
restructured Clipper Group as if it had 
occurred from 1 May 2010, being the 
earliest comparative period reported 
by the restructured Group.

The Group reorganisation is a 
combination of entities under common 
control; and consolidated using a 
pooling of interests basis. This treats the 
restructured group as if it was formed 
in May 2010 and a merger reserve 
has been included to reflect this, with 
a balance of £6,006,000 after the 
acquisition of the fellow subsidiaries 
from Clipper Group Holdings Limited as 
part of the Group reorganisation.

b. Consolidations
The consolidated Financial Statements 
comprise the Financial Statements of 
the Group and its subsidiaries as at 
30 April 2019. Control is achieved when 
the Group is exposed, or has rights, to 
variable returns from its involvement 
with the investee and has the ability to 
affect those returns through its power 
over the investee. Specifically, the 
Group controls an investee if, and only 
if, the Group has:

/  power over the investee (i.e., existing 
rights that give it the current ability to 
direct the relevant activities of the 
investee);

/  exposure, or rights, to variable returns 

from its involvement with the 
investee; and

/  the ability to use its power over the 

investee to affect its returns.

Generally, there is a presumption that 
a majority of voting rights result in 
control. To support this presumption 
and when the Group has less than a 
majority of the voting or similar rights 
of an investee, the Group considers all 
relevant facts and circumstances in 
assessing whether it has power over an 
investee, including:

/  the contractual arrangement with 

the other vote holders of the 
investee;

/  rights arising from other contractual 

arrangements; and

/  the Group’s voting rights and 

potential voting rights.

The Group re-assesses whether or 
not it controls an investee if facts and 
circumstances indicate that there are 
changes to one or more of the three 
elements of control. Consolidation of 
a subsidiary begins when the Group 
obtains control over the subsidiary and 
ceases when the Group loses control of 
the subsidiary. Assets, liabilities, income 
and expenses of a subsidiary acquired 
or disposed of during the year are 

included in the consolidated Financial 
Statements from the date the Group 
gains control until the date the Group 
ceases to control the subsidiary.

Profit or loss and each component 
of other comprehensive income are 
attributed to the equity holders of the 
parent of the Group and to any non-
controlling interests, even if this results 
in the non-controlling interests having 
a deficit balance. When necessary, 
adjustments are made to the Financial 
Statements of subsidiaries to bring their 
accounting policies into line with the 
Group’s accounting policies. All intra-
group assets and liabilities, equity, 
income, expenses and cash flows relating 
to transactions between members 
of the Group are eliminated in full on 
consolidation. The Financial Statements of 
subsidiaries used in the preparation of the 
consolidated Financial Statements are 
prepared on the same reporting year as 
the Parent Company.

A change in the ownership interest of 
a subsidiary without loss of control is 
accounted for as an equity transaction.

If the Group loses control over a 
subsidiary, it derecognises the related 
assets (including goodwill), liabilities, 
non-controlling interest and other 
components of equity while any 
resultant gain or loss is recognised in 
profit or loss. Any investment retained is 
recognised at fair value.

The purchase method of accounting is 
used to account for the acquisition of 
subsidiaries by the Group other than those 
included in the restructuring referred 
to above. The cost of an acquisition 
is measured as the fair value of the 
assets given, equity instruments issued 
and liabilities incurred or assumed 
at the date of exchange, plus costs 
directly attributable to the acquisition. 
Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities 
and contingent liabilities assumed in a 
business combination are measured 
initially at their fair values at the 
acquisition date, irrespective of the extent 
of any minority interest. The excess of the 
cost of acquisition over the fair value of 
the Group’s share of the identifiable net 
assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. 
If the cost of acquisition is less than the fair 
value of the net assets of the subsidiary 
acquired, the difference is recognised 
directly in the income statement.

c. Equity-accounted investees
An investment in an entity over which 
the Group has significant influence, 
but is not a subsidiary, is accounted 
for under the equity method of 
accounting. Equity-accounted 
investees could comprise associates 
or joint ventures. An associate is 
an entity in which the Group has 
significant influence over the financial 
and operating policy decisions of the 
investee but not control or joint control 

over those policies. A joint venture is 
an arrangement in which the Group 
has joint control, whereby the Group 
has rights to the net assets of the 
arrangement, rather than rights to its 
assets and obligations for its liabilities.

Under the equity method, an 
investment is initially recognised 
at cost and adjusted thereafter to 
recognise the Group’s share of the 
profit or loss and other comprehensive 
income of the investee, until the date 
on which significant influence or joint 
control ceases.

2.4 Segment reporting
Operating segments are reported in 
a manner consistent with the internal 
reporting provided to the Company’s 
Board of Directors, collectively the 
Group’s chief operating decision 
maker, to assess performance and 
allocate capital or resources.

2.5 Foreign currency translation
a. Functional and presentation currency
Items included in the Financial 
Statements of each of the Group’s 
entities are measured using the 
currency of the primary economic 
environment in which the entity 
operates (“the functional currency”). 
The combined Financial Statements  
are presented in Pounds Sterling,  
which is the Company’s functional  
and presentation currency.

b. Transactions and balances
Foreign currency transactions are 
translated into the functional currency 
using the exchange rates prevailing 
at the dates of the transactions. 
Foreign exchange gains and losses 
resulting from the settlement of 
such transactions and from the 
translation at year-end exchange 
rates of monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies are 
recognised in the income statement. 
Non-monetary items that are measured 
in terms of historical cost in a foreign 
currency are translated using the 
exchange rates at the dates of the 
initial transactions. Non-monetary items 
measured at fair value in a foreign 
currency are translated using the 
exchange rates at the date when the 
fair value is determined. The gain or loss 
arising on translation of non-monetary 
items measured at fair value is treated 
in line with the recognition of the gain 
or loss on the change in fair value of 
the item (i.e., translation differences 
on items whose fair value gain or loss 
is recognised in other comprehensive 
income or profit or loss are also 
recognised in other comprehensive 
income or profit or loss, respectively).

75

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

2. Summary of significant accounting 
policies continued
2.5 Foreign currency translation 
continued
c. Translation of foreign operations
On consolidation, the assets and 
liabilities of foreign operations are 
translated into Pounds Sterling at 
the rate of exchange prevailing 
at the reporting date and their 
statements of profit or loss are 
translated at the average exchange 
rates for the year. The exchange 
differences arising on translation for 
consolidation are recognised in other 
comprehensive income.

Any goodwill arising on the acquisition 
of a foreign operation and any fair 
value adjustments to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities arising 
on the acquisition are treated as assets 
and liabilities of the foreign operation 
and translated at the spot rate of 
exchange at the reporting date.

2.6 Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated 
at historical cost less depreciation and 
impairment. Historical cost includes 
expenditure that is directly attributable 
to the acquisition of the items.

Subsequent costs are included in the 
asset’s carrying amount or recognised 
as a separate asset, as appropriate, 
only when it is probable that future 
economic benefits associated with the 
item will flow to the Group and the cost 
of the item can be measured reliably. 
The carrying amount of any replaced 
part is derecognised. All other repairs 
and maintenance are charged to the 
income statement during the financial 
period in which they are incurred.

Depreciation is calculated using the 
straight-line method to allocate assets’ 
cost to their residual values over their 
estimated useful lives, as follows:

/  leasehold property: over the length 

of the lease;

/  plant and machinery: 2–20 years; 

and

/  motor vehicles: 4–8 years.

Residual values and useful lives are 
reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, 
at each balance sheet date.

An asset’s carrying amount is written 
down immediately to its recoverable 
amount if the asset’s carrying 
amount is greater than its estimated 
recoverable amount.

An item of property, plant and 
equipment and any significant part 
initially recognised is derecognised upon 

76

disposal or when no future economic 
benefits are expected from its use or 
disposal. Any gain or loss arising on 
derecognition of the asset (calculated as 
the difference between the net disposal 
proceeds and the carrying amount of 
the asset) is included within ‘other net 
gains or losses’ in the income statement 
when the asset is derecognised.

2.7 Intangible assets
a. Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the 
cost of an acquisition over the fair 
value of the Group’s share of the net 
identifiable assets of the acquired 
entity or operation at the date of 
acquisition. If the cost of acquisition is 
less than the fair value of the net assets 
acquired, the difference is ‘negative 
goodwill’ and is recognised in the 
income statement immediately.

Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries 
is included in ‘intangible assets’. 
Separately recognised goodwill is 
tested annually for impairment and 
carried at cost less accumulated 
impairment losses. Impairment losses on 
goodwill are not reversed. Gains and 
losses on the disposal of an entity 
include the carrying amount of 
goodwill relating to the entity sold. 
Goodwill is allocated to cash-
generating units for the purpose of 
impairment testing. The allocation is 
made to those cash-generating units 
or groups of cash-generating units 
that are expected to benefit from the 
business combination in which the 
goodwill arose.

b. Contracts and licences
Intangible assets acquired separately 
are measured on initial recognition 
at cost. The cost of intangible assets 
acquired in a business combination 
is their fair value at the date of 
acquisition. Following initial recognition, 
intangible assets are carried at cost 
less any accumulated amortisation 
and accumulated impairment losses. 
Internally generated intangibles, 
excluding capitalised development 
costs, are not capitalised and the 
related expenditure is reflected in 
profit or loss in the period in which the 
expenditure is incurred.

Intangible assets are amortised over 
the useful economic life (five to ten 
years) and assessed for impairment 
whenever there is an indication that the 
intangible asset may be impaired.

c. Computer software
Acquired computer software licences 
are capitalised on the basis of the costs 
incurred to acquire and bring to use 

the specific software. These costs are 
amortised over their estimated useful 
lives (three to five years).

Costs associated with developing 
or maintaining computer software 
programmes are recognised as 
an expense as incurred. Costs that 
are directly associated with the 
development of identifiable and 
unique software products controlled 
by the Group, and that will probably 
generate economic benefits exceeding 
costs beyond one year, are recognised 
as intangible assets. Costs include the 
software development employee costs 
and overheads directly attributable to 
bringing the asset into use.

Computer software development costs 
recognised as assets are amortised 
over their estimated useful lives (not 
exceeding five years).

2.8 Impairment of non-financial assets
The Group assesses, at each reporting 
date, whether there is an indication 
that an asset may be impaired. If any 
indication exists, or when annual 
impairment testing for an asset is 
required, the Group estimates the 
asset’s recoverable amount. An asset’s 
recoverable amount is the higher of 
an asset’s or cash-generating unit’s 
(“CGU”) fair value less costs to sell and 
its value in use.

Where the asset does not generate 
cash flows that are independent from 
other assets, the Group estimates the 
recoverable amount of the CGU to 
which the asset belongs.

When the carrying amount of an 
asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable 
amount, the asset is considered 
impaired and is written down to its 
recoverable amount.

In assessing value in use, the estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their 
present value using a pre-tax discount 
rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money 
and the risks specific to the asset.

In determining fair value less costs 
to sell, recent market transactions 
are taken into account. If no such 
transactions can be identified, an 
appropriate valuation model is used. 
These calculations are corroborated by 
valuation multiples, quoted share prices 
for publicly traded companies or other 
available fair value indicators.

An impairment loss is recognised as 
an expense immediately. Where an 
impairment loss subsequently reverses, 
the carrying amount of the asset 

Clipper Logistics plc (or CGU) is increased to the revised 
estimate of its recoverable amount, but 
so that the increased carrying amount 
does not exceed the carrying amount 
that would have been determined had 
no impairment loss been recognised 
for the asset (or CGU) in prior years. 
A reversal of an impairment loss is 
recognised as income immediately.

The Group bases its impairment 
calculation on detailed budgets 
and forecast calculations, which are 
prepared separately for each of the 
Group’s CGUs to which the individual 
assets are allocated. These budgets and 
forecast calculations generally cover a 
minimum period of two years. For longer 
periods, a long-term growth rate is 
calculated and applied to projected 
future cash flows after the second year.

2.9 Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial assets 
in the following categories: amortised 
cost, at fair value through profit or 
loss and fair value through other 
comprehensive income. 

The classification depends 
on the purpose for which the 
financial assets were acquired. 
Management determines the 
classification of its financial assets 
at initial recognition. At 30 April 2019 
the Group held no financial assets 
categorised as fair value through other 
comprehensive income.

Financial assets at fair value through 
profit or loss
Financial assets at fair value through 
profit or loss are financial assets held for 
trading. A financial asset is classified in 
this category if acquired principally for 
the purpose of selling in the short term. 
Derivatives are also categorised as held 
for trading unless they are designated 
as hedges. Assets in this category are 
classified as current assets.

Investments are initially recognised at 
fair value plus transaction costs for all 
financial assets not carried at fair value 
through profit or loss. Financial assets 
carried at fair value through profit or 
loss are initially recognised at fair value 
and transaction costs are expensed in 
the income statement. Financial assets 
are derecognised when the rights to 
receive cash flows from the investments 
have expired or have been transferred 
and the Group has transferred 
substantially all risks and rewards 
of ownership.

Financial assets at fair value through 
other comprehensive and financial 
assets at fair value through profit or loss 
are subsequently carried at fair value.

Gains or losses arising from changes 
in the fair value of the ‘financial assets 
at fair value through profit or loss’ 
category are presented in the income 

statement within ‘other net gains’ in the 
period in which they arise.

Dividend income from financial assets 
at fair value through profit or loss is 
recognised in the income statement as 
part of other income when the Group’s 
right to receive payments is established.

The Group assesses at each balance 
sheet date whether there is objective 
evidence that a financial asset or a 
Group of financial assets is impaired.

Impairment testing of trade receivables 
is described in note 2.12.

2.10 Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower 
of cost and net realisable value. 
Cost includes all costs incurred in 
bringing each product to its present 
location and condition. Cost is 
determined using the first-in, first-out 
(FIFO) method. Net realisable value 
is the estimated selling price in the 
ordinary course of business, less 
applicable variable selling expenses.

2.11 Vehicles on consignment
Vehicles held on consignment from 
manufacturers are included in the 
statement of financial position where 
it is considered that the Group enjoys 
the benefits and carries the risks 
of ownership.

2.12 Trade receivables
Trade receivables are recognised 
initially at fair value and subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method, less provision 
for impairment. 

The Group applies the simplified 
approach permitted by IFRS 9, 
which requires the application of 
a lifetime expected loss provision 
to trade receivables. The provision 
calculations are based on historic 
credit losses applied to older balances. 
This approach is followed for all 
receivables unless there are specific 
circumstances which would render the 
receivable irrecoverable and therefore 
require a specific provision. A provision 
is made against trade receivables 
until such time as the Group believes 
the amount to be irrecoverable, after 
which the trade receivable balance is 
written off.

The carrying amount of the asset 
is reduced through the use of 
an allowance account, and the 
amount of the loss is recognised 
in the income statement within 
‘administration expenses’.

When a trade receivable is 
uncollectable, it is written off against 
the allowance account for trade 
receivables. Subsequent recoveries 
of amounts previously written off 
are credited against ‘administration 
expenses’ in the income statement.

2.13 Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents includes 
cash in hand, deposits held at call with 
banks, other short-term highly liquid 
investments with original maturities 
of three months or less, and bank 
overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are shown 
within borrowings in current liabilities 
on the statement of financial position. 
Cash and cash equivalents are stated 
net of bank overdrafts in the cash 
flow statement.

2.14 Trade payables
Trade payables are recognised 
initially at fair value and subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method.

2.15 Consignment inventory payables
Inventories of commercial vehicles 
are usually funded under stocking 
finance plans offered by either 
the manufacturer’s own finance 
arm, or third party funders. 
Amounts outstanding are included in 
trade and other payables.

2.16 Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially 
at fair value, net of transaction costs 
incurred. Borrowings are subsequently 
stated at amortised cost; any 
difference between the proceeds 
(net of transaction costs) and the 
redemption value is recognised in the 
income statement over the period 
of the borrowings using the effective 
interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current 
liabilities unless the Group has an 
unconditional right to defer settlement 
of the liability for at least 12 months 
after the balance sheet date.

2.17 Income tax
Current tax assets and liabilities are 
measured at the amount expected 
to be recovered from or paid to the 
taxation authorities, based on tax 
rates and laws that are enacted or 
substantively enacted by the balance 
sheet date.

Deferred income tax is provided in 
full, using the liability method, on 
temporary differences arising between 
the tax bases of assets and liabilities 
and their carrying amounts in the 
Financial Statements.

However, the deferred income tax is 
not accounted for, if it arises from initial 
recognition of goodwill or an asset 
or liability in a transaction other than 
a business combination that at the 
time of the transaction affects neither 
accounting nor taxable profits or losses.

77

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

c. Share based payments
IFRS 2 requires the recognition of 
equity settled share based payments 
at fair value at the date of the 
grant. All equity settled share based 
payments are ultimately recognised as 
an expense in the income statement 
with a corresponding credit to share 
based payment reserve.

If vesting periods or other non-
market vesting conditions apply, 
the expense is allocated over the 
vesting period based on the best 
available estimate of the number of 
shares expected to vest. Estimates are 
revised subsequently if there is any 
indication that the number of shares 
expected to vest differs from previous 
estimates. Any cumulative adjustment 
prior to vesting is recognised in the 
current period. Upon exercise of share 
options, the proceeds received net 
of attributable transaction costs are 
credited to share capital and, where 
appropriate, share premium.

2.19 Provisions
Provisions for items such as dilapidations 
and legal claims are recognised 
when: the Group has a present legal 
or constructive obligation as a result 
of past events; it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required to 
settle the obligation; and the amount 
has been reliably estimated.

Where there are a number of similar 
obligations, the likelihood that an 
outflow will be required in settlement 
is determined by considering the class 
of obligations as a whole. A provision 
is recognised even if the likelihood of 
an outflow with respect to any one 
item included in the same class of 
obligations may be small.

Provisions are measured at the present 
value of the expenditures expected 
to be required to settle the obligation 
using a pre-tax rate that reflects current 
market assessments of the time value 
of money and the risks specific to the 
obligation. The increase in the provision 
due to passage of time is recognised as 
interest expense.

2.20 Revenue recognition
The Group has applied IFRS 15 ‘Revenue 
from Contracts with Customers’ using 
the cumulative effect method.

Comparative information in both the 
income statement and the statement 
of financial position has not been 
restated and continues to be reported 
under IAS 18 ‘Revenue’ as there was no 
material adjustment on transition.

The Group recognises revenue from 
contracts with customers as the 
performance obligations to deliver 
products and services under these 
contracts are satisfied. The Group’s 
contracts are typically for the provision 
of warehouse or transport services 
and normally comprise a single 
performance obligation being a series 
of goods or services satisfied over time.

Revenue is recognised based on the 
amount of consideration expected to 
be received in exchange for satisfying 
the performance obligations.

a. Sale of goods
Revenue from the sale of goods 
is recognised when control of the 
goods has passed from the Group 
to the buyer. The transfer of control is 
at a point in time or over a period of 
time. For vehicles, this is generally on 
registration; for other goods, it is when 
despatched, or packaged and made 
available for collection.

b. Services other than repair and 
maintenance contracts
Revenue relating to costs to serve the 
customer are invoiced in line with the 
customer receiving and consuming 
benefits under the contract via the 
‘open book’ charging mechanism 
with either a fixed or variable 
management fee and is recognised 
in the period in which it is earned. 
Performance obligations are satisfied 
over time and measured against 
minimum service level agreements. 
There has been no change in the timing 
of revenue recognition on application 
of IFRS 15.

In ‘closed book’ contracts, revenue 
is typically recognised based on a 
pre-agreed price and is typically 
per unit/parcel/delivery or pallet etc. 
Revenue based on a pre-agreed 
rate-card is recognised as services 
are provided, in line with the customer 
receiving and consuming benefits 
under the contract. There has been 
no change in the timing of revenue 
recognition on application of IFRS 15.

2. Summary of significant accounting 
policies continued
2.17 Income tax continued
Deferred income tax is determined 
using tax rates (and laws) that have 
been enacted or substantially enacted 
by the balance sheet date and are 
expected to apply when the related 
deferred income tax asset is realised 
or the deferred income tax liability is 
settled. Deferred income tax assets 
are recognised to the extent that it 
is probable that future taxable profit 
will be available against which the 
temporary differences can be utilised.

Deferred income tax is provided 
on temporary differences arising 
on investments in subsidiaries and 
associates, except where the timing 
of the reversal of the temporary 
difference is controlled by the Group 
and it is probable that the temporary 
difference will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future.

Deferred income tax assets and 
liabilities are offset only if a legally 
enforceable right exists to set off current 
tax assets against current tax liabilities, 
the deferred income taxes relate to 
the same taxation authority and that 
authority permits the Group to make 
a single net payment.

2.18 Employee benefits
a. Pension obligations
Group companies operate various 
pension schemes. The schemes are 
generally funded through payments 
to insurance companies. The Group 
has only defined contribution plans. 
A defined contribution plan is a pension 
plan under which the Group pays fixed 
contributions into a separate entity.

For defined contribution plans, the 
Group pays contributions to privately 
administered pension insurance plans 
on a contractual or voluntary basis. 
The Group has no further payment 
obligations once the contributions 
have been paid. The contributions 
are recognised as employee benefit 
expense when they are due.

b. Profit-sharing and bonus plans
The Group recognises a liability 
and an expense for bonuses and 
profit-sharing, based on a formula 
that takes into consideration the 
profit attributable to the Company’s 
shareholders after certain adjustments. 
The Group recognises a provision where 
contractually obliged or where there 
is a past practice that has created a 
constructive obligation.

78

Clipper Logistics plc Fixed management fees are 
recognised over the contract term. 
Performance obligations are satisfied 
over time. There has been no change 
in the timing of revenue recognition on 
application of IFRS 15.

Variable management fees (a fixed 
percentage of costs) are recognised as 
the corresponding costs are incurred 
i.e. where the Group has the right to 
invoice the customer at an amount that 
corresponds directly with performance 
to date, the practical expedient is 
applied to recognise revenue at 
that amount.

Invoicing varies by contract but 
is typically either in line with work 
performed or initially on a budgeted 
volume basis with later adjustment 
to reflect actual activity. Where a 
contract contains elements of variable 
consideration, the Group will estimate 
the amount or revenue to which it will 
be entitled under the contract. 

Variable consideration can arise as 
a result of incentives, performance 
bonuses, penalties or other 
similar items. 

Variable revenue is recognised to the 
extent it is highly probable a significant 
revenue reversal will not occur in the 
future. There has been no change in 
the timing of revenue recognition on 
application of IFRS 15. 

The Group does not expect to have any 
contracts which include a significant 
financing arrangement and therefore 
does not adjust its transaction price for 
the time value of money.

Where payments are received in 
advance of revenue being recognised 
they are included as contract liabilities. 

Where revenue is recognised in 
advance of amounts being invoiced, 
it is reported as a contract receivable.

Calculation of contract assets and 
contract liabilities is therefore necessary 
at period ends, with client billing 
arrangements not always coinciding 
with the Group’s reporting periods. 
Revenue from open book contracts 
includes contributions to the capital 
cost of items used in the delivery of 
services, together with a finance 
charge. Judgment is required when 
determining the appropriate timing 
and amount of revenue that can 
be recognised, due to the different 
contractual arrangements in place.

c. Repair and maintenance contracts
Revenue is recognised over the life of 
the contract in proportion to the costs 
of providing the services.

d. Sales of services – property
At certain sites where the Group has 
entered into leases, arrangements have 
been entered into with third and/or 
related parties, under which the Group 
receives fees for property-related 
advisory services. Revenue earned 
from property-related advisory services 
is recognised in the consolidated 
income statement at fair value of the 
consideration receivable, net of VAT.

Management assesses the fees that are 
applicable to each specific transaction 
and recognises revenue in the income 
statement at the time of the underlying 
transaction. In forming the judgment, 
the Group considers whether the leases 
it has entered into are operating leases, 
whether the future rentals are at market 
value and accordingly whether the 
fees can be attributed to delivered 
property-related advisory services. 
Property-related advisory fees are 
recognised as services are provided. 
There has been no change in the 
timing of revenue recognition on the 
application of IFRS 15.

2.21 Supplier bonuses
Cost of sales are recognised net of 
vehicle manufacturers’ bonuses. 
These are recognised when the Group 
has met the relevant conditions. There is 
little judgment or estimation involved in 
computing the amounts.

2.22 Leases
Leases in which a significant portion 
of the risks and rewards of ownership 
are retained by the lessor are classified 
as operating leases. Payments made 
under operating leases (net of any 
incentives received from the lessor) 
are charged to the income statement 
on a straight-line basis over the period 
of the lease. The impact of IFRS 16 
on operating leases is described in 
note 2.26.

Assets held under finance leases,  
which transfer to the Group 
substantially all the risks and benefits 
incidental to ownership of the leased 
item, are capitalised at the inception 
of the lease, with a corresponding 
liability being recognised for the lower 
of the fair value of the leased asset 
and the present value of the minimum 
lease payments. Lease payments are 
apportioned between the reduction 
of the lease liability and finance 
charges in the income statement 

so as to achieve a constant rate of 
interest on the remaining balance of 
the liability. The property, plant and 
equipment acquired under finance 
leases is depreciated over the shorter 
of the estimated useful life of the asset 
and the lease term; where the lease 
contains an option to purchase which 
is expected to be exercised, the asset 
is depreciated over the useful life of the 
asset. The accounting policy adopted 
for finance leases is also applied to hire 
purchase agreements.

2.23 Dividend distribution
Dividend distribution to the Company’s 
shareholders is recognised as a 
liability in the Group’s Financial 
Statements in the period in which 
the dividends are approved by the 
Company’s shareholders.

2.24 Exceptional items
Items that are both material and 
non-recurring are presented as 
exceptional items within their relevant 
consolidated income statement 
category. The separate reporting of 
exceptional items helps provide a clearer 
indication of the Group’s underlying 
business performance.

Items which may give rise to 
classification as exceptional include, 
but are not limited to, restructuring of 
the business or depot network, asset 
impairments and litigation settlements.

2.25 Critical accounting estimates 
and judgments
The Group makes estimates and 
judgments concerning the future. 
The resulting accounting estimates 
will, by definition, seldom equal the 
related actual results. The estimates 
and assumptions that have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment 
to the carrying amounts of assets and 
liabilities within the next financial year 
are discussed below.

Revenue recognition
Judgment is required when determining 
the appropriate timing and amount of 
revenue to be recognised in the value-
added logistics segment. This is due to 
the various contractual arrangements 
in place, each with bespoke terms 
which can lead to different revenue 
recognition requirements.

Business combinations
In April 2019, the Group entered into 
a series of contracts, which when 
combined represented a business 
combination in accordance with IFRS 
3 ‘Business combinations’. The timing 
of when control passed was a 
significant judgment. See note 29 for 
further details.

79

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

2. Summary of significant accounting policies continued
2.26 Adoption of new and revised reporting standards
The Group has applied all accounting standards and interpretations issued by the IASB and IFRIC except for the following 
standards and interpretations which were in issue but not yet effective:

Effective date 
(annual periods 
beginning on  

or after)

1 January 2021

1 January 2020

1 January 2020

1 January 2020

1 January 2019

1 January 2019

1 January 2019

1 January 2019

1 January 2019

1 January 2019

Title

IFRS 17 ‘Insurance Contracts’

Amendments to References to the Conceptual Framework in IFRS Standards

Amendment to IFRS 3 Business Combinations

Amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 8: Definition of Material

Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2015–2017 Cycle

Amendments to IAS 19: Plan Amendment, Curtailment or Settlement

Amendments to IAS 28: Long-term Interests in Associates and Joint Ventures

IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments

Amendments to IFRS 9: Prepayment Features with Negative Compensation

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’

The effective dates stated above are 
those given in the original IASB/IFRIC 
standards and interpretations.

As the Group prepares its financial 
information in accordance with IFRS 
as adopted by the European Union, 
the application of new standards and 
interpretations will be subject to them 
having been endorsed for use in the EU 
via the EU Endorsement mechanism. 
In the majority of cases this will result 
in an effective date consistent with 
that given in the original standard 
or interpretation but the need for 
endorsement restricts the Group’s 
discretion to early adopt standards.

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from contracts with 
customers’ requires revenue to be 
recognised when a customer obtains 
control of a good or service and thus 
has the ability to direct the use and 
obtain the benefits from the good or 
service. It replaces IAS 18 ‘Revenue’ 
and IAS 11 ‘Construction contracts’  
and related interpretations.

The Group has amended its 
accounting policy appropriately (see 
note 2.20) but the impact of the new 
standard on the Group’s revenue and 
profit is not material. This reflects the 
relatively non-complex and largely 
standardised terms and conditions 
applicable to the Group’s revenue 
contracts. Accordingly, the Group has 
adopted IFRS 15 from 1 May 2018 and 
no adjustment has been recognised 
in opening equity at the date of 
initial application.

80

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ replaced 
the classification and measurement 
models for financial instruments in IAS 
39 with three classification categories: 
amortised cost, fair value through profit 
or loss and fair value through other 
comprehensive income.

Consistent with the non-complex nature 
of the Group’s financial instruments, 
the impact of the new standard is 
not material and therefore the Group 
adopted IFRS 9 from 1 May 2018 and 
no adjustment has been recognised 
in opening equity at the date of initial 
application. The Group has amended 
its accounting policy (see note 2.12) for 
the establishment of provisions against 
trade receivables to reflect the lifetime 
expected loss model (consistent with 
the simplified approach permitted 
under IFRS 9).

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ (“IFRS 16”) was issued in 
January 2016, replacing IAS 17 ‘Leases’ 
and associated interpretations IFRIC 4, 
SIC 15 and SIC 27. IFRS 16 will apply to 
annual periods beginning on or after 
1 January 2019. IFRS 16 will primarily 
change lease accounting for lessees. 
Lease agreements will give rise to the 
recognition of an asset representing the 
right to use the leased item and a loan 
obligation for future lease payables. 
Lease costs will be recognised in the 
form of depreciation of the right to use 
asset and interest on the lease liability 
replacing rental costs charged on a 
straight-line basis.

Under the transition rules, the Group 
will apply IFRS 16 using the modified 
retrospective approach with the 
cumulative effect of applying the 
standard recognised in retained 
earnings on 1 May 2019 with 
no restatement of comparative 
information. The Group will be taking 
available exemptions for short-term 
leases and low value leases (<£5,000).

The Group held a significant number 
of operating leases at 30 April 2019 
for which the future minimum lease 
payments amount to £194m as 
disclosed in note 24 to the Group 
Financial Statements. On adoption of 
IFRS 16, there will be a material impact 
on the balance sheet: (i) recognition 
of: a right of use asset of between 
£121m and £149m, a financial liability 
of between £153m and £175m, and a 
deferred tax asset of between £3m and 
£5m, (ii) derecognition of rent-related 
assets and liabilities of £4m, together 
resulting in a decrease to retained 
earnings of between £19m and £23m.

In the year ending 30 April 2020, IFRS 
16 is expected to increase operating 
profit by between £7m and £8m, 
finance costs by between £7m and 
£8m, all resulting in a reduction in profit 
before tax of between £0.5m and £1m, 
partially offset by deferred tax.

The Group will continue to implement 
and refine procedures and processes 
to apply the new requirements of IFRS 
16. As a result of this ongoing work, 
it is possible that there may be some 
changes to the adoption impact 
outlined above before the 30 April 2020 
results are issued. However, at this time 
these are not expected to be material.

Clipper Logistics plc For arrangements previously classified as finance leases, where the Group is a lessee, as the Group already recognised an 
asset and a related finance lease liability for the lease arrangement, the Directors do not anticipate that the application of 
IFRS 16 will have a significant impact on the amounts recognised in the Group Financial Statements at 30 April 2019.

There is no cash impact of adopting IFRS 16, with the repayment of the principal portion of the lease liability being classified as 
financing instead of operating cash flows.

The covenant requirements for the Group’s committed financing facilities are based on ‘Frozen GAAP’ and therefore are not 
impacted by the transition to IFRS 16.

3. Revenue
The Group has applied IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ with effect from 1 May 2018, using the cumulative effect method.

Comparative information has not been restated and continues to be reported under IAS 18.

The following practical expedients have been applied:

/  where the Group has a right to invoice the customer at an amount that corresponds directly with performance to date, for 

example according to an agreed rate-card, revenue is recognised at that amount; and

/  incremental costs of obtaining a contract have not been capitalised where the amortisation period for the asset is one year 

or less.

On adoption of IFRS 15, the Group has assessed its customer contracts and concluded that some of its activity within 
Technical Services is that of an agent rather than a principal and therefore it is more appropriate to recognise the commission 
element as revenue. The impact of this is a £5m reclassification between revenue and cost of sales. Other than this there has 
been no material impact on the adoption of IFRS 15.

Revenue is disaggregated into two distinct operating segments. This is consistent with the revenue information that is disclosed 
for each reportable segment under IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments’, as reported in note 4 to the Group Financial Statements.

Revenue recognised in the income statement is analysed as follows:

E-fulfilment & returns management services
Non e-fulfilment logistics

Value-added logistics services

Commercial vehicles
Inter-segment sales

Revenue from external customers

2019
Group
£’000

233,872 
145,286 

2018
Group
£’000

159,350
139,144

379,158

298,494

82,552
(1,539)

103,598
(1,977)

460,171

400,115

Non e-fulfilment logistics revenue includes £3,100,000 (2018: £4,200,000) in respect of property-related advisory services.

Geographical information – revenue from external customers:

UK
Germany
Rest of Europe

Revenue from external customers

2019
Group
£’000

389,028
25,044
46,099

2018
Group
£’000

351,409
21,059
27,647

460,171

400,115

Geography is determined by the location of the end customer.

The Group has no customers that in the years ended 30 April 2019 or 30 April 2018 accounted for greater than 10% of the total 
Group revenue.

Contract balances
The following table provides information about receivables, contract assets and contract liabilities from contracts.

Receivables, which are included in ‘Trade and other receivables’
Contract assets,which are included in ‘Trade and other receivables’
Contract liabilities,which are included in ‘Trade and other payables’

30 April 2019
£’000

 1 May 2018
£’000

57,372
16,111
24,557

43,314
5,991
16,016

The contract assets primarily relate to the Group’s right to consideration for work completed but not billed as at 30 April 2019. 
The contract assets are transferred to receivables when the rights become unconditional. The contract liabilities primarily 
relate to the advance consideration received from customers.

The amount recognised in revenue in the year ended 30 April 2019 from performance obligations satisfied in previous periods is 
£16,016.000. The amount of contract assets at 1 May 2018 transferred to trade receivables in 2019 amounted to £5,991,000. 

81

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

4. Segment information
For the Group, the Chief Operating Decision Maker (“CODM”) is the main Board of Directors. The CODM monitors the 
operating results of each business unit separately for the purposes of making decisions about resource allocation and 
performance assessment. Segment performance is evaluated based on operating profit or loss, both before and after 
exceptional or discontinuing items. This measurement basis excludes Group-wide central services and financing costs 
which are not allocated to operating segments.

For management purposes, the Group is organised into two main reportable segments:

/  value-added logistics services; and
/  commercial vehicles, including sales, servicing and repairs.

Within the value-added logistics services segment, the CODM also reviews performance of three separate business activities:

/  e-fulfilment & returns management services; 
/  non e-fulfilment logistics; and
/  central logistics overheads, being the costs of support services specific to the value-added logistics services segment, 

but which are impractical to allocate between the sub-segment activities.

These three separate business activities comprise one segment, having similar economic characteristics in terms of profitability 
and costs, customers and operating environment.

Inter-segment transactions are entered into under normal commercial terms and conditions and on an arm’s length basis 
that would also be available to unrelated third parties.

The following tables present profit information for continuing operations regarding the Group’s business segments for the two 
years ended 30 April 2019:

Earnings before interest & tax (“EBIT”):

E-fulfilment & returns management services
Non e-fulfilment logistics
Central logistics overheads

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles
Head office costs

Group EBIT

Amortisation of other intangible assets:

E-fulfilment & returns management services
Non e-fulfilment logistics
Central logistics overheads

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles
Head office costs

Group total

Share of tax and finance costs of equity-accounted investees:

Net finance costs
Income tax credit

Group total 

82

2019
Group
£’000

13,560
13,048
(5,551)

21,057
1,137
(1,981)

2018
Group
£’000

11,874
14,786
(5,688)

20,972
2,450
(2,568)

20,213

20,854

2019
Group
£’000

(510)
(675)
–

(1,185)
–
–

(1,185)

2019
Group
£’000

(50)
93

43

2018
Group
£’000

(462)
(632)
–

(1,094)
–
–

(1,094)

2018
Group
£’000

(35)
217

182

Clipper Logistics plc Operating profit and profit before income tax:

Operating profit:
E-fulfilment & returns management services
Non e-fulfilment logistics
Central logistics overheads

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles
Head office costs

Group operating profit before share of equity-accounted investees
Share of equity-accounted investees, net of tax

Operating profit

Finance costs
Finance income

Profit before income tax

The segment assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date are as follows:

At 30 April 2019:

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles

Segment assets/(liabilities)

Unallocated assets/(liabilities):
 / Cash and cash equivalents
 / Financial liabilities
 / Deferred tax
 / Income tax assets/(liabilities)

Total assets/(liabilities)

At 30 April 2018:

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles

Segment assets/(liabilities)

Unallocated assets/(liabilities):
 / Cash and cash equivalents
 / Financial liabilities
 / Deferred tax
 / Income tax assets/(liabilities)

Total assets/(liabilities)

2019
Group
£’000

13,506
12,373
(5,551)

20,328
1,137
(1,981)

19,484
(413)

19,071

(2,199)
58

16,930

2018
Group
£’000

12,483
14,154
(5,688)

20,949
2,450
(2,568)

20,831
(889)

19,942

(2,014)
38

17,966

Segment  
assets  
£’000

182,388
39,634

Segment 
liabilities 
£’000

(93,207)
(34,599)

222,022

(127,806)

3,517
–
–
–

–
(51,395)
(2,320)
(803)

225,539

(182,324)

Segment  
assets  
£’000

142,765
38,208

Segment 
liabilities 
£’000

(69,601)
(34,365)

180,973

(103,966)

2,275
–
–
–

–
(35,883)
(1,541)
(2,540)

183,248

(143,930)

Capital expenditure, depreciation and amortisation by segment in the year ended 30 April were as follows:

Capital expenditure:

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles

Total

2019
Group
£’000

25,802
614

26,416

2018
Group
£’000

12,313
725

13,038

Capital expenditure comprises additions to property, plant and equipment (note 14) and intangible assets (note 12).

83

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

4. Segment information continued
Depreciation:

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles

Total

Amortisation:

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles

Total

Non-current assets held by each geographical area are made up as follows:

United Kingdom
Germany
Rest of Europe

Total

5. Staff costs

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs for the defined contribution scheme
Share based payments

Total

The average monthly number of employees during the year was made up as follows:

Warehousing
Distribution
Service and maintenance
Administration

Total

Key management compensation (including Executive Directors):

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs for the defined contribution scheme
Share based payments

Total

84

2019
Group
£’000

6,691
735

7,426

2019
Group
£’000

1,972
1

1,973

2019
Group
£’000

92,373
3,890
5,363

101,626

2019
Group
£’000

125,089
11,840
2,649
(1,178)

138,400

2019
Group
Number

3,828
505
252
1,055

5,640

2019
Group
£’000

3,102
425
178
(1,291)

2,414

2018
Group
£’000

5,701
693

6,394

2018
Group
£’000

1,616
5

1,621

2018
Group
£’000

80,789
4,103
552

85,444

2018
Group
£’000

102,032
9,853
1,768
1,219

114,872

2018
Group
Number

3,056
468
447
560

4,531

2018
Group
£’000

2,873
396
328
1,026

4,623

Clipper Logistics plc Directors’ emoluments:

Aggregate emoluments excluding share based payments on unvested awards
Value of share options vested during the year
Pension costs for the defined contribution scheme

Total

The number of Directors who were accruing benefits under a Group Pension Scheme is as follows:

Defined contribution plans

6. Group operating profit
This is stated after charging:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – owned assets
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – leased assets
Amortisation of intangible assets (included within administration and other expenses)

Total depreciation and amortisation expense

Operating lease rentals:
 / Vehicles, plant and equipment
 / Land and buildings

Auditor’s remuneration:
 / Audit of the Group Financial Statements
 / Audit of the subsidiaries
 / Non-audit fees

Total fees paid to the Group’s auditors

Operating profit is stated after (charging) or crediting:

Other net losses or net gains:
 / Profit on sales of property, plant and equipment
 / Dealership contributions
 / Rental income
 / Net costs of non-recurring event

Total net losses or net gains

2019
Group
£’000

1,220
–
10

1,230

2018
Group
£’000

1,214
72
21

1,307

2019
Group
Number

2

2018
Group
Number

2

2019
Group
£’000

2,938
4,488
1,973

9,399

2018
Group
£’000

2,976
3,418
1,621

8,015

10,306
25,847

10,338
20,940

149
111
–

260

2019
Group
£’000

124
98
51
(600)

(327)

Profit on sales of property, plant and equipment includes £nil (2018: £2,151,000) of profit realised on the sale of a 
freehold property.

7. Dividends 

Final dividend for the prior year of 5.6 pence (2018: 4.8 pence) per share
Interim dividend for the year of 3.2 pence (2018: 2.8 pence) per share

Total dividends paid

2019
Group
£’000

5,685
3,249

8,934

Proposed final dividend for the year ended 30 April 2019 of 6.5 pence (2018: 5.6 pence)  
per share

6,605

5,681

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and has not been 
included as a liability in these Financial Statements. The proposed dividend is payable to all shareholders on the Register 
of Members on 20 September 2019. The payment of this dividend will not have any tax consequences for the Group.

85

69
99
–

168

2018
Group
£’000

2,203
136
59
–

2,398

2018
Group
£’000

4,814
2,808

7,622

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

8. Finance costs

On bank loans and overdrafts
On hire purchase agreements
Amortisation of debt issue costs
Commercial vehicle stocking interest
Invoice discounting
Other interest payable

2019
Group
£’000

691
953
130
316
94
15

2018
Group
£’000

547
926
114
339
62
26

Total interest expense for financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

2,199

2,014

9. Finance income

Bank interest
Other interest
Amounts receivable from related parties

Total interest income for financial assets measured at amortised cost

10. Income tax expense
a. Tax charged in the income statement:

Current income tax:
UK and foreign corporation tax
Amounts under/(over) provided in previous years

Total income tax on continuing operations

Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
Amounts under/(over) provided in previous years
Impact of change in tax laws and rates

Total deferred tax

2019
Group
£’000

–
6
52

58

2019
Group
£’000

3,263
(724)

2,539

280
775
(70)

985

2018
Group
£’000

2
1
35

38

2018
Group
£’000

4,249
(230)

4,019

(355)
(2)
23

(334)

Tax expense in the income statement on continuing operations

3,524

3,685

The adjustment to the amounts provided in the previous year relates to a greater proportion of capital expenditure being 
treated as eligible for capital allowances and the election of ‘roll-over’ relief against a chargeable gain arising on a 
property disposal. 

b. Tax relating to items charged or credited to other comprehensive income:
There are no tax consequences of any of the items included in other comprehensive income.

c. Reconciliation of income tax charge:
The income tax expense in the income statement for the year differs from the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK. 
The differences are reconciled below:

Profit before taxation from continuing operations
Standard rate of corporation tax in UK
Tax on profit on ordinary activities at standard rate
Share of equity-accounted investees, already net of tax
Expenses not allowable for tax purposes
Tax (over)/under provided in previous years
Difference in tax rates overseas
Deferred tax rate difference

Total tax expense reported in the income statement

86

2019
Group
£’000

16,930
19.00%
3,217
78
235
51
13
(70)

3,524

2018
Group
£’000

17,966
19.00%
3,414
169
194
(232)
117
23

3,685

Clipper Logistics plc d. Deferred tax in the statement of financial position:

(Charged)/
credited to 
income 
statement

Foreign 
currency 
adjustment

Brought 
forward

(Charged)/
credited to 
share based 
payment 
reserve

Acquisitions

Tax effect of temporary differences due to:
Share based payments
Other timing differences

Deferred tax asset

Intangible assets
Accelerated capital allowances
Other timing differences

Deferred tax liability

Net deferred tax 

581
401

982

(1,737)
(739)
(47)

(2,523)

(1,541)

(216)
127

(89)

180
(1,082)
6

(896)

(985)

–
(8)

(8)

–
–
–

–

214
–

214

–
–
–

–

(8)

214

–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–

Tax effect of temporary differences due to:
Share based payments
Other timing differences

Deferred tax asset

Intangible assets
Accelerated capital allowances
Other timing differences

Deferred tax liability

Net deferred tax 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
income 
statement

Foreign 
currency 
adjustment

Brought 
forward

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
share based 
payment 
reserve

Acquisitions

873
196

1,069

(150)
(512)
(54)

(716)

353

(137)
131

(6)

231
102
7

340

334

–
4

4

–
–
–

–

4

(155)
–

(155)

–
–
–

–

–
70

70

(1,818)
(329)
–

(2,147)

(155)

(2,077)

At  
30 April  
2019 
£’000

579
520

1,099

(1,557)
(1,821)
(41)

(3,419)

(2,320)

At 
30 April 
2018 
£’000

581
401

982

(1,737)
(739)
(47)

(2,523)

(1,541)

Legislation to reduce the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 17% with effect from 1 April 2020 was substantively enacted 
at 30 April 2018. A rate of 17% (2018: 17%) has been applied in the measurement of the Group’s UK deferred tax assets and 
liabilities in the year.

11. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share amounts are calculated by dividing profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of 
the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share 
amounts are calculated by dividing the profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the Company by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year plus the weighted average number of ordinary shares 
that would be issued on conversion of all the potentially dilutive instruments into ordinary shares.

The following reflects the income and share data used in the earnings per share computation:

Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the Company

Basic weighted average number of shares (thousands)
Basic earnings per share

Diluted weighted average number of shares (thousands)
Diluted earnings per share

2019
Group
£’000

2018
Group
£’000

13,406

14,281

2019 
Group

101,512
13.2p

102,061
13.1p

2018 
Group

100,338
14.2p

101,358
14.1p

87

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

12. Intangible assets

Cost:
At 1 May 2017
Additions
Disposals
Acquisitions
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2018

Additions
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2019

Accumulated amortisation:
At 1 May 2017
Charge for the year
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2018

Charge for the year
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2019

Net book value:

At 1 May 2017

At 30 April 2018

At 30 April 2019

Contracts, 
customer 
relationships  
and licences 
Group 
£’000

Goodwill 
Group 
£’000

Computer  
software 
Group 
£’000

23,252
–
–
2,699
–

25,951

–
–
–

2,038
–
–
9,580
5

11,623

–
–
–

25,951

11,623

1,153
1,094
–
5

2,252

1,185
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

2,271
1,060
(3)
740
21

4,089

2,096
–
(12)

6,173

1,658
527
–
8

2,193

788
–
(12)

3,437

2,969

23,252

25,951

25,951

885

9,371

8,186

613

1,896

3,204

Total 
Group 
£’000

27,561
1,060
(3)
13,019
26

41,663

2,096
–
(12)

43,747

2,811
1,621
–
13

4,445

1,973
–
(12)

6,406

24,750

37,218

37,341

The average remaining useful life of contracts and licences at 30 April 2019 is 7.5 years (2018: 8.5 years).

13. Impairment test for goodwill
The carrying amount of goodwill has been allocated to each CGU as follows:

Value-added logistics services
Commercial vehicles

Total

2019
Group
£’000

20,025
5,926

25,951

2018
Group
£’000

20,025
5,926

25,951

A CGU is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows 
from other assets or groups of assets. The recoverable amount of a CGU is determined based on value-in-use calculations.

The value-in-use calculations have used pre-tax cash flow projections based on the Board approved business plans for the 
three years ending 30 April 2022.

The Board approved business plans for the value-added logistics services segment take into account the annualised impact 
of contract wins in the year ended 30 April 2019 as well as confirmed new and ceasing contracts. The key judgment is the 
assumed new contract wins during the business plan period, which has been based on historical experience.

Subsequent cash flows are extrapolated using an estimated long-term growth rate of between 3.0% and 5.0% (2018: 3.3%) 
to perpetuity (2018: 2028). The cash flows have then been discounted using a pre-tax risk adjusted discount rate of between 
8.5% and 10.3% (2018: 8.5% and 10.3%). The forecasts of foreign operations are translated at the exchange rate ruling at the 
year end.

The Directors have concluded that no reasonably foreseeable change in the key assumptions would give rise to 
an impairment.

88

Clipper Logistics plc 14. Property, plant and equipment

Cost:
At 1 May 2017
Additions
Acquisitions
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2018

Additions
Acquisitions
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2019

Accumulated depreciation:
At 1 May 2017
Charge for the year
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2018

Charge for the year
Disposals
Foreign currency adjustment

At 30 April 2019

Net book value:

At 1 May 2017

At 30 April 2018

At 30 April 2019

Freehold  
property 
Group 
£’000

Leasehold  
property 
Group 
£’000

Motor  
vehicles 
Group 
£’000

Plant, 
machinery, 
fixtures & 
fittings 
Group 
£’000

55,037
7,852
771
(651)
180

63,189

19,673
–
(742)
(98)

Total 
Group 
£’000

64,212
11,978
4,813
(5,279)
270

75,994

24,320
–
(1,707)
(137)

4,293
3,640
102
–
7

8,042

3,999
–
(212)
(4)

4,882
486
80
(768)
83

4,763

648
–
(753)
(35)

11,825

4,623

82,022

98,470

2,277
499
–
3

2,779

883
(212)
(2)

2,388
844
(620)
23

2,635

791
(602)
(17)

20,648
5,017
(170)
87

25,582

5,752
(527)
(62)

25,313
6,394
(824)
113

30,996

7,426
(1,341)
(81)

3,448

2,807

30,745

37,000

2,016

5,263

8,377

2,494

2,128

1,816

34,389

37,607

51,277

38,899

44,998

61,470

–
–
3,860
(3,860)
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
34
(34)
–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–

–

Included within property, plant and equipment are amounts held under finance lease contracts. At 30 April 2019, the net book 
value of these assets was £39,681,000 (2018: £28,257,000). Total additions include £18,698,000 (2018: £5,129,000) under finance 
lease contracts or specific bank loans.

Additions to plant, machinery, fixtures & fittings include £2,843,000 (2018: £1,587,000) in respect of assets in the course 
of construction.

15. Interest in equity-accounted investees

Brought forward
Share of (loss) after tax for the period

Carried forward

2019
Group
£’000

1,278
(413)

865

2018
Group
£’000

2,167
(889)

1,278

The Company owns 50% of the issued capital and voting rights of Clicklink Logistics Limited (“Clicklink”), a company 
incorporated in Great Britain and registered in England and Wales. Clicklink provides services in respect of the sortation, 
fulfilment and delivery of one-man orders to Click and Collect customer collection points in the UK. On 1 November 2016 
the Company subscribed for 1,000,000 A ordinary shares of £1 each in Clicklink, for aggregate consideration of £1,950,000. 
Clicklink commenced trading on 1 November 2016 and has a 31 January financial period end.

Share of loss after tax for the period arises from nine months audited accounts and three months unaudited 
management accounts.

89

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

15. Interest in equity-accounted investees continued
Summarised financial information from Clicklink’s audited accounts for the year ended 31 January 2019 is set 
out below:

Current assets
Non-current assets
Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities

Equity attributable to owners of the company

Revenue
Operating (loss)/profit
Interest payable and similar charges
Income tax credit/(expense)

(Loss)/profit for the period

16. Inventories

Component parts and consumable stores
Commercial vehicles
Commercial vehicles on consignment

Total inventories net of provision for obsolescence

See below for the movements in the provision for obsolescence:

At 1 May 2017
Charged for the year
Utilised

At 30 April 2018

Charged for the year
Utilised

At 30 April 2019

31 January
2019 
£’000

31 January
2018 
£’000

6,818
4,349
(5,611)
(4,015)

1,541

6,331
4,359
(5,001)
(2,962)

2,727

Year ended
31 January
2019 
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2018 
£’000

22,616
(1,381)
(91)
286

(1,186)

2019
Group
£’000

5,271
4,195
14,583

24,049

19,730
(1,933)
(70)
396

(1,607)

2018
Group
£’000

4,901
3,199
13,999

22,099

Group 
£’000

87
128
(103)

112

82
(35)

159

The cost of inventories recognised as an expense amounted to £89,917,000 (2018: £108,599,000).

Included within commercial vehicles is £1,001,000 (2018: £941,000) relating to assets held under hire purchase agreements.

90

Clipper Logistics plc 17. Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Less: provision for impairment of receivables

Trade receivables – net

Other receivables
Amounts receivable from related parties (see note 27)
Contract assets
Prepayments

Total trade and other receivables

2019
Group
£’000

57,688
(316)

57,372

4,328
2,089
16,111
16,447

96,347

2018
Group
£’000

43,769
(455)

43,314

3,461
5,785
5,991
14,879

73,430

The contract asset receivables relate to the Group’s rights to consideration for work completed but not billed at the reporting 
date. They are transferred to receivables when the amounts are invoiced.

See note 26 on credit risk of trade receivables, which explains how the Group manages and measures credit quality of trade 
receivables that are neither past due nor impaired.

See below for the movements in the provision for impairment:

At 1 May 2017
Charged for the year
Foreign currency adjustment
Utilised

At 30 April 2018

Charged for the year
Foreign currency adjustment
Utilised

At 30 April 2019

Group 
£’000

340
328
3
(216)

455

43
–
(182)

316

Concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the Group’s customer base being large, 
unrelated and blue chip. Due to this, management believes there is no further credit risk provision required in excess of normal 
provision for doubtful receivables. The average credit period taken on sale of goods or services is 31 days (2018: 31 days).

The Group applies the simplified approach permitted by IFRS 9, which requires the application of a lifetime expected loss 
provision to trade receivables. The provision calculations are based on historic credit losses applied to older balances. 
This approach is followed for all receivables unless there are specific circumstances which would render the receivable 
irrecoverable and therefore require a specific provision. A provision is made against trade receivables until such time as 
the Group believes the amount to be irrecoverable, after which the trade receivable or contract receivables balance is 
written off.

The ageing analysis of trade receivables was as follows:

30 April 2019
30 April 2018

Neither past 
due nor 
impaired
£’000

Past due but not impaired

30-60 days
£’000 

60-90 days 
£’000

> 90 days
£’000

49,284
40,748

4,044
1,560

1,215
595

2,829
411

Total
£’000

57,372
43,314

91

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

18. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents
Bank overdraft

Total cash and cash equivalents

19. Trade and other payables

Trade payables
Consignment inventory payables
Amounts payable to related parties (see note 27)
Other taxes and social security
Other payables
Deferred consideration for acquisitions
Contract liabilities 
Accruals

Total trade and other payables

2019
Group
£’000

3,517
–

3,517

2019
Group
£’000

40,221
21,422
227
11,148
5,762
–
24,557
22,645

2018
Group
£’000

2,275
(1,337)

938

2018
Group
£’000

33,825
18,687
233
9,520
5,012
500
16,016
18,609

125,982

102,402

The contract liabilities primarily relate to the consideration invoiced to customers in advance of the work being completed.

20. Financial liabilities: borrowings

Non-current:
Bank loans
Obligations under finance leases or hire purchase agreements

Total non-current

Current:
Bank loans
Bank overdraft
Obligations under finance leases or hire purchase agreements

Total current

Total borrowings

Less: Cash and cash equivalents

Non-current financial assets (see note 26)

Net debt

The maturity analysis of the bank loans at 30 April is as follows:

In one year or less
Between one and five years
After five years

Total bank loans

2019
Group
£’000

17,307
21,803

39,110

785
–
11,500

12,285

51,395

3,517
1,950

45,928

2019
Group
£’000

785
17,307
–

18,092

2018
Group
£’000

9,841
16,823

26,664

887
1,337
6,995

9,219

35,883

2,275
1,950

31,658

2018
Group
£’000

887
9,841
–

10,728

The principal lender has security over all assets of the Group’s UK operations. The Group’s principal bank facilities were 
increased in January 2019 and now total £45,000,000 consisting of:

/  a Revolving Credit Facility of £35,000,000 repayable in January 2021; interest rate 1.75% above LIBOR. The amount drawn 

at 30 April 2019 was £17,000,000 (2018: £9,000,000);

/  a committed overdraft of £8,000,000. The amount drawn at 30 April 2019 was £nil (2018: £1,337,000); and
/  bonds and guarantees of £2,000,000.

92

Clipper Logistics plc  
In addition to the Revolving Credit Facility above, other items included within bank loans at 30 April 2019 are as follows:

/  other bank loans – £1,334,000 repayable in monthly instalments over periods between 4 and 48 months; interest rates fixed 

at between 3.72% and 4.80%; and

/  unamortised debt issue costs of £242,000 in relation to the principal facilities, which have been deducted from the total 

outstanding bank loans.

The amounts which are repayable under hire purchase or finance lease instalments are shown below:

Fixed rate leases:
Minimum lease payments:
In one year or less
Between one and five years
After five years

Interest:
In one year or less
Between one and five years
After five years

Principal of fixed rate leases:
In one year or less
Between one and five years
After five years

Variable rate leases:
In one year or less
Between one and five years
After five years

Total

2019
Group
£’000

2018
Group
£’000

11,990
22,622
–

34,612

(1,205)
(1,585)
–

(2,790)

10,785
21,037
–

31,822

715
766
–

1,481

33,303

6,822
16,922
–

23,744

(738)
(853)
–

(1,591)

6,084
16,069
–

22,153

911
754
–

1,665

23,818

It is the Group’s policy to acquire certain of its property, plant and equipment and inventories under finance leases or hire 
purchase agreements. The average contract term is 4.8 (2018: 4.7) years. At 30 April 2019 £30,380,000 (2018 £22,756,000) of the 
Group total of such obligations is denominated in Pounds Sterling and the remainder is denominated in Euros. The interest on 
the variable rate leases is based on a margin above Bank Base Rate or LIBOR. The Group’s obligations under finance leases 
are secured by the lessor’s charge over the assets.

Changes in liabilities from financing activities:

At 1 May 2018

Charges from financing cash flows
Drawdown of bank loans
Repayment of bank loans
New finance leases in respect of additions to property, plant and equipment
Payment of finance lease liabilities
Debt issue costs paid

Total changes from financing cash flows

Changes arising from obtaining or losing control of subsidiaries or other business

The effect of changes in foreign exchange rates

Other changes
New finance leases in respect of commercial vehicle inventories
Finance costs

Total other changes

At 30 April 2019

Bank  
loans 
£’000

Finance  
leases 
£’000

10,728

23,818

8,000
(747)
–
–
(20)

7,233

–

1

–
130

130

–
–
18,698
(10,389)
–

8,309

–

–

1,176
–

1,176

18,092

33,303

93

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

21. Provisions

At 1 May 2017
Utilised
Charged in year

At 30 April 2018

Utilised
Charged in year

At 30 April 2019

Onerous 
contracts 
Group 
£’000

Uninsured 
losses 
Group 
£’000

Dilapidations 
Group 
£’000

99
(92)
10

17

(17)
–

–

–
(213)
213

–

(168)
168

1,395
(206)
358

1,547

(84)
361

Total 
Group 
£’000

1,494
(511)
581

1,564

(269)
529

–

1,824

1,824

2019
Group
£’000

214
1,610

1,824

2018
Group
£’000

78
1,486

1,564

Provisions have been analysed between current and non-current as follows:

Current
Non-current

Total

Onerous contracts
Following a reorganisation of the commercial vehicles business in the year ended 30 April 2013, which included the closure 
of a depot, the Group was unsuccessful in its efforts to sub-let the closed premises. The Directors therefore made a provision 
in the year ended 30 April 2014 for the rent that was payable until the expiry of the lease in September 2018.

Uninsured losses
The uninsured losses provision is in respect of the cost of claims (generally for commercial vehicles and employment related) 
which are either not insured externally or fall below the excess on the Group’s insurance policies.

Dilapidations
Provisions are established over the life of leases to cover remedial work necessary at termination under the terms of those 
leases. Two warehouses have leases that expire 18 and 14 years from the balance sheet date and an office lease expires 
12 years from the balance sheet date. All other leases expire in 10 years or less.

22. Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid:
101,614,522 (2018: 101,360,523) ordinary shares of 0.05p each

2019 
Company 
£’000

2018 
Company 
£’000

51

51

During the year the Company issued 253,999 ordinary shares to satisfy employee share options, for aggregate consideration 
of £350,000. The new shares rank pari passu with all existing ordinary shares in issue. See also note 23 below.

94

Clipper Logistics plc 23. Share based payments
The Clipper Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) was approved by shareholders on 29 September 2014. The PSP enables selected 
directors and employees of the Group to be granted awards in respect of ordinary shares. Share Awards under the PSP will 
ordinarily be structured as nil cost share options with the vesting of Share Awards being subject to performance conditions 
measured over a period of at least three years. A summary of the principal terms of the PSP, including vesting conditions, is 
contained in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 46 to 57.

The Clipper Sharesave Plan is a share plan for all UK employees in the Group, and offers them the opportunity to acquire an 
interest in shares in the Company on favourable terms within the long-standing regime allowed by HMRC legislation. All UK staff 
are invited to participate on the same terms, and employees who choose to participate are granted an option over shares in 
the Company, with the exercise of that option being funded by the proceeds of a savings contract taken out by the relevant 
employee, under which the employee saves a set amount each month over a set period. The options granted in the year were 
offered with a three year savings contract, under which the employee could elect to save between £5 and £500 per month.

Option movements and weighted average exercise prices (“WAEP”) during the year were as follows:

Date

Outstanding 1 May 2017
Granted during the year
Forfeited during the year
Exercised during the year

Outstanding 30 April 2018

Granted during the year
Forfeited during the year
Exercised during the year

Outstanding 30 April 2019

PSP  

Number

1,594,139
336,293
(176,429)
(106,338)

1,647,665

671,645 
(441,859)
(64,964)

1,812,487 

WAEP

nil
nil
nil
nil

nil

nil
nil
nil

nil

Sharesave 
Number 

1,671,471
561,980
(86,400)
(981,217)

WAEP

185.44p
379.74p
255.16p
140.64p

1,165,834

311.64p

2,007,277
(603,320)
(189,035)

193.34p
346.10p
185.11p

2,380,756

213.21p

At 30 April 2019, the range of exercise prices for the various schemes were 193.34p – 379.74p (2018: 140.40p – 379.74p). 
At 30 April 2019, the weighted average remaining contractual life was 2.7 years (2018: 2.0 years). 

At 30 April 2019, PSP options over 507,568 (2018: 572,532) and Sharesave options over 105,776 (2018: 85,783) of the above shares 
were exercisable.

The fair value of the share options is measured at the grant date, using the Black-Scholes model and taking into account the 
terms and conditions upon which the instruments were granted.

The key inputs to the model are:

Share price at:
16 January 2019
18 February 2019
Expected life of option
Volatility
Dividend yield

2019

242.00p
222.00p
3.5 years
37–38%
3.64–3.96%

The expected life of the options has been estimated as six months beyond vesting date. Volatility has been calculated on 
a rolling three year period up to the week prior to grant. The dividend yield is calculated by applying dividends paid in the 
preceding 12 months to the share price at the grant date.

The cost of the options is recognised over the expected vesting period. The total credit for the year ended 30 April 2019 
relating to employee share based payment plans was £1,178,000 (2018: charge of £1,219,000). The fair value of share options at 
30 April 2019 to be amortised in future years was £1,538,000 (2018: £2,830,000).

All share based payments in both years are equity settled.

95

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

24. Commitments and contingencies
Operating lease commitments – land and buildings:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Total minimum lease payments

Operating lease commitments – vehicles, plant and equipment:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Total minimum lease payments

25. Capital commitments

Authorised and contracted for
Authorised, but not contracted for

Total capital commitments

2019
Group
£’000

24,186
83,496
74,188

2018
Group
£’000

20,807
59,529
56,754

181,870

137,090

2019
Group
£’000

5,776
6,339
–

2018
Group
£’000

6,597
9,243
2

12,115

15,842

2019
Group
£’000

2,002
6,567

8,569

2018
Group
£’000

5,500
12,359

17,859

26. Financial instruments and financial risk management objectives and policies
The Group is exposed to a number of different market risks in the normal course of business including credit, interest rate and 
foreign currency risks.

Credit risk
Credit risk predominantly arises from trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents. The Group has a customer credit 
policy in place and the exposure to credit risk is monitored on an ongoing basis. External credit ratings are generally 
obtained for customers; Group policy is to assess the credit quality of each customer before accepting any terms of trade.

Internal procedures take into account customers’ financial positions as well as their reputation within the industry and past 
payment experience. Cash and cash equivalents and derivative financial instruments are held with AAA or AA rated banks. 
Financial instruments classified as fair value through profit and loss fair value through other comprehensive income are all 
publicly traded on the UK London Stock Exchange. Given the high credit quality of counterparties with whom the Group has 
investments, the Directors do not expect any counterparty to fail to meet its obligations.

At 30 April 2019 there were no significant concentrations of credit risk (2018: £nil). The Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk, 
gross of any collateral held, relating to its financial assets is equivalent to their carrying value. All financial assets have a fair 
value which is equal to their carrying value, as a consequence of their short maturity. The Group did not have any financial 
instruments that would mitigate the credit exposure arising from the financial assets designated at fair value through profit or 
loss in either the current or the preceding financial year.

Interest rate risk
The Group adopts a policy of ensuring that there is an appropriate mix of fixed and floating rates in managing its exposure to 
changes in interest rates on borrowings. Interest rate swaps are entered into, where necessary, to achieve this appropriate mix.

Interest rate sensitivity
The Group’s borrowings are largely denominated in Pounds Sterling and the Group is therefore exposed to a change in the 
relevant interest rate. With all other variables held constant, the impact of a reasonably possible increase in interest rates of 
50 basis points (2018: 50 points) on that portion of borrowings affected would be to reduce the Group’s profit before tax by 
£189,000 (2018: £132,000).

Foreign currency risk
The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk on sales, purchases and borrowings that are denominated in currencies other 
than Pounds Sterling. The currencies giving rise to this risk are primarily the Euro and US dollar. The volume of transactions 
denominated in foreign currencies is not significant to the Group.

The exposure to a short-term fluctuation in exchange rates on the investment in foreign subsidiaries is not expected to have 
a material impact on the results of the Group.

96

Clipper Logistics plc Capital management
The Group’s main objective when managing capital is to protect returns to shareholders by ensuring the Group will continue 
to trade profitably in the foreseeable future. The Group also aims to maximise its capital structure of debt and equity so as to 
minimise its cost of capital.

The Group manages its capital with regard to the risks inherent in the business and the sector within which it operates by 
monitoring its gearing ratio on a regular basis and adjusting the level of dividends paid to ordinary shareholders.

The Group considers its capital to include equity and net debt. Net debt includes short and long-term borrowings (including 
overdrafts and lease obligations) net of cash and cash equivalents.

The Group has not made any changes to its capital management during the year. The Group has no long-term gearing ratio 
target. Borrowings are taken out to invest in the acquisition of subsidiaries, new sites or depots and are considered as part 
of that investment appraisal. Key measures monitored by the Group are interest cover and net debt compared to earnings 
before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation.

In order to achieve the overall objective, the Group’s capital management, amongst other things, aims to ensure that it meets 
financial covenants attached to the borrowings. The Group has satisfied all such financial covenants in both years.

EBIT
Finance costs (net)

Interest cover

EBIT
Depreciation and impairment of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation and impairment of computer software

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA)
Net debt (note 20)

Net debt/EBITDA

2019
Group
£’000

20,213
2,141

9.4

2019
Group
£’000

20,213
7,426
788

28,427
45,928

1.62

2018
Group
£’000

20,854
1,976

10.6

2018
Group
£’000

20,854
6,394
527

27,775
31,658

1.14

Liquidity risk
Management closely monitors available bank and other credit facilities in comparison to the Group’s outstanding 
commitments on a regular basis to ensure that the Group has sufficient funds to meet the obligations of the Group as they 
fall due.

The Board receives regular cash forecasts which estimate the cash inflows and outflows over the next 24–36 months, so that 
management can ensure that sufficient financing can be arranged as it is required. The Group would normally expect that 
sufficient cash is generated in the operating cycle to meet the contractual cash flows as disclosed above through effective 
cash management.

Estimation of fair values
The main methods and assumptions used in estimating the fair values of financial instruments are as follows:

/  interest-bearing loans and borrowings: fair value is calculated based on discounted expected future principal and interest 

cash flows; and

/  trade and other receivables/payables: the notional amount for trade receivables/payables with a remaining life of less than 

one year are deemed to reflect their fair value.

2019 
Book value 
£’000

2019 
Fair value 
£’000

2018 
Book value 
£’000

2018 
Fair value 
£’000

Non-current financial assets

1,950

1,950

1,950

1,907

Current financial assets:
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other receivables
Liabilities:
Bank overdraft
Short-term borrowings
Trade and other payables
Long-term borrowings

3,517
96,347

3,517
96,347

2,275
73,430

2,275
73,430

–
(12,285)
(125,982)
(39,110)

–
(12,285)
(125,982)
(38,830)

(1,337)
(7,882)
(102,402)
(26,664)

(1,337)
(7,882)
(102,402)
(25,919)

Long-term borrowings are classified as Level 2 (items with significant observable inputs) financial liabilities under IFRS 13. 
There have been no transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 financial instruments during the year.

97

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

27. Related party disclosures
Clicklink Logistics Limited (see note 15) is a supplier of logistics services to the Group. The Group provides certain resources 
to Clicklink, principally people and vehicles, under the terms of the joint venture agreement. Amounts charged for these 
resources are included in revenue.

Branton Court Stud LLP, in which Steve Parkin is a partner, receives management, recharge of expenditure and administration 
services from the Group. Additionally, in the current year, the Group recognised a credit from Branton Court Stud LLP of 
£977,000 in respect of Branton Court’s contribution to costs incurred by the Group in respect of of a one-off event. 

Guiseley Association Football Club shares a common director with Clipper Logistics plc.

Hamsard 3476 Limited, a company controlled by Steve Parkin, receives property-related services from the Group.

Knaresborough Investments Limited, a company controlled by Steve Parkin, receives management and administration 
services from the Group. 

Knaresborough Real Estate Limited, a company owned by Steve Parkin, is the landlord of one of the Group’s 
leasehold properties.

Roydhouse Properties Limited is the landlord of two of the Company’s leasehold properties and has common directors with 
Clipper Logistics plc.

Southerns Office Interiors Limited supplies office furniture to the Group and is a customer of the commercial vehicles segment. 
A company owned by Steve Parkin is registered as a person with significant control over Southerns Limited, the ultimate parent 
of Southerns Office Interiors Limited.

Trust Electric Heating Limited, a supplier to the Group, shares a common director with Clipper Logistics plc.

Key management compensation is disclosed in note 5.

During the year, the Group paid Branton Court Stud LLP £120,000 received in relation to horse race winnings. These monies 
were not intended for the Group and were paid to Branton Court on the same day.

During the year, the Group entered into a framework agreement with Styles & Wood Limited, a company which shares 
common directors. A payment of £2.0 million was advanced in relation to the agreed works on 27 June 2018. The agreement 
was subsequently cancelled and the payment was returned by the 20 August 2018. 

During the year, £46,000 was received from Steve Parkin in relation to repaying Clipper for personal expenditure incurred on a 
company credit card. At 30 April 2019 £4,000 was outstanding and this was settled on 26 July 2019

The Group advanced two petty cash amounts totalling £27,000 to David Hodkin in the year in exchange for personal cheques 
from David Hodkin. In both cases, there was a short period of time elapsing between David’s withdrawal of the cash and 
Clipper’s subsequent cashing of the cheque. As at 30 April 2019, £nil was outstanding.

During the year £590,000 was recharged to Branton Court Stud LLP for management time of Directors and other key 
management personnel in proportion to the time spent on non-Clipper related activities. (2018: £285,000 charged to Branton 
Court LLP and £285,000 charged to Knaresborough Investments Limited).

98

Clipper Logistics plc Balances owing to or from these related parties at 30 April were as follows:

Non-current financial assets:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – interest bearing loan
Trade and other receivables:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – trading balance
Knaresborough Investments Limited 
Branton Court Stud LLP
Hamsard 3476 Limited
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Trade and other payables:
Clicklink Logistics Limited
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Trust Electric Heating Limited

2019
Group
£’000

1,950

1,626
–
461
–
2

227
–
–

2018
Group
£’000

1,950

1,491
–
93
4,200
1

168
63
2

The shareholders in Clicklink Logistics Limited have jointly made available to that company a term loan facility of £3,900,000 
of which the Company’s 50% share is £1,950,000. Interest on each loan is calculated at a margin above 12 month LIBOR and is 
payable annually. All loans drawn under the facility are repayable in November 2022.

Transactions with these related parties in the year ended 30 April were as follows:

Items credited to the income statement:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – revenue
Clicklink Logistics Limited – finance income
Branton Court Stud LLP1
Hamsard 3476 Limited
Knaresborough Investments Limited
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Items charged to the income statement:
Hamsard 3476 Limited
Clicklink Logistics Limited
Guiseley Association Football Club
Branton Court Stud LLP
Knaresborough Investments Limited
Knaresborough Real Estate Limited 
Roydhouse Properties Limited 
Southerns Office Interiors Limited 
Trust Electric Heating Limited
Purchase of non-current assets:
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Sale of non-current assets:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – items procured but not capitalised by the Company

1. Amounts charged to Branton Court Stud LLP represent recharges of costs with no element of mark up.

2019
Group
£’000

20,392
52
2,097
3,100
174
7

145
2,750
25
129
176
360
910
17
–

–

–

2018
Group
£’000

15,738
35
437
4,200
285
23

–
1,682
67
–
8
361
865
33
4

70

277

99

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

28. Business combinations
28.1 Tesam Distribution Limited
On 24 May 2017 the Company acquired the entire issued share capital of Tesam Distribution Limited (“Tesam”) in exchange 
for cash consideration. Tesam operated as a provider of a variety of warehousing and distribution services to the retail sector. 
With effect from 30 April 2018 the Tesam operations have been hived-up into Clipper Logistics plc. 

Purchase consideration and cash flows:

Cash consideration paid

Total consideration payable

Analysis of cash flows:
Cash consideration paid in the year
Net cash acquired with the subsidiary (included in cash flows from investing activities)

Net cash flow on the acquisition

Acquisition:

Assets:
Property, plant and equipment
Customer relationships
Software
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Liabilities:
Trade and other payables
Current tax liabilities
Current provisions
Deferred tax liabilities

Total identifiable net assets at fair value

Goodwill arising on acquisition

Total consideration

£’000

11,750

11,750

11,750
2,177

(9,573)

Fair value
 £’000

4,655
8,173
740
1,157
2,177

(3,488)
(147)
(1,036)
(1,801)

10,430

1,320

11,750

The goodwill of £1,320,000 comprises the value of expected synergies arising from the acquisition. Goodwill is allocated 
entirely to the value-added logistics services segment.

None of the goodwill recognised is expected to be deductible for income tax purposes.

Professional fees and costs in relation to the acquisition were £159,000 and have been charged to the income statement.

100

Clipper Logistics plc 28.2 RepairTech Limited
On 15 June 2017 the Company acquired the entire issued share capital of RepairTech Limited (“RepairTech”) in exchange for 
cash consideration. RepairTech is a specialist provider of consumer electronic repair services based in Southam, Warwickshire.

Purchase consideration:

Cash consideration paid in the year ended 30 April 2018
Deferred consideration paid June 2018

Total consideration payable

Analysis of cash flows:
Cash consideration paid in the year ended 30 April 2018
Net cash acquired with the subsidiary (included in cash flows from investing activities)

Net cash flow on the acquisition

Acquisition:

Assets:
Property, plant and equipment
Customer relationships
Other intangible assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Liabilities:
Trade and other payables
Current tax liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Total identifiable net assets at fair value

Goodwill arising on acquisition

Total consideration

£’000

2,500
500

3,000

2,500
300

(2,200)

Fair value 
£’000

159
1,384
23
34
760
300

(611)
(153)
(275)

1,621

1,379

3,000

The goodwill of £1,379,000 comprises the value of expected synergies arising from the acquisition. Goodwill is allocated entirely 
to the value-added logistics services segment.

None of the goodwill recognised is expected to be deductible for income tax purposes.

Other intangible assets recognised consist of the acquired order book.

Professional fees and costs in relation to the acquisition were £62,000 and have been charged to the income statement.

101

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Group Financial Statements

Notes to the Group Financial Statements continued

29. Subsequent events 
In April 2019, the Group entered into a series of contracts with a customer, which when combined represented a business 
combination in accordance with IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’. The acquisition consists of premises, assets and a 
workforce, together carrying out a logistics service business that will be outsourced to the Group. The business acquired 
is an unincorporated entity. Several areas required significant judgment by management, in particular that the transfer of 
employees under TUPE and the lease of the premises commenced only after the year end, limiting the ability of the Group 
to control the relevant activities of the acquired business. On balance the Group has concluded that the effective date 
of the business combination is 1 July 2019 and that this series of transactions should be reflected within the first half of the 
year ending 30 April 2020. This is when management have concluded that control has passed to the Group. The Group has 
carried out a provisional fair value exercise of the business combination, which will give rise to provisional ‘negative goodwill’ 
of £2,951,000. The ‘negative goodwill’ will be recognised within the Group income statement in the first half of the year ending 
30 April 2020.

The provisional fair value table for the business combination is shown below.

Purchase consideration and cash flows:

Cash consideration payable
Cash consideration receivable

Total net consideration payable

Acquisition:

Assets:
Property, plant and equipment
Customer relationship
Liabilities:
Current provisions
Deferred tax liabilities

Total identifiable net assets at fair value
‘Negative goodwill’ arising on acquisition

Total consideration

£’000

2,899
(2,765)

134

Provisional 
fair values
 £’000

2,899
2,428

(1,600)
(642)

3,085
(2,951)

134

As part of the series of transactions, the customer paid the Group consideration in return for the Group assuming certain 
potential liabilities. This resulted in the net consideration payable being less than the provisional fair value of net assets 
acquired, principally the customer relationship, which gave rise to ‘negative goodwill’. 

Professional fees and costs in relation to the acquisition are expected to not exceed £50,000. 

102

Clipper Logistics plc   
/ Company Financial Statements

Company Statement of Financial Position 
At 30 April

Assets:
Non-current assets

Goodwill;
Other intangible assets

Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investment in subsidiaries
Other investments
Non-current financial assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Equity and liabilities:
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Financial liabilities: borrowings
Short-term provisions
Current income tax liabilities

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Financial liabilities: borrowings
Long-term provisions
Deferred tax liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Equity shareholders’ funds
Share capital
Share premium
Currency translation reserve
Other reserve
Share based payment reserve
Retained earnings

Total equity attributable to the owners of the Company

Total equity and liabilities

Approved by the Board on 29 August 2019 and signed on its behalf by:

DA Hodkin
Chief Financial Officer
Company No. 03042024

2019  
Company  

£’000

2018  
Company  

£’000

Note

D
E
F
F
S

G
H
J

I
J
M

J
M
N

O

5,712
9,495

15,207
51,074
28,917
1,950
1,950

99,098

670
79,987
378

81,035

5,712
8,968

14,680
39,381
24,605
1,950
1,950

82,566

466
62,770
892

64,128

180,133

146,694

86,849
16,893
100
835

104,677

38,010
1,971
2,562

42,543

67,675
18,637
61
2,136

88,509

25,246
1,430
1,599

28,275

147,220

116,784

51
2,060
(5)
851
1,643
28,313

32,913

51
1,710
(39)
851
2,745
24,592

29,910

180,133

146,694

103

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Company Statement of Changes in Equity
For the year ended 30 April

Balance at 1 May 2017
Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share issue
Dividends

Balance at 30 April 2018

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share issue
Dividends

Share  
capital  
Company 
£’000

50
–
–
–
1
–

51

–
–
–
–
–

Share  
premium 
Company  

£’000

80
–
–
–
1,630
–

1,710

–
–
–
350
–

Balance at 30 April 2019

51

2,060

Currency 
translation 
reserve  
Company 
£’000

Other  
reserve  
Company  

£’000

40
–
(79)
–
–
–

(39)

–
34
–
–
–

(5)

Carried 
forward  
Company  

£’000

1,021
–
(79)
–
1,631
–

2,573

–
34
–
350
–

851
–
–
–
–
–

851

–
–
–
–
–

851

2,957

Retained 
earnings 
Company  

£’000

Total  
Company  

£’000

17,391
14,466
–
357
–
(7,622)

24,592

12,509
–
146
–
(8,934)

20,450
14,466
(79)
1,064
1,631
(7,622)

29,910

12,509
34
(956)
350
(8,934)

Balance at 1 May 2017
Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share Issue
Dividends

Balance at 30 April 2018

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Equity settled transactions
Share issue
Dividends

Brought 
forward  
Company  

Share based 
payment 
reserve  
Company  

£’000

1,021
–
(79)
–
1,631
–

2,573

–
34
–
350
–

£’000

2,038
–
–
707
–
–

2,745

–
–
(1,102)
–
–

Balance at 30 April 2019

2,957

1,643

28,313

32,913

104

Clipper Logistics plc Notes to the Company Financial Statements

A. Authorisation of Financial 
Statements and statement of 
compliance with UK GAAP
The Parent Company Financial 
Statements of Clipper Logistics plc 
(the “Company”) for the year ended 
30 April 2019 were authorised for issue 
by the Board of Directors on 29 August 
2019 and the Company Statement 
of Financial Position was signed on 
the Board’s behalf by David Hodkin. 
Clipper Logistics plc is a public limited 
company incorporated and domiciled 
in England and Wales. The Company’s 
ordinary shares are traded on the 
London Stock Exchange.

The Financial Statements are prepared 
in accordance with Financial Reporting 
Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (“FRS 101”). The Financial 
Statements are prepared under the 
historical cost convention.

No profit and loss account is presented 
by the Company as permitted by 
Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006. 
The profit after tax attributable to the 
members of the Company and other 
comprehensive income are shown in 
the Statement of Changes in Equity.

The results of Clipper Logistics plc are 
included in the consolidated Financial 
Statements of Clipper Logistics plc 
which are available from the Company 
Secretary at Gelderd Road, Leeds, 
LS12 6LT.

The accounting policies which follow 
set out those policies which apply in 
preparing the Financial Statements 
for the year ended 30 April 2019. 
The Financial Statements are prepared 
in Pounds Sterling and are rounded to 
the nearest thousand pounds (£’000).

B. Accounting policies
The Financial Statements have 
been prepared in accordance with 
the Companies Act 2006 and with 
applicable accounting standards in 
the UK.

B.1 Basis of preparation
The Company has taken advantage 
of the following disclosure exemptions 
under FRS 101:

(a) the requirements of paragraphs 
45(b) and 46–52 of IFRS 2 ‘Share 
based Payment’;

(b) the requirements of paragraphs 

62, B64(d), B64(e), B64(g), B64(h), 
B64(j) to B64(m), B64(n)(ii), B64 (o)(ii), 
B64(p), B64(q)(ii), B66 and B67 of IFRS 
3 ‘Business Combinations’;

(c)  the requirements of IFRS 7 ‘Financial 

Instruments: Disclosures’;

(d) the requirements of paragraphs 

91–99 of IFRS 13 ‘Fair 
Value Measurement’;

(e)  the requirement in paragraph 38 
of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial 
Statements’ to present comparative 
information in respect of:
i.  paragraph 79(a)(iv) of IAS 1;
ii.  paragraph 73(e) of IAS 16 

‘Property, Plant and Equipment’;

iii.  paragraph 118(e) of IAS 38 

‘Intangible Assets’;

iv.  paragraphs 76 and 79(d) of IAS 
40 ‘Investment Property’; and

v.  paragraph 50 of IAS 41 

‘Agriculture’.

(f)  the requirements of paragraphs 
10(d), 10(f), 39(c) and 134–136 
of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of 
Financial Statements’;

(g) the requirements of IAS 7 ‘Statement 

of Cash Flows’;

(h) the requirements of paragraphs 30 

and 31 of IAS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, 
Changes in Accounting Estimates 
and Errors’;

(i)  the requirements of paragraph 17 

of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’; 
the requirements in IAS 24 ‘Related 
Party Disclosures’ to disclose related 
party transactions entered into 
between two or more members of a 
group, provided that any subsidiary 
which is a party to the transaction 
is wholly owned by such a member; 
and

(j)  the requirements of paragraphs 
134(d)-–34(f) and 135(c)–135(e)  
of IAS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’.

B.2 Going concern
The Financial Statements have been 
prepared on a going concern basis. 
In determining the appropriate 
basis of preparation of the Financial 
Statements, the Directors are required 
to consider whether the Company and 
the Group can continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future.

Note 26 to the Group Financial 
Statements includes the Group’s 
objectives, policies and processes 
for managing its capital, its financial 
risk management objectives and its 
exposure to foreign exchange, credit 
and interest rate risk.

The Company Statement of 
Financial Position at 30 April 2019 
shows current assets of £81,035,000 
(2018: £64,128,000) and current 
liabilities of £104,677,000 
(2018: £88,509,000). Net current 
liabilities are therefore £23,642,000 
(2018: £24,381,000). The Group has 
access to a non-amortising Revolving 
Credit Facility of £35,000,000 repayable 
in 2021 of which £17,000,000 was drawn 
at 30 April 2019 and an overdraft facility 
of £8,000,000 (see note 20 to the Group 
Financial Statements). The Company’s 
bank overdraft shown in Note J was 
covered by cash balances held by 
other UK entities of the Group.

The Directors have assessed the future 
funding requirements of the Group 
and the Company and compared 
them to the bank facilities which 
are now available. The assessment 
included a detailed review of 
financial and cash flow forecasts 
for at least the 12 month period 
from the date of signing the Annual 
Report. The Directors considered a 
range of potential scenarios within 
the key markets the Group serves 
and how these might impact on the 
Group’s cash flow. The Directors also 
considered what mitigating actions 
the Group could take to limit any 
adverse consequences.

105

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

B. Accounting policies continued
B.2 Going concern continued
The Group’s forecasts and projections 
show that the Group should be able 
to operate without the need for any 
increase in borrowing facilities.

Having undertaken this work, the 
Directors are of the opinion that 
the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, 
they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the 
Financial Statements.

B.3 Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated 
at historical cost less depreciation and 
impairment. Historical cost includes 
expenditure that is directly attributable 
to the acquisition of the items.

Subsequent costs are included in the 
asset’s carrying amount or recognised 
as a separate asset, as appropriate, 
only when it is probable that future 
economic benefits associated with 
the item will flow to the Company and 
the cost of the item can be measured 
reliably. The carrying amount of any 
replaced part is derecognised. All other 
repairs and maintenance are charged 
to the income statement during 
the financial period in which they 
are incurred.

Depreciation is calculated using the 
straight-line method to allocate their 
cost to their residual values over their 
estimated useful lives, as follows:

/  leasehold property over the length of 

the lease;

/  plant and machinery 2–20 years; and
/  motor vehicles 4–8 years.

Residual values and useful lives are 
reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, 
at each balance sheet date.

An asset’s carrying amount is written 
down immediately to its recoverable 
amount if the asset’s carrying 
amount is greater than its estimated 
recoverable amount.

An item of property, plant and 
equipment and any significant part 
initially recognised is derecognised 
upon disposal or when no future 
economic benefits are expected 
from its use or disposal. Any gain or 
loss arising on derecognition of the 
asset (calculated as the difference 
between the net disposal proceeds 
and the carrying amount of the asset) 
is included within ‘other net gains’ in 
the income statement when the asset 
is derecognised.

B.4 Investments
Non-current investments are shown  
at cost less provision for impairment.

B.5 Intangible assets
(a) Contracts and licences
Intangible assets recognised in 
relation to contracts or licences are 
amortised over the length of the 
relevant agreement.

(b) Goodwill
Goodwill representing the excess of 
the purchase price compared with 
the fair value of net assets acquired is 
capitalised and included in intangible 
assets. Separately recognised goodwill 
is tested annually for impairment and 
carried at cost less accumulated 
impairment losses. This is not in 
accordance with The Large and 
Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 
2008 which requires that all goodwill be 
amortised. The Directors consider that 
this would fail to give a true and fair 
view of the profit for the year and that 
the economic measure of performance 
in any period is properly made by 
reference only to any impairment that 
may have arisen. It is not practicable 
to quantify the effect on the Financial 
Statements of this departure.

(c) Computer software
Acquired computer software licences 
are capitalised on the basis of the costs 
incurred to acquire and bring to use 
the specific software. These costs are 
amortised over their estimated useful 
lives (three to five years).

Costs associated with developing 
or maintaining computer software 
programmes are recognised as 
an expense as incurred. Costs that 
are directly associated with the 
development of identifiable and 
unique software products controlled by 
the Company, and that will probably 
generate economic benefits exceeding 
costs beyond one year, are recognised 
as intangible assets. Costs include the 
software development employee costs 
and overheads directly attributable to 
bringing the asset into use.

Computer software development costs 
recognised as assets are amortised 
over their estimated useful lives (not 
exceeding five years).

B.6 Leases
Leases in which a significant portion 
of the risks and rewards of ownership 
are retained by the lessor are classified 
as operating leases. Payments made 
under operating leases (net of any 
incentives received from the lessor) are 
charged to the income statement on 
a straight-line basis over the period of 
the lease.

Assets held under finance leases, which 
transfer to the Company substantially 
all the risks and benefits incidental 
to ownership of the leased item, are 
capitalised at the inception of the 
lease, with a corresponding liability 
being recognised for the lower of the 
fair value of the leased asset and 
the present value of the minimum 
lease payments. Lease payments are 
apportioned between the reduction 
of the lease liability and finance 
charges in the income statement 
so as to achieve a constant rate of 
interest on the remaining balance of 
the liability. The property, plant and 
equipment acquired under finance 
leases is depreciated over the shorter 
of the estimated useful life of the asset 
and the lease term; where the lease 
contains an option to purchase which 
is expected to be exercised, the asset 
is depreciated over the useful life of the 
asset. The accounting policy adopted 
for finance leases is also applied to hire 
purchase agreements.

106

Clipper Logistics plc IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ (“IFRS 16”) was issued in 
January 2016, replacing IAS 17 Leases 
(IAS 17) and associated interpretations 
IFRIC 4, SIC 15 and SIC 27. IFRS 16 will 
apply to annual periods beginning 
on or after 1 January 2019. IFRS 16 will 
primarily change lease accounting 
for lessees. Lease agreements will 
give rise to the recognition of an asset 
representing the right to use the leased 
item and a loan obligation for future 
lease payables. Lease costs will be 
recognised in the form of depreciation 
of the right to use asset and interest on 
the lease liability replacing rental costs 
charged on a straight-line basis. 

Under the transition rules, the 
Company will apply IFRS 16 using the 
modified retrospective approach 
with the cumulative effect of 
applying the standard recognised 
in retained earnings on 1 May 2019 
with no restatement of comparative 
information. The Company will be taking 
available exemptions for short-term 
leases and low value leases (<£5,000). 

The Company held a significant 
number of operating leases at 30 April 
2019 for which the future minimum 
lease payments amount to £181.3m as 
disclosed in note Q to the Company 
Financial Statements. On the adoption 
of IFRS 16, the expected effect on the 
balance sheet is the recognition of an 
asset in the range of £114m to £139m, a 
liability in the range of £143m to £164m, 
a deferred tax asset of between £3m 
and £5m, a derecognition of rent-
related assets of liabilities of £4m and 
an increase in retained earnings in the 
range of £18m to £21m.

In the year ending 30 April 2020, IFRS 16 
is expected to increase operating profit 
by between £6m and £7m, finance 
costs by between £6m and £7m, both 
partly offset by deferred tax, all resulting 
in a reduction in profit before tax of 
between £0.5m and £1m.

The Group will continue to implement 
and refine procedures and processes 
to apply the new requirements of IFRS 
16. As a result of this ongoing work, 
it is possible that there may be some 
changes to the adoption impact 
outlined above before the 30 April 2020 
results are issued. However, at this time 
these are not expected to be material.

B.7 Inventories – component parts 
and consumable stores
Inventories of component parts and 
consumable stores are valued at the 
lower of cost and net realisable value 
on a line by line basis. Provision is made 
for obsolete and slow-moving items.

B.8 Trade receivables
Trade receivables are recognised 
initially at fair value and subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method, less provision 
for impairment. 

The Company applies the simplified 
approach permitted by IFRS 9, 
which requires the application of 
a lifetime expected loss provision 
to trade receivables. The provision 
calculations are based on historic 
credit losses applied to older balances. 
This approach is followed for all 
receivables unless there are specific 
circumstances which would render the 
receivable irrecoverable and therefore 
require a specific provision. A provision 
is made against trade receivables until 
such time as the Company believes 
the amount to be irrecoverable, after 
which the trade receivable balance is 
written off.

The carrying amount of the asset 
is reduced through the use of 
an allowance account, and the 
amount of the loss is recognised 
in the income statement within 
‘administration expenses’.

When a trade receivable is 
uncollectable, it is written off against 
the allowance account for trade 
receivables. Subsequent recoveries 
of amounts previously written off 
are credited against ‘administration 
expenses’ in the income statement.

B.9 Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents includes 
cash in hand, deposits held at call with 
banks, other short-term highly liquid 
investments with original maturities 
of three months or less, and bank 
overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are shown 
within borrowings in current liabilities 
on the Company Statement of 
Financial Position.

B.10 Trade payables
Trade payables are recognised 
initially at fair value and subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method.

B.11 Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially 
at fair value, net of transaction costs 
incurred. Borrowings are subsequently 
stated at amortised cost; any 
difference between the proceeds 
(net of transaction costs) and the 
redemption value is recognised in the 
income statement over the period 
of the borrowings using the effective 
interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current 
liabilities unless the Company has an 
unconditional right to defer settlement 
of the liability for at least 12 months 
after the balance sheet date.

107

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

B. Accounting policies continued
B.12 Income tax
Current tax assets and liabilities are 
measured at the amount expected 
to be recovered from or paid to the 
taxation authorities, based on tax 
rates and laws that are enacted or 
substantively enacted by the balance 
sheet date.

Deferred income tax is provided in 
full, using the liability method, on 
temporary differences arising between 
the tax bases of assets and liabilities 
and their carrying amounts in the 
Financial Statements.

However, the deferred income tax is 
not accounted for, if it arises from initial 
recognition of goodwill or an asset 
or liability in a transaction other than 
a business combination that at the 
time of the transaction affects neither 
accounting nor taxable profits or losses.

Deferred income tax is determined 
using tax rates (and laws) that have 
been enacted or substantially enacted 
by the balance sheet date and are 
expected to apply when the related 
deferred income tax asset is realised 
or the deferred income tax liability is 
settled. Deferred income tax assets 
are recognised to the extent that it 
is probable that future taxable profit 
will be available against which the 
temporary differences can be utilised.

Deferred income tax assets and 
liabilities are offset, only if a legally 
enforceable right exists to set off current 
tax assets against current tax liabilities, 
the deferred income taxes relate to 
the same taxation authority and that 
authority permits the Company to 
make a single net payment.

B.13 Employee benefits
(a) Pension obligations
The Company operates various pension 
schemes. The schemes are generally 
funded through payments to insurance 
companies. The Company has only 
defined contribution plans. A defined 
contribution plan is a pension plan 
under which the Company pays fixed 
contributions into a separate entity.

For defined contribution plans, 
the Company pays contributions 
to privately administered pension 
insurance plans on a contractual or 
voluntary basis. The Company has 
no further payment obligations once 
the contributions have been paid. 
The contributions are recognised as 
employee benefit expense when they 
are due.

(b) Post-retirement benefits
The Company provides no other post-
retirement benefits to its employees.

(c) Profit-sharing and bonus plans
The Company recognises a liability 
and an expense for bonuses and 
profit-sharing, based on a formula 
that takes into consideration the 
profit attributable to the Company’s 
shareholders after certain adjustments. 
The Company recognises a provision 
where contractually obliged or where 
there is a past practice that has 
created a constructive obligation.

(d) Share based payments
IFRS 2 requires the recognition of 
equity settled share based payments 
at fair value at the date of the 
grant. All equity settled share based 
payments are ultimately recognised as 
an expense in the income statement 
with a corresponding credit to share 
based payment reserve.

If vesting periods or other non-market 
vesting conditions apply, the expense 
is allocated over the vesting period 
based on the best available estimate of 
the number of shares expected to vest. 
Estimates are revised subsequently if 
there is any indication that the number 
of shares expected to vest differs from 
previous estimates. Any cumulative 
adjustment prior to vesting is 
recognised in the current period. 
The financial effect of awards by the 
Company of options over its equity 
shares to employees of subsidiary 
undertakings are charged to the 
employing entity. Amounts recharged 
by the Company are recognised as 
an intra-Group receivable with a 
corresponding credit to equity.

Upon exercise of share options, the 
proceeds received net of attributable 
transaction costs are credited to 
share capital and, where appropriate, 
share premium.

B.14 Provisions
Provisions for items such as dilapidations 
and legal claims are recognised when: 
the Company has a present legal or 
constructive obligation as a result 
of past events; it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required to 
settle the obligation; and the amount 
has been reliably estimated.

Where there are a number of similar 
obligations, the likelihood that an 
outflow will be required in settlement 
is determined by considering the class 
of obligations as a whole. A provision 
is recognised even if the likelihood of 
an outflow with respect to any one 
item included in the same class of 
obligations may be small.

Provisions are measured at the present 
value of the expenditures expected 
to be required to settle the obligation 
using a pre-tax rate that reflects current 
market assessments of the time value 
of money and the risks specific to the 
obligation. The increase in the provision 
due to passage of time is recognised as 
interest expense.

108

Clipper Logistics plc B.15 Foreign currency translation
The Company’s functional currency 
and presentation currency is Pounds 
Sterling. Transactions in foreign 
currencies are initially recorded in the 
functional currency by applying the 
spot exchange rate ruling at the date 
of the transaction. Monetary assets 
and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies are retranslated at the 
functional currency rate of exchange 
ruling at the balance sheet date. 
All differences are taken to the 
income statement.

Non-monetary items that are measured 
in terms of historical cost in a foreign 
currency are translated using the 
exchange rates as at the dates of the 
initial transactions. Non-monetary items 
measured at fair value in a foreign 
currency are translated using the 
exchange rates at the date when the 
fair value was determined.

The Company does not apply hedge 
accounting of foreign exchange risks in 
its Company Financial Statements.

B.16 Revenue recognition
The Company has applied IFRS 
15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with 
Customers’ using the cumulative 
effect method.

Comparative information in both the 
Income Statement and the Balance 
Sheet has not been restated and 
continues to be reported under IAS 18 
‘Revenue’ as there was no material 
adjustment on transition.

The Company recognises revenue 
from contracts with customers as the 
performance obligations to deliver 
products and services under these 
contracts are satisfied. The Group’s 
contracts are typically for the provision 
of warehouse or transport services 
and normally comprise a single 
performance obligation being a series 
of goods or services satisfied over time.

Revenue is recognised based on the 
amount of consideration expected to 
be received in exchange for satisfying 
the performance obligations.

Revenue relating to costs to serve the 
customer are invoiced in line with the 
customer receiving and consuming 
benefits under the contract via the 
‘open book’ charging mechanism 
with either a fixed or variable 
management fee and is recognised 
in the period in which it is earned. 
Performance obligations are satisfied 
over time and measured against 
minimum service level agreements. 
There has been no change in the timing 
of revenue recognition on application 
of IFRS 15.

In ‘closed book’ contracts, revenue 
is typically recognised based on a 
pre-agreed price and is typically 
per unit/parcel/delivery or pallet etc. 
Revenue based on a pre-agreed 
rate-card is recognised as services 
are provided, in line with the customer 
receiving and consuming benefits 
under the contract. There has been 
no change in the timing of revenue 
recognition on application of IFRS 15.

Fixed management fees are 
recognised over the contract term. 
Performance obligations are satisfied 
over time. There has been no change 
in the timing of revenue recognition on 
application of IFRS 15.

Variable management fees (a fixed 
percentage of costs) are recognised as 
the corresponding costs are incurred 
i.e. where we have the right to invoice 
the customer at an amount that 
corresponds directly with performance 
to date, we apply the practical 
expedient to recognise revenue at 
that amount.

Invoicing varies by contract but 
is typically either in line with work 
performed or initially on a budgeted 
volume basis with later adjustment 
to reflect actual activity. Where a 
contract contains elements of variable 
consideration, the Company will 
estimate the amount or revenue 
to which it will be entitled under 
the contract. 

Variable consideration can arise as 
a result of incentives, performance 
bonuses, penalties or other 
similar items. 

Variable revenue is recognised to the 
extent it is highly probable a significant 
revenue reversal will not occur in the 
future. There has been no change in 
the timing of revenue recognition on 
application of IFRS 15. 

109

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

B.17 Intra-Group guarantees
Where the Company enters 
into contracts to guarantee the 
indebtedness of other companies 
within the Group, the Company 
treats the guarantee contract as a 
contingent liability until such time as it 
becomes probable that the Company 
will be required to make a payment 
under the guarantee.

B.18 Judgments and key sources of 
estimation uncertainty
The preparation of the financial 
information under FRS 101 requires 
management to make judgments, 
estimates and assumptions concerning 
the future. The estimates and 
associated assumptions are based on 
historical experience and other factors 
that are believed to be reasonable 
under the circumstances, the results 
of which form the basis of making 
the judgments about carrying values 
of assets and liabilities that are not 
readily apparent from other sources. 
The resulting accounting estimates 
will, by definition, seldom equal the 
related actual results. The estimates 
and assumptions that have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment 
to the carrying amounts of assets and 
liabilities within the next financial year 
are discussed below.

(a) Revenue recognition
Judgment is required when 
determining the appropriate timing 
and amount of revenue that can 
be recognised, due to the various 
contractual arrangements in place, 
each with bespoke terms which 
can lead to different revenue 
recognition requirements.

B. Accounting policies continued
B.16 Revenue recognition continued
The Company does not expect to 
have any contracts which include a 
significant financing arrangement and 
therefore does not adjust its transaction 
price for the time value of money.

Where payments are received in 
advance of revenue being recognised 
they are included as contract liabilities. 

Where revenue is recognised in 
advance of amounts being invoiced, it 
is reported as a contract receivable.

Calculation of contract assets and 
contract liabilities is therefore necessary 
at period ends, with client billing 
arrangements not always coinciding 
with the Company’s reporting periods. 
Revenue from open book contracts 
includes contributions to the capital 
cost of items used in the delivery of 
services, together with a finance 
charge. Judgment is required when 
determining the appropriate timing 
and amount of revenue that can 
be recognised, due to the different 
contractual arrangements in place.

At certain sites where the Company has 
entered into leases, arrangements have 
been entered into with third and/or 
related parties, under which the 
Company receives fees for property-
related advisory services. Revenue 
earned from property-related  
advisory services is recognised in the 
consolidated income statement at fair 
value of the consideration receivable, 
net of VAT. Management assesses the 
fees that are applicable to each 
specific transaction and recognises 
revenue in the income statement at the 
time of the underlying transaction. In 
forming the judgment, the Company 
considers whether the leases it has 
entered into are operating leases, 
whether the future rentals are at market 
value and accordingly whether the 
fees can be attributed to delivered 
property-related advisory services. 
Property-related advisory fees are 
recognised as services are provided. 
There has been no change in the timing 
of revenue recognition on the 
application of IFRS 15.

110

Clipper Logistics plc C. Auditor’s remuneration
Remuneration payable to the Company’s auditor is shown in note 6 to the Group Financial Statements.

D. Intangible assets

Cost:
At 1 May 2017
Additions
Acquisition

At 30 April 2018

Additions
Acquisition

At 30 April 2019

Accumulated amortisation:
At 1 May 2017
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 30 April 2018

Charge for the year

At 30 April 2019

Net book value:

At 1 May 2017

At 30 April 2018

At 30 April 2019

Goodwill 
Company 
£’000

Contracts  
and licences 
Company 
£’000

Computer  
software 
Company 
£’000

Total 
Company 
£’000

8,312
–
–

8,312

–
–

723
–
7,410

8,133

–
–

8,312

8,133

2,600
–
–

2,600

–

723
–
–

723

818

2,600

1,541

5,712

5,712

5,712

–

7,410

6,592

1,451
920
601

2,972

1,889
–

4,861

1,257
157
–

1,414

544

1,958

194

1,558

2,903

10,486
920
8,011

19,417

1,889
–

21,306

4,580
157
–

4,737

1,362

6,099

5,906

14,680

15,207

On 30 April 2018 the Company acquired the entire trade, assets and undertaking of its subsidiary, Tesam Distribution Limited 
at market value. For further detail, see note T.

111

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

E. Property, plant and equipment 

Leasehold  
property 
Company 
£’000

Motor  
vehicles 
Company 
£’000

Cost:
At 1 May 2017
Additions
Acquisitions
Disposals

At 30 April 2018

Additions
Acquisitions
Disposals

At 30 April 2019

Accumulated depreciation:
At 1 May 2017
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 30 April 2018

Charge for the year
Disposals

At 30 April 2019

Net book value:

At 1 May 2017

At 30 April 2018

At 30 April 2019

Plant, 
machinery, 
fixtures & 
fittings 
Company 
£’000

49,234
6,712
555
–

56,501

14,068
–
(219)

Total 
Company 
£’000

53,295
9,856
625
(50)

63,726

17,788
–
(453)

1,388
6
58
(50)

1,402

170
–
(234)

1,338

70,350

81,061

1,098
138
(46)

1,190

100
(187)

17,425
4,148
–

21,573

5,075
(12)

19,773
4,618
(46)

24,345

5,841
(199)

2,673
3,138
12
–

5,823

3,550
–
–

9,373

1,250
332
–

1,582

666
–

2,248

1,103

26,636

29,987

1,423

4,241

7,125

290

212

235

31,809

34,928

43,714

33,522

39,381

51,074

Included within property, plant and equipment are amounts held under finance lease contracts. At 30 April 2019, the net book 
value of these assets was £33,952,000 (2018: £25,825,000). The depreciation charged to the accounts in the year in respect of 
such assets amounted to £3,849,000 (2018: £2,782,000).

Additions to plant, machinery, fixtures & fittings include £3,365,000 (2018: £1,517,000) in respect of assets in the course 
of construction.

112

Clipper Logistics plc F. Investments

Cost:
At 1 May 2017
Additions

At 30 April 2018

Additions

At 30 April 2019

Provision for impairment:
At 1 May 2017 
Write down in the year (see note T)

At 30 April 2018

Write down in the year

At 30 April 2019

Net book value:

At 1 May 2017

At 30 April 2018

At 30 April 2019

Subsidiary 
undertakings 
£’000

20,443
15,787

36,230

4,312

40,542

215
11,410

11,625

–

11,625

20,228

24,605

28,917

Other 
£’000

1,950
–

1,950

–

1,950

–
–

–

–

–

1,950

1,950

1,950

113

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

F. Investments continued
During the year ended 30 April 2019, the Company capitalised an intercompany loan balance of 5,000,000 euros with Clipper 
Logistics KG (GmbH & Co.) in exchange for further share capital. 

In the year ended 30 April 2018, the Company acquired the entire share capital of Tesam Distribution Limited and RepairTech 
Limited (see note 28 to the Group Financial Statements) and subscribed for further share capital in Clipper Logistics Sp. z o.o.

Subsidiary undertakings
Except where indicated, the subsidiary undertakings are incorporated and operate in Great Britain, registered in England 
and Wales and the Company or Group owns 100% of the issued ordinary share capital and voting rights. All the following 
subsidiaries are consolidated in the Group Financial Statements.

Company

Nature of business during the year

Servicecare Support Services Limited1

Returns management services and on-line retail

Clipper Logistics KG (GmbH & Co.) (Germany)2

Contract distribution and warehousing

Clipper Logistics Sp. z o.o.(Poland)3

Contract distribution and warehousing

RepairTech Limited4

Technical services

Northern Commercials (Mirfield) Limited5

Sale, servicing and repair of commercial vehicles

Stormont Truck and Van Limited*

Agency for leasing commitments

Clipper Verwaltungs GmbH (Germany)*2

Agency for leasing commitments

Electrotec International Limited*1

Gagewell Transport Limited

Clipper e-commerce Limited

Clipper Logistics (Processing) Limited

Clipper Logistics (Warehousing) Limited

Clipper Secure Logistics Limited

Clipper Logistics BV (Netherlands)

DTS Logistics Limited

Genesis Specialised Product Packing Limited

Guardex Security Services Limited

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Tesam Distribution Limited

Agency for contractual commitments

Transference Technology Limited (90% owned)*

Northern Commercial Trailers (Mirfield) Limited*

Dormant

Dormant

*  Shareholding held indirectly.

See note 28 to the Group Financial Statements for additions during the year ended 30 April 2018.

The registered office of each subsidiary is Clipper Logistics Group, Gelderd Road, Leeds LS12 6LT except for:
1.  Hollinwood Works, Manchester Road, Hollinwood, Oldham, Lancashire OL9 7AA
2.  Steinweg 2, 95213, Münchberg, Germany
3.  3 ul. Zernicka, 22, Robakowo, 62-023, Poznan´, Poland
4.  4b Westfield Road, Kineton Industrial Estate, Southam, Warwickshire CV47 0JH
5.  Armytage Road, Wakefield Road Industrial Estate, Brighouse, West Yorkshire HD6 1PG

G. Inventories

Component parts and consumable stores

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

670

466

114

Clipper Logistics plc H. Trade and other receivables

Amounts falling due within one year:
Trade receivables
Less: Provision for impairment of receivables

Trade receivables - net
Other receivables
Contract assets
Prepayments
Amounts receivable from related parties (see note S)
Amounts owed by fellow Group companies

Amounts falling due after more than one year:
Amounts owed by fellow Group companies

Total

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

45,203
(27)

33,457
(100)

45,176
302
14,951
15,002
2,087
2,403

79,921

66

79,987

33,357
105
5,914
12,630
5,691
533

58,230

4,540

62,770

The contract assets relate to the Group’s rights to consideration for work completed but not billed at the reporting date. 
They are transferred to receivables when the amounts are invoiced. 

I. Trade and other payables

Trade payables
Other taxes and social security
Other payables
Contract liabilities 
Accruals
Amounts payable to related parties (see note S)
Amounts payable to fellow Group companies

Total trade and other payables

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

30,339
9,790
578
23,159
17,449
227
5,307

86,849

21,840
7,727
2,688
16,012
13,939
233
5,236

67,675

The contract liabilities primarily relate to the consideration invoiced to customers in advance of the work being completed.

J. Financial liabilities: borrowings

Non-current:
Bank loans
Obligations under finance leases or hire purchase agreements

Total non-current

Current:
Bank overdrafts
Bank loans
Obligations under finance leases or hire purchase agreements

Total current

Total borrowings

Less: Cash and cash equivalents

Non-current financial assets (see note S)

Net debt

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

17,307
20,703

38,010

7,918
781
8,194

16,893

54,903

378
1,950

52,575

9,837
15,409

25,246

12,112
860
5,665

18,637

43,883

892
1,950

41,041

Bank loans and overdrafts are secured by a charge over the Group’s assets. The Company’s overdraft is offset by cash 
balances in subsidiary companies. The net Group overdraft at 30 April 2019 is £nil (2018: £1,337,000). Obligations under finance 
leases or hire purchase agreements are secured by related assets.

115

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019 
/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

K. Bank loans
Bank loans repayable included within borrowings are analysed as follows:

In one year or less
Between one and five years
After five years

Total

2019
Company
£’000

781
17,307
–

18,088

2018
Company
£’000

860
9,837
–

10,697

See note 20 to the Group Financial Statements for the principal features of the bank loans.

L. Finance leases and hire purchase agreements
The Company uses finance leases and hire purchase agreements to acquire property, plant and equipment.

The amounts which are repayable under hire purchase or finance lease instalments are shown below:

Fixed rate leases:
Minimum lease payments:
In one year or less
Between one and five years

Interest:
In one year or less
Between one and five years

Principal of fixed rate leases:
In one year or less
Between one and five years

Variable rate leases:

Total

M. Provisions

At 1 May 2017
Utilised
Charged in year

At 30 April 2018

Utilised
Charged in year

At 30 April 2019

Provisions have been analysed between current and non-current as follows:

Current
Non-current

Total

116

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

9,386
22,280

31,666

(1,192)
(1,577)

(2,769)

8,194
20,703

28,897

–

6,372
16,245

22,617

(707)
(836)

(1,543)

5,665
15,409

21,074

–

28,897

21,074

Uninsured 
losses 
Company 
£’000

Dilapidations 
Company 
£’000

Total 
Company 
£’000

–
(213)
213

–

(168)
168

1,322
(206)
375

1,491

(84)
664

1,322
(419)
588

1,491

(252)
832

–

2,071

2,071

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

100
1,971

2,071

61
1,430

1,491

Clipper Logistics plc Uninsured losses
The uninsured losses provision is in respect of the cost of claims (generally for commercial vehicles and employment related) 
which are either not insured externally or fall below the excess on the Group’s insurance policies.

Dilapidations
Provisions are established over the life of leases to cover remedial work necessary at termination under the terms of those 
leases. Two key sites have a lease that expires 18 and 14 years from the balance sheet date and an office lease expires 
12 years from the balance sheet date. All other leases expire in 10 years or less.

N. Deferred tax
Deferred tax balances in the Statement of Financial Position are as follows:

Tax effect of temporary differences due to:
Share based payments
Other timing differences

Deferred tax asset

Intangible assets
Accelerated capital allowances
Other timing differences

Deferred tax liability

Net deferred tax 

Brought 
forward

554
65

619

(1,362)
(856)
–

(2,218)

(1,599)

(Charged)/
credited to 
income 
statement

(Charged)/
credited to 
share based 
payment 
reserve

(205)
(32)

(237)

164
(1,104)
–

(940)

(1,177)

214
–

214

–
–
–

–

At  
30 April  
2019 
£’000

563
33

596

(1,198)
(1,960)
–

(3,158)

214

(2,562)

Legislation to reduce the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 17% with effect from 1 April 2020 was substantively enacted 
at 30 April 2018. A rate of 17% (2018: 17%) has been applied in the measurement of the Group’s UK deferred tax assets and 
liabilities in the year.

O. Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid:
101,614,522 (2018: 101,360,523) ordinary shares of 0.05p each

2019 
Company 
£’000

2018 
Company 
£’000

51

51

During the year the Company issued 253,999 ordinary shares to satisfy employee share options, for aggregate consideration 
of £350,000. The new shares rank pari passu with all existing ordinary shares in issue. See also note 23 to the Group 
Financial Statements.

P. Share based payments
Further details of the share option schemes are set out in note 23 to the Group Financial Statements. The credit to the 
Company’s income statement for equity settled transactions in the year ended 30 April 2019 was £1,152,000 (2018: charge  
of £1,146,000).

Q. Commitments and contingencies
Operating lease commitments – land and buildings:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Total minimum lease payments

Operating lease commitments – vehicles, plant and equipment:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Total minimum lease payments

2019
Company
£’000

21,543
75,633
72,841

2018
Company
£’000

17,103
54,601
55,585

170,017

127,289

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

5,384
5,860
–

6,457
9,073
2

11,244

15,532

117

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

R. Capital commitments

Authorised and contracted for
Authorised, but not contracted for

Total capital commitments

2019
Company
£’000

1,979
6,567

8,546

2018
Company
£’000

5,350
12,359

17,709

S. Related party disclosures
Clicklink Logistics Limited (see note 15 to the Group Financial Statements) is a supplier of logistics services to the Company. 
The Company provides certain resources to Clicklink, principally people and vehicles, under the terms of the joint venture 
agreement. Amounts charged for these resources are included in revenue.

Branton Court Stud LLP, in which Steve Parkin is a partner, receives management and administration services from the 
Company. Additionally, in the current year, the Company recognised a credit from Branton Court Stud LLP of £977,000 in 
respect of Branton Court’s contribution to costs incurred by the Company in respect of of a one-off event. 

During the year, the Group entered into a framework agreement with Styles & Wood Limited, a company which shares 
common directors. A payment of £2.0 million was advanced in relation to the agreed works on 27 June 2018. The agreement 
was subsequently cancelled and the payment was returned by the 20 August 2018. 

During the year, £46,000 was received from Steve Parkin in relation to repaying Clipper for personal expenditure incurred on a 
company credit card. At 30 April 2019 £4,000 was outstanding and this was settled on 26 July 2019.

The Company advanced two petty cash amounts totalling £27,000 to David Hodkin in the year in exchange for personal 
cheques from David Hodkin. In both cases, there was a short period of time elapsing between David’s withdrawal of the cash 
and Clipper’s subsequent cashing of the cheque. As at 30 April 2019, £nil was outstanding.

Guiseley Association Football Club shares a common director with the Company. 

Hamsard 3476 Limited, a company controlled by Steve Parkin, receives property-related services from the Company.

Knaresborough Investments Limited, a company controlled by Steve Parkin, receives management and administration 
services from the Company. 

Roydhouse Properties Limited is the landlord of two of the Company’s leasehold properties and has common directors with 
Clipper Logistics plc.

Southerns Office Interiors Limited supplies office furniture to the Company. A company owned by Steve Parkin is registered as a 
person with significant control over Southerns Limited, the ultimate parent of Southerns Office Interiors Limited.

Trust Electric Heating Limited, a supplier to the Company, shares a common director with Clipper Logistics plc.

Key management compensation is disclosed in note 5 to the Group Financial Statements.

During the year, £590,000 was recharged to Branton Court Stud LLP for management time of Directors and other key 
management personnel in proportion to the time spent on non-Clipper related activities. (2018: £285,000 charged Branton 
Court LLP and £285,000 charged to Knaresborough Investments Limited).

Balances owing to or from these related parties at 30 April were as follows:

Non-current financial assets:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – interest bearing loan
Trade and other receivables:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – trading balance
Hamsard 3476 Limited
Branton Court Stud LLP
Trade and other payables:
Clicklink Logistics Limited
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Trust Electric Heating Limited

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

1,950

1,626
–
461

227
–
–

1,950

1,491
4,200
–

168
63
2

The shareholders in Clicklink Logistics Limited have jointly made available to that company a term loan facility of £3,900,000 
of which the Company’s 50% share is £1,950,000. Interest on each loan is calculated at a margin above 12 month LIBOR and is 
payable annually. All loans drawn under the facility are repayable in November 2022.

118

Clipper Logistics plc Transactions with these related parties in the year ended 30 April were as follows:

Items credited to the income statement:
Clicklink Logistics Limited – revenue
Clicklink Logistics Limited – finance income
Hamsard 3476 Ltd
Knaresborough Investments Limited
Branton Court Stud LLP1
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Items charged to the income statement:
Clicklink Logistics Limited
Knaresborough Investments Limited
Hamsard 3476 Ltd
Roydhouse Properties Limited 
Branton Court Stud LLP
Southerns Office Interiors Limited 
Guiseley Association Football Club
Trust Electric Heating Limited
Purchase of non-current assets
Southerns Office Interiors Limited
Sale of non-current assets
Clicklink Logistics Limited – items procured but not capitalised by the Company

2019
Company
£’000

2018
Company
£’000

20,392
52
3,100
30
2,095
–

2,750
29
145
910
129
–
25
–

–

–

15,738
35
4,200
285
359
18

1,682
8
–
865
–
28
67
4

70

277

1. Amounts charged to Branton Court Stud LLP represent recharges of costs with no element of mark up.

T. Business combinations
Tesam Distribution Limited
On 24 May 2017 the Company acquired the entire issued share capital of Tesam Distribution Limited (“Tesam”) in exchange 
for cash consideration. Tesam operated as a provider of a variety of warehousing and distribution services to the retail sector. 
With effect from 30 April 2018 the trade, assets and undertaking of Tesam have been hived-up into Clipper Logistics plc. 

Acquisition:

Assets:
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Liabilities:
Trade and other payables
Short term borrowings
Current tax liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Total identifiable net assets at fair value

Goodwill arising on acquisition

Total consideration

Intangible assets recognised, consist of customer relationships and internally generated software.

Return on investment:

Original cost of investment
Residual asset value

Investment write-down
Dividends received

Net earnings in the year ended 30 April 2018

Fair value 
£’000

625
8,011
1,002
3,405

(2,920)
(899)
(777)
(1,459)

6,988

–

6,988

£’000

11,750
340

(11,410)
12,847

1,437

119

Company Financial StatementsGroup Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic ReportAnnual Report and Accounts 2019/ Company Financial Statements

Notes to the Company Financial Statements continued

U. Subsequent events 
In April 2019, the Company entered into a series of contracts with a customer, which when combined represented a 
business combination in accordance with IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’. The acquisition consists of premises, assets and a 
workforce, together carrying out a logistics service business that will be outsourced to the Company. The business acquired 
is an unincorporated entity. Several areas required significant judgment by management, in particular that the transfer of 
employees under TUPE and the lease of the premises commenced only after the year end limiting the ability of the Company 
to control the relevant activities of the acquired business. On balance the Company has concluded that the effective date of 
the business combination is 1 July 2019 and that this series of transactions should be reflected within the first half of the year 
ending 30 April 2020. This is when management have concluded that control has passed to the Company. The Company has  
carried out a provisional fair value exercise of the business combination, which will give rise to provisional ‘negative goodwill’ 
of £2,951,000. The ‘negative goodwill’ will be recognised within the Company income statement in the first half of the year 
ending 30 April 2020.

The provisional fair value table for the business combination is shown below.

Purchase consideration and cash flows:

Cash consideration payable
Cash consideration receivable

Total net consideration payable

Acquisition:

Assets:
Property, plant and equipment
Customer relationship
Liabilities:
Current provisions
Deferred tax liabilities

Total identifiable net assets at fair value
‘Negative goodwill’ arising on acquisition

Total consideration

£’000

2,899
(2,765)

134

Provisional 
fair values
 £’000

2,899
3,387

(1,600)
(808)

3,878
(3,744)

134

As part of the series of transactions, the customer paid the Company consideration in return for the Company assuming 
certain potential liabilities. This resulted in the net consideration payable being less than the provisional fair value of net assets 
acquired, principally the customer relationship, which gave rise to ‘negative goodwill’. 

Professional fees and costs in relation to the acquisition are expected to not exceed £50,000.

120

Clipper Logistics plc Directors, Secretary, Registered & Head Office and Advisors

Directors:

Steve Parkin, Executive Chairman  
Tony Mannix, Chief Executive Officer  
David Hodkin, Chief Financial Officer  
Stephen Robertson, Senior Independent Non-Executive Director
Stuart Watson, Independent Non-Executive Director  
Mike Russell, Independent Non-Executive Director 

Company Secretary:

Marianne Hodgkiss

Registered Office and Head Office of the Company:

Registered number:

Sponsor, financial advisor, sole bookrunner and 
joint broker:

Joint broker:

Legal advisors:

Auditor:

Registrars:

Gelderd Road 
Leeds  
LS12 6LT

03042024

Numis Securities Limited  
The London Stock Exchange Building 
10 Paternoster Square 
London  
EC4M 7LT

Joh. Berenberg, Gossler & Co. KG
60 Threadneedle Street
London
EC2R 8HP

Squire Patton Boggs (UK) LLP 
2 Park Lane 
Leeds 
LS3 1ES 

Pinsent Masons LLP 
1 Park Row 
Leeds  
LS1 5AB

KPMG LLP  
1 Sovereign Square 
Sovereign Street 
Leeds  
LS1 4DA

Equiniti  
Aspect House  
Spencer Road 
Lancing  
West Sussex  
BN99 6DA

Financial public relations advisors to the Company:

Buchanan Communications Limited 
107 Cheapside 
London  
EC2V 6DN

121

Annual Report and Accounts 2019 
C

l

i

p

p

e

r

L

o

g

i

s

t

i

c

s

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

9

Clipper Logistics plc
Gelderd Road  
Leeds  
LS12 6LT

Tel: 0113 204 2050  
Email: info@clippergroup.co.uk  
Web: www.clippergroup.co.uk